www.uniglas.net

Transcription

www.uniglas.net

www.uniglas.net
2nd edition 2012
Issued by: UNIGLAS® GmbH & Co. KG, Montabaur
© Copyright: UNIGLAS®
Editorial: UNIGLAS® in cooperation with mkt
Layout and design: mkt gmbh, Alsdorf
Editorial deadline: November 2011
Reproduction, including extracts, only permitted upon prior approval.
This manual has been compiled on the basis of current state of the art
and to the best of our knowledge. Subject to change.
No legal claims may be derived from the contents of this manual.
|3
Preface
Preface
The UNIGLAS® Cooperation
Our advantages at a glance:
n
Guarantee funds
n
CE certification
n
Wide product range
n
UNIGLAS® | SLT software for
independent project design
n
In-house test lab
n
Technical support
4|
Achieve more together UNIGLAS®
The Name UNIGLAS® represents technical progress and
innovative solutions made from
high performance insulating
glass, specialised processed
glass as well as all types of
glass design. Founded in 1995,
today this unique cooperation
comprises 25 equal and independent
associates
from
Germany, Austria, Switzerland,
Slovenia and the Netherlands.
Long-term experience, close
cooperation with glass-processing companies and window manufacturers as well as a
close-meshed network of partners in the specific regions support UNIGLAS®, allowing them
to respond quickly and reliably
to your requirements and individual demands.
With UNIGLAS® you are in
good hands. Your advantage:
as a competent partner with
profound know-how, we jointly
realise projects with you - on
time and efficiently. And it goes
without saying that we comply
with highest quality requirements and provide best-possible planning security through
our guarantee fund. You can
rely on our competence! For all
is clear with UNIGLAS®.
n
Flexibility and independent
customer cooperation
n
Versatile competence
n
Long-term market experience
n
True added value through
active partnership
As part of its obligation to all
Customers
and
Partners,
UNIGLAS® together with its
Associates established a guarantee fund. This, together with
delivery and performance guarantees, ensures compliance
with
agreed
performance
requirements.
All UNIGLAS® products are CE
certified and comply with all
requirements of the Construction Products Directive of the
European Commission. By the
way, UNIGLAS® was the first
cooperation that had their insulating glass products CE-certified.
|5
UNIGLAS® | Sites
UNIGLAS® | Sites
Our Proximity Your advantage
GLAS SCHNEIDER GMBH & CO. KG
D-57627 Hachenburg
Phone: +49 (0) 2662 8008-0
[email protected]
KÖWA ISOLIERGLAS GMBH
D-92442 Wackersdorf
Phone: +49 (0) 9431 7479-0
[email protected]
ENROTHERM GMBH
D-66386 St. Ingbert-Rohrbach
Phone: +49 (0) 6894 9554-0
[email protected]
GLAS KLEIN GMBH
D-94469 Deggendorf
Phone: +49 (0) 991 37034-0
[email protected]
SINSHEIMER GLAS UND
BAUBESCHLAGHANDEL GMBH
D-74889 Sinsheim
Phone: +49 (0) 7261 687-03
[email protected]
SGT GMBH SICHERHEITS- UND
GLASTECHNIK
D-97941 Tauberbischofsheim
Phone: +49 (0) 9341 9206-0
[email protected]
GLAS MEYER & SÖHNE GMBH
D-79114 Freiburg
Phone: +49 (0) 761 45542-0
[email protected]
KUNTE GLAS GMBH & CO. KG
D-99734 Nordhausen
Phone: +49 (0) 3631 9003-46
[email protected]
GLAS BLESSING GMBH & CO. KG
D-88214 Ravensburg
Phone: +49 (0) 751 884-0
[email protected]
n AUSTRIA (AT)
For more information and
technical regulations please
visit our homepage or contact
your UNIGLAS partner:
http://www.uniglas.net
®
n GERMANY (D)
PREUßENGLAS GMBH
D-15890 Eisenhüttenstadt
Phone: +49 (0) 3364 4040-0
[email protected]
HENZE-GLAS GMBH
D-37412 Hörden am Harz
Phone: +49 (0) 5521 9909-0
[email protected]
FRERICHS GLAS GMBH
D-21339 Lüneburg
Phone: +49 (0) 4131 21-0
[email protected]
HOHENSTEIN ISOLIERGLAS GMBH
D-39319 Redekin
Phone: +49 (0) 39341 972-0
[email protected]
FRERICHS GLAS GMBH
D-27283 Verden (Aller)
Phone: +49 (0) 4231 102-0
[email protected]
J. RICKERT GMBH & CO. KG
D-46395 Bocholt-Lowick
Phone: +49 (0) 2871 2181-0
[email protected]
WAPRO GMBH & CO. KG
D-36452 Diedorf/Rhön
Phone: +49 (0) 36966 777-0
[email protected]
D. FLINTERMANN GMBH & CO. KG
D-48499 Salzbergen
Phone: +49 (0) 5971 9706-0
[email protected]
6|
PETSCHENIG GLASTEC GMBH
A-1092 Wien
Phone: +43 (0) 1 3179 232
[email protected]
GLAS MARTE GMBH
A-6900 Bregenz
Phone: +43 (0) 5574 6722-0
[email protected]
PETSCHENIG GLASTEC GMBH
A-2285 Leopoldsdorf
Phone: +43 (0) 2216 2266-0
[email protected]
EGGER GLAS ISOLIERUND SICHERHEITSGLASERZEUGUNG GMBH
A-8212 Pischelsdorf
Phone: +43 (0) 3113 3751-0
[email protected]
PICHLER GLAS GMBH
A-4880 St. Georgen im Attergau
Phone: +43 (0) 7667 8579
[email protected]
n SLOVENIA (SI)
n SWITZERLAND (CH)
ERTL GLAS STEKLO D.O.O.
SI-1310 Ribnica
Phone: +386 (0) 18350500
[email protected]
SOFRAVER S.A.
CH-1754 Avry-Rosé
Phone: +41 (0) 26 470 4510
[email protected]
n NETHERLANDS (NL)
GLASINDUSTRIE BEN EVERS B.V.
NL-5482 TN Schijndel
Phone: +31 (0) 73 547 4567
[email protected]
|7
UNIGLAS® | Products
UNIGLAS® | Products
You will find in the UNIGLAS® |
SAFE safetyglass product family the perfect glass for your
application, meeting all the
safety requirements necessary
in insulating glass. For example
in glass guard rails, overhead
glazing, walk-on glass and
bullet-resistant glazing.
Current product brochures
Insulating glass from the
UNIGLAS® | TOP energy-saving
glass series provides maximum
thermal insulation for passive
houses that use solar energy.
UNIGLAS® | SUN solar control
glasses are available in a wide
range of versions, from maximum selectivity (maximum light
transmittance with low g-value)
to a wide range of colour variations. Glasses with neutral
reflection to heavily mirrored
surfaces are available for additional design effects.
Product variety from UNIGLAS®
Bright and light-flooded rooms
enhance home comfort and the
joy of working and living.
UNIGLAS® insulating glasses
help you here, and conform to
all requirements relating to building physics and construction
technology. For example there
are insulating glasses with outstanding sound insulation, persuasive light transmittance
values and also specific safety
properties, in other words there
is always the right UNIGLAS®
insulating glass for every architectonic requirement and also
for your own personal wishes.
This is a small excerpt from our
wide range of products.
8|
Our UNIGLAS® | TOP EnergySaving Glass is a specially
designed thermal insulation
glass that reflects the longwave heat radiation from the
heating system, but allows visible light from solar radiation to
pass almost unhindered and
hence contribute effectively to
building energy efficiency.
With UNIGLAS® | PHON Sound
Reduction Glass, you can
achieve high sound insulation
properties and optimum product matching to the respective
noise source, location and
room use, also in combination
with solar control, protection
against burglary and fall prevention.
With the UNIGLAS® | SHADE
blind and film systems you can
have variable shading from
sunlight. The blinds or films
provided in the cavity between
panes (depending on the version) can be controlled manually, electrically or by a BUS
system.
For more information about our
products please visit our website www.uniglas.net or request
our product brochures and
information flyers.
The current brochures with
detailed product descriptions
are continually updated and
expanded and are available
from all UNIGLAS® companies.
|9
Contents Overview
10 |
Contents Overview
n
Basic Glass
1
n
Design Glass
2
n
Insulating Glass Terminology
3
n
Thermal Insulation / Energy Gain
4
n
Sound Insulation
5
n
Solar Control
6
n
Safety
7
n
UNIGLAS® Systems
8
n
Standards
9
n
Glazing Guidelines and Tolerances
10
| 11
Contents
1 Basic Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.1 Float Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Thicknesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.2 Ornamental Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Light scattering / Screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Channel-shaped glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2 Design Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
Single-Pane Safety Glass (SSG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Building physics properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Resistance to impact and shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Tensile bending strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Heat and cold effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Shock resistance to ball impact test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.2 Heat-Soak Single-Pane Safety Glass
and SSG-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.3 Heat Strengthened Glass (HSG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.1 Tensile bending strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.2 Heat and cold effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
Enamel Coating with Glass Ceramic Paint . . . . . 38
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Rolling process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Screen printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.5 SSG Alarm Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.6 Curved Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.6.1 Manual for thermally curved glass in construction . . 43
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.7.6
Laminated Safety Glass and Laminated Glass . . 64
Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Impact resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Resistance categories according to DIN EN . . . . . . . 65
Decorative laminated glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Contents
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
Glass Design Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
LaserGrip® – Accessible glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Digital glass printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Frosted glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Artistic glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Grinding techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.9 Self-Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.9.1 Basic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.9.2 Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.10 ShowerGuard™ – Forever Beautiful . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.11 DiamondGuard® Scratch Resistant Glass . . . . . . 75
2.12 Fire Protection Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.13 X-Ray Protection Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.14 Safety Mirrors and Spy Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.15 Anti-Reflective Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.16 Bird Protection Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3 Insulating Glass Terminology
. . . . . . 78
3.1 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.2 U Value (heat transmittance coefficient). . . . . . . 81
3.3 Glass Joints and All-Glass Corners in
Windows and Facades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.4 Emissivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.5 Solar Gains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.6 Global Radiation Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.7 Light Transmittance τv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.8 Total Energy Transmittance (g value) . . . . . . . . . 98
3.9 Shading Coefficient (SC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.10 Solar Transmittance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.11 Absorption of Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.12 Colour Rendition Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.13 Light Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.14 Circadian Light Transmittance τc(460) . . . . . . . . . 100
3.15 UV-Radiation Transmittance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.16 Selectivity Factor S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.17 UNIGLAS® | SLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.18 Thermal Insulation during Summer . . . . . . . . . . 101
12 |
| 13
Contents
3.19 Interference Phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.20 Insulated Glass Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.21 Dew Point Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.22 Plant Growth behind Insulating Glass. . . . . . . . 105
3.23 Electromagnetic Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.24 Insulated Glass Units with Stepped Edges . . . 107
Contents
6.4 Solar Control Systems
within Insulated Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6.4.1 UNIGLAS® | SHADE Venetian Blind System . . . . . . . 140
6.4.2 UNIGLAS® | SHADE Foil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6.5 Special Applications with Single-Pane
Constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
3.25 Decorative Insulated Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
7 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
3.26 Dimensioning of Glass Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . 110
7.1 Basic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
4 Thermal Insulation /
Energy Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
4.1 Basic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
4.1.1 Edge seal systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
4.1.2 Nominal and measured values
for glass and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4.2 UNIGLAS® Products for Heat Insulation . . . . . . 120
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
UNIGLAS® | TOP Energy Saving Glass . . . . . . . . . . 120
UNIGLAS® | VITAL Wellnessglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Heat Mirror™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
UNIGLAS® | SOLAR Photovoltaic glass . . . . . . . . . 123
UNIGLAS® | PANEL Vacuum Insulation . . . . . . . . . . 124
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5 Sound Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.1.1 Weighted sound reduction index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.1.2 Coincidence frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.2 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.3 UNIGLAS® | PHON Sound Reduction Glass . . . 134
5.4 Special Applications with Single-Shell Glass
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6 Solar Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.2 UNIGLAS® | SUN Solar Control Glass . . . . . . . . . 138
6.3 UNIGLAS® | ECONTROL
Switchable Insulating Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
14 |
7.2 Special Applications for Safety Glass . . . . . . . . 155
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
Safety and resistance to ball impact . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Lift glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Accessible glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Classification of safety glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8 UNIGLAS® Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.1 UNIGLAS® Glass Fitting Systems
for Insulated Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.1.1 UNIGLAS® | SHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
for Projecting Glass Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.2.1 UNIGLAS® | OVERHEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.3 UNIGLAS® Glass Fitting Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8.3.7
GM PICO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
GM PICO KING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
GM PICO LORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
GM PUNTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
GM POINT P 60/22 SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
GM POINT P 80/29 SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
More glass fitting systems - an overview . . . . . . . . 175
8.4 GM BRACKET S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
8.5 UNIGLAS® | STYLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
8.5.6
8.5.7
8.5.8
GM TOPROLL 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
GM TOPROLL 100 SHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
GM TOPROLL SMART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
GM TOPROLL 10/14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
GM ZARGENPROFIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
GM LIGHTROLL 6/8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
GM LIGHTROLL 10/12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
FITTINGS for swing doors and
fully glazed constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
| 15
Contents
Contents
8.5.9 GM RAILING® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
8.5.10 GM RAILING® SOLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
8.5.11 GM RAILING® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
10.7 Rosenheim Table ‘Stress categories
for glazing of windows’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
8.6 only|glass LightCube –
Seating Furniture and Art Object. . . . . . . . . . . . 192
10.9 Frame Deflection, Glass Thickness
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
®
9 Standards
10.8 Materials Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
10.10 Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
9.1 DIN Standards
(German national standards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
9.2 Austrian Standards
(Austrian national standards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
9.3 EN Standards
(European standards that have been
implemented in D, A, CH, NL, GB ) . . . . . . . . . . 198
9.4 ISO Standards
(International standards). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
9.5 TRLV (short version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
9.6 TRAV (short version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.7 TRPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
9.8 Energy Conservation Regulations for
Buildings (EnEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
9.9 OIB Regulation No. 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
9.10 Ü/CE Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
9.11 Quality Testing by
UNIGLAS® GmbH & Co. KG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
9.12 Application for the use of Glass Products –
German market only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
10.11 Special Structural Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
10.12 Notes on Product Liability and Warranty . . . . . 297
10.12.1 Guideline to assess the visible quality of
glass in buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
10.12.2 Regulation for Handling of
Multi-Pane Insulated Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
10.12.3 Guideline for Use of
Triple-Pane Insulated Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
10.12.4 Guideline to assess the visible quality
of glass systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
10.12.5 Recommendations for integrating systems
into insulating glass units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
of thermally toughened glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
enamelled and screen-printed glass . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
laminated glass and laminated safety glass . . . . . . 346
10.12.9 Guaranteed characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
10.12.10 Glass breakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
10.12.11 Surface damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
10.12.12 Special glass combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
10.12.13 Maintenance | Pane Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Appendix
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Subject Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
10 Glazing Guidelines
and Tolerances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Photo Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Insulated Glass – Product summery . . . . . . . . . 367
10.1 Glass Edges in Accordance with DIN 1249,
Part 11 and EN 12150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
10.2 Tolerances for Standardised Requirements . . . 236
10.3 General Requirements for Storage
and Transport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
10.4 Rebates and Blocks for Insulated Glass. . . . . . 258
10.5 Glazing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
10.6 Special Glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
16 |
| 17
Basic Glass
Basic Glass
1
1
1.1 Float Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.1.1 Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.1.2 Thicknesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.1.3 Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.1.4 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.2 Ornamental Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.1 Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.2 Light scattering / Screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.2.3 Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.2.4 Channel-shaped glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
18 |
| 19
Basic Glass
Basic Glass
1 Basic Glass
Basic glass is regarded as the
base product used for any kind
of further processing to manufacture functional glass, construction glass and interior glass
Float glass manufacturing process (illustration)
1
of higher quality. The base products used for these purposes are
float glass and ornamental glass.
Basic glass can also be used as
single-pane glass.
1.1 Float Glass
1.1.1 Manufacture
Float glass made of soda-lime
silicate glass is manufactured
according to EN 572-2 either as
clear or tinted glass, with planeparallel and fire-polished surfaces. The raw materials, comprising approx. 60 % quartz
sand, 20 % soda and sulphate,
and 20 % limestone and
dolomite, are mixed and heated
to approx. 1,600 °C. After
gassing of the molten mixture,
referred to as refining, the molten
glass is fed into the conditioning
basin and left to cool to approx.
1,200 °C before it then flows
over a refractory spout onto a
molten tin bath. Since glass
weighs less than half of the tin,
the viscous molten glass floats
above the tin and spreads out.
The glass mass remains on the
tin until it has cooled down to
about 600 °C and solidified
enough to be lifted off. The name
'float glass' derives from the
manufacturing process where
glass floats on the tin bath.
During floating, the side facing
the tin is rendered plane-parallel
to the opposite side, which is
continually fired.
The floating process takes place
in a protective gas atmosphere
of N2H2, preventing the tin from
oxidising.
20 |
Although the melting point of tin
is around 232 °C, the resultant
vapour pressure even at
1100 °C is so low that it does
not have any noteworthy disturbing effects on the glass substrate.
After being lifted off, the glass is
subject to a controlled and clearly defined cooling process in the
so-called annealing lehr, in which
the glass is cooled from 600 °C
to about 60 °C. This defined
cooling process is extremely
important for stress relief and
permits easier processing of the
material later on. Only at this
stage does the produced infinite
glass ribbon of approx. 3.4 m
width become visible. Subsequent quality controls, cutting
the glass normally into 6m long
sections, removal of side ridges
and stacking of the finished
panes of size 3.21 x 6.00 m are
the final steps of the process.
These float plants have a length
of around 500 m, beginning at
the mixture tank and ending at
the stacking area.
The particular feature of glass is
that during cooling of the molten
glass, its molecules do not combine to form crystals again, but
correspond to a liquid despite
the material's solid state. Glass
is also referred to as a undercooled liquid.
Mixture of
raw materials
Melting process
approx. 1.600 °C
Homogenisation
approx. 1.100 °C
Refining
Molten tin bath
approx. 1.100 °C – 600 °C
Cooling process
approx. 600 °C – 60 °C
Cutting system
The most common float glass
is clear glass. However, there is
specially tinted glass, ‘white
glass’ and tinted float glass that
are tinted in green, grey, blue,
pink or bronze. With white
glass, the quartz sand is almost
completely freed of the natural-
Quality control by means
of laser
Automatic storage
ly occurring iron - which is
responsible for the slight greenish tinge of normal float glass.
The result of this is that the
greenish shimmer at the glass
edges is removed and the float
glass becomes particularly
clear and colour-neutral.
| 21
Basic Glass
For tinted float glass, however,
chemical substances must be
added to the mixture which
then give the complete molten
glass the desired colour during
Basic Glass
the melting process, the result
of which is a tinted float glass
(see Þ Page 26).
n
Alkali resistance
Class 1-2 acc. to DIN ISO 695
Alkaline
solution class
1
2
3
1.1.2 Thicknesses
n
Normal float glass:
2 to 25 mm
n
White glass:
4 to 19 mm
n
Tinted float glass:
4 to 12 mm
Standard dimensions: Ribbon
dimension 3210 x 6000 mm,
lengths differing from the stated
dimensions are available upon
request.
1.1.3 Properties
n
n
Density
2500 kg/m3. A glass pane of
1 mm thickness and 1 m2 in
size has a weight of 2.5 kg.
Tensile bending strength
fg,k = 45 MPa, determined
according to EN 1288.
The tensile bending strength of
glass is not a material characteristic value; its measured
value is instead influenced by
the structure of the surface
subject to tensile stress, as is
the case with all brittle materials. The measured tensile
bending strength value is
reduced by microscopic or
macroscopic defects in the surface. That means that the concept of ‘tensile bending
strength’ can only be statistically defined by means of a reliable value for probability of
n
failure. With the tension predefined, the probability of failure
depends on the size of the surface subject to tensile stress
and on the duration of stress.
The tensile bending strength
defines the probability of failure
at a defined tensile bending
stress of 45 MPa for float glass
as stipulated in the German list
of construction rules, at a confidence coefficient of 95%
determined by means of statistical calculation methods, and
may on average be a maximum
of 5%.
n
n
Modulus of elasticity
70000 MPa according to
EN 572-1
Compressive strength
700 - 900 MPa
1
2
3
4
22 |
Explanation
acid resistant
slightly acid-soluble
moderately acid-soluble
strongly acid-soluble
50% surface loss
after 6 hours [mg/dm2]
from
from
from
0
0.7
1.5
15
to
to
to
0,7
1.5
15
Surface weight loss
after 3 hours [mg/dm2]
slightly alkali-soluble
moderately alkali-soluble
strongly alkali-soluble
from
from
0
75
175
to
to
75
175
Water resistance
Hydrolytic class 3-5 acc. to DIN ISO 719
Hydrolytic
class
Acid consumption at 0.01 N
hydrochloric acid per g glass grains [ml/g]
Base equivalent Na20
per g of glass grain [µg/g]
HGB
HGB
HGB
HGB
HGB
to
from
from
from
from
to
from
from
from
from
1
2
3
4
5
0.10
0.10
0.20
0.85
2.0
to 0.20
to 0.85
to 2.0
to 3.5
31
31
62
264
620
to
62
to 264
to 620
to 1085
Hydrolytic resistance of glass
and ceramic plates according to
DIN 52296, class 3-4. With this
method, the actual surface
resistance is determined in comparison with the so-called glass
grains testing method according
to DIN ISO 719.
n
least 30 cm away from the glazing. According to EnEV, a radiation shield is generally required
between radiators and glazing. If
no radiation shield is installed, the
glazing must be built with singlepane safety glass in the case of
short distances (15 cm) between
glazing and radiator. Otherwise, a
radiator with integrated radiation
protection must be installed.
Fresh alkaline substances,
for example substances that are
washed out of cement and run
along the glass surface, can
attack the silicic acid structure of
the glass and cause a coarse
surface. This effect occurs during
drying of the still-liquid leaching.
The process of washing substances out of the cement only
ends after the cement has fully
set and solidified. As a general
principle, it must be ensured that
no alkaline leaches may come in
contact with the glass surface.
n
Acid resistance
Class 1 acc. to DIN 12116
Acid class
n
1
Explanation
Resistance to changing
temperatures
Resistance against temperature
differences along the pane surface: 40 K. Short-term temperature differences of up to 40 K in
relation to the normal room temperature do not lead to any dangerous stresses inside the cross
section of the glass. However,
radiators should be installed at
Any anti-glare or solar control
devices that are installed behind
or below the glazing, pictures or
posters affixed to the pane, finger-paintings etc., or structural
parts may also cause higher
temperature differences in the
cross section of the pane when
subjected to sunlight.
n
Transformation range
520 - 550 °C
Prestressing and changes in
shape require temperatures
that are about 100°C higher.
| 23
Basic Glass
n
n
Glass softening point
approx. 600 °C
Coefficient of linear
expansion
9 x 10-6 K-1 according to DIN
ISO 7991 at 20 - 300 °C
The coefficient of linear expansion indicates the length by
which a glass edge of 1m
expands with a temperature
increase of 1K.
Basic Glass
n
Specific heat capacity
720 J/kg K
The specific heat in Joule (J)
indicates which heat quantity is
required for 1kg glass to heat
up by 1K. It depends on the
intrinsic temperature of the
glass.
n
Thermal conductivity
coefficient
λ = 1 W/mK (EN 572-1)
n
Heat transition coefficient
Ug = 5.8 W/m2K (EN 673)
1.1.4 Applications
1
Float glass serves as a base
product for all further transformed glass types of the
UNIGLAS® product range.
Various basic glasses
24 |
| 25
Basic Glass
Basic Glass
1.2 Ornamental Glass
1.2.2 Light scattering / screening
1.2.1 Manufacture
The geometrical dimensions of
waves, ribs, prisms and other
embossed textures of the ornamental glass surface can cause
light scattering and direction of
light which in turn may lead to a
required brightening up of
remote parts and corners of a
room.
Ornamental glass is manufactured according to EN 572-5/6. The raw materials and the
melting procedure are similar to
the float glass process.
However, for ornamental glass
the viscous molten glass exits
the lehr through rollers at the
so-called feeders. Here the
lower roller is smooth and even,
while the upper roller is structured.
Generally, it is possible to use
two structured rollers, however
this method is hardly used
nowadays due to impaired
ease of further processing and
cutting. The upper roller – also
referred to as structure roller –
defines the desired texture in
the solidifying glass ribbon. The
rollers and consequently the
structure can be changed after
every production batch. The
cooling, cutting and stacking
process is similar to float glass.
Moreover, colouring of the
glass in a large colour range is
also carried out as described
above for float glass (see Þ
Page 22).
Glazing with vertically ribbed
ornamental glass will illuminate
the space on the left and right
of the window. This structure
has hardly any influence on
floors and ceilings. If, however,
a window is glazed such that
the ribs run horizontally, the
incident daylight will be directed upwards and downwards.
This will improve illumination of
the ceiling and increase the
brightness level at the height of
work stations (see following
figure).
Examples for light scattering
Ornamental glass manufacturing process (illustration)
Refined molten glass
approx. 1,100 °C
Embossing the structure
(wire mesh insert)
In general, a distinction is made
between the following groups:
n
Ornamental glass
n
Wired ornamental glass
n
Wired glass with smooth surface
The characteristic feature of all
kinds of ornamental glass is the
more or less pronounced ornamentation of one of the surfaces. The glass is translucent
and serves to both shape and
brighten up spaces. The varying degree of opacity is the
26 |
Cooling
resulting function from the
combination of decorative texture, colour and thickness of
the glass. By selection of
appropriate glass, these effects
can be increased or diminished
as required. Ornamental glass
is used wherever clear transparency is to be diminished
without impairing translucency.
If several panes are combined
next to or above/below one
another to form a glazed surface, it is imperative to define
the direction of the structure by
its height and width.
Fig. 1: If a circular aperture diaphragm is inserted into a projection
device instead of a diapositive slide, a bright
white circle with a very
sharp contour will be
projected onto a black
screen.
Fig. 2: If a plate made of
light-scattering
ornamental glass is inserted
into the path of rays between the projector and
the screen, the glaring
bright spot will disappear
and the light is scattered
so that the illuminated
surface becomes much
larger.
Fig. 3: An example for
directed light: An ornamental glass plate with a
linear structure has been
inserted into the path of
rays, the lines of the
structure are vertical. The
rays of light are directed
to the right and left and
are not generally scattered to all sides.
1.2.3 Properties
The specific values of ornamental glass largely correspond to those of float glass.
Exceptions:
n
Density
without wire insert 2.5 g/cm3,
for wired glass 2.69 g/cm3
(2.69 x103 kg/m3)
n
Tensile bending strength
according to EN 1288
n Product variants
Almost all kinds of ornamental
glass can be processed to form
insulating glass, laminated
safety glass and (with the
exception of glass with wire
insert) single-pane safety
glass). The variety of the ornamental glass aspects can be
significantly increased by
enamelling, screen printing,
sandblasting, silvering or etching.
| 27
1
Basic Glass
Basic Glass
1.2.4 Channel-shaped glass
One product variant of ornamental glass is channel-shaped
glass with a U-profile, which is
manufactured in a machine
rolling process with and without
wire mesh insert in the longitudinal direction, in accordance
with EN 572, part 7. Channelshaped glass is produced
either with ornamental pattern
504 or without pattern.
Depending on the pattern, the
element is more or less transparent but it is always fully
translucent in the same way as
ornamental glass itself. And
thanks to the structural stability
of the elements (U shape), they
are suitable for glazing large
building areas. Installation may
be as single-shell or doubleshell.
Illustration of the types of installation (horizontal and vertical view)
With the help of different
designs in terms of width and
surface texture, light incidence,
light scattering, solar control
and thermal insulation can be
achieved. Depending on structural requirements, glazing to
heights of up to 7m is quite
possible.
amethyst or azure blue (bluish
variants). Heat-strengthened
channel-shaped glass with or
without heat-soak test offers
particular safety properties. It is
also suitable for horizontal
installation. The strengthened
glass is also available with
coloured enamelling.
With the special profiles, such
as 22/60/7, 25/60/7 or 32/60/7
without wire inserts, even
shock resistance to ball impact
in accordance with DIN 18032
can be achieved.
The use of thermally annealed
channel-shaped glass is subject to approval by a building
inspection authority. Use of
heat-strengthened
types
requires consent on a case-bycase basis.
Alternative colours for the
channel-shaped glass are
Single-shell
Example of application
Single-shell ‘sheet-pile wall’ (interior wall)
Two-shell
Single-shell
28 |
Single-shell
‘sheet-pile wall’
Two-shell
| 29
1
Design Glass
Design Glass
2
2
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
Single-Pane Safety Glass (SSG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Resistance to impact and shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Tensile bending strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Heat and cold effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Shock resistance to ball impact test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
and SSG-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.3 Heat Strengthened Glass (HSG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.1 Tensile bending strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.2 Heat and cold effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
Enamel Coating with Glass Ceramic Paint . . . . . 38
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Rolling process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Screen printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.5 SSG Alarm Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.6 Curved Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.6.1 Manual for thermally curved glass in construction . . 43
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.7.6
Laminated Safety Glass and Laminated Glass . . 64
Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Impact resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Resistance categories according to DIN EN . . . . . . . 65
Decorative laminated glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
Glass Design Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
LaserGrip® – Accessible glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Digital glass printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Frosted glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Artistic glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Grinding techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.9 Self-Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.9.1 Basic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.9.2 Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.10 ShowerGuard™ – Forever Beautiful . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.11 DiamondGuard® Scratch Resistant Glass . . . . . . 75
2.12 Fire Protection Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.13 X-Ray Protection Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.14 Safety Mirrors and Spy Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.15 Anti-Reflective Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.16 Bird Protection Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
30 |
| 31
Design Glass
2
Design Glass
Design Glass
Only a small amount of float
and ornamental glass is used
for direct applications in the
form of single-pane glass. Most
of it is used for processing in
finishing processes for adaptation to the requirements for
modern and transparent construction.
2.1 Single-Pane Safety Glass
Single-pane safety glass (SSG) is
heat-strengthened glass. SSG
has three outstanding properties: First, it has a tensile bending
strength about two and a half to
three and a half times higher
than annealed glass. As a result,
this glass can withstand much
higher tensile or blunt impact
stresses. Moreover, its resistance against changing temperatures and high temperature differences inside the pane is significantly increased. If SSG
breaks upon overstressing, it will
shatter to form a network of
blunt-edged, loosely connected
cullet that represents a much
lower risk of injury than sharpedged fragments of non-tempered glass.
The pane obtains its characteristic properties from the built-in
stresses. It is important that all
processes, such as grinding of
the edges, drilling or edge-cutting, etc. must be carried out
before the thermal tempering
process.
Stress distribution
Tension
Compression
2
no stress
With polarised light, the
stressed areas in the glass may
lead to double refraction of light
which can be seen as coloured
pattern in a specific angle of
view.
Tension
Compression1
Fracture image of
single-pane safety glass
Compression2
slight bending
Stress structure
Tension
Compression
Compressive
stress
2.1.1 Manufacture
Tensile stress
increased bending
The base material used for production of single-pane safety
glass (SSG) is float or ornamental glass. By controlled, even
and continuous heating of the
cut and fully processed basic
glass to more than 600°C and
subsequent quenching by
means of cold air, first the glass
surface is cooled. This cooler
zone contracts, and a compression stress is created
which acts towards the centre
of the glass cross-section, continuously decreases and transforms into a tensile stress.
2.1.2 Building physics properties
Translucency, thermal conductivity, thermal expansion, sound
insulation, resistance to pressure, modulus of elasticity, sur-
face weight and chemical properties correspond to those of
the basic glass.
2.1.3 Resistance to impact and shock
SSG is resistant to fracturing
from shocks according to EN
12 600 (pendulum test). The
Production of single-pane safety glass
glass thickness is determined
by the respective field of application.
2.1.4 Tensile bending strength
Positioning
Heating > 600 °C
Blowing
Quenching
Storing
n
SSG from float glass
according to EN 1288-3
n
SSG from ornamental glass
n
SSG from enamelled float
glass* sfg,k = 75 MPa,
determined according to
EN 1288-3
The characteristic tensile bending strength must be understood in accordance with EN
* enamelled side under tensile stress
32 |
| 33
Design Glass
12 150-1 as the statistical value
for mechanical strength in conjunction with a defined probability of failure.
Design Glass
With glass products, a 5% failure probability always applies
with a confidence coefficient of
95 %.
2.1.5 Heat and cold effects
SSG is capable of withstanding
full-surface temperatures of up
to +300 °C for a short time.
Resistance to failure due to
temperature differences in the
pane surface, e.g. between the
centre and the edge of the
pane, is assured up to 200 K.
2.1.6 Safety and resistance to ball impact
According to DIN 18032, ‘test
for safety against thrown balls’,
SSG with a thickness of 6mm
and above is suitable for large
surface glass applications in
gymnasiums and stadiums.
(see Þ Section 7)
2.1.7 Applications
n
Windows, French windows
n
Sports halls / gymnasiums
n
Noise protection walls
n
n
Parapets and balustrades
Audience protection systems
in stadiums
n
Balustrade compartments
n
n
All-glass door systems
Hail protection as outermost
panes in overhead laminated
glass
n
UNIGLAS® | STYLE - interior
glass doors
n
Glass shower cubicles
n
Partition walls
For glazing with fall-protection
function, the regulations of
TRAV must be complied with
(see Þ Section 9.6).
and SSG-H
When making float glass, even
the utmost care is unable to
prevent traces of nickel in the
molten glass. With sulphur
compounds of the additives,
occasionally the formation of
microscopically small nickel
sulphide balls results. Nickel
sulphide (NiS) has the particular
property that it increases its
volume at temperatures of less
than 379 °C. This volume
increase takes place as a function of the temperature and
time. With annealed glass, this
34 |
volume increase causes no
problems at all. If however
there is a nickel sulphide inclusion in the tensile-stressed core
zone of tempered glass, and
the inclusion has a minimum
size depending on its position
in the cross-section, the volume increase leads to local
peak stresses which lead to
failure of the glass.
A proven means of speeding
up the failure event is to subject
the SSG panes once more to a
controlled storage in heat, the
so-called ‘heat soak test’. This
heat-soak process is done outside Germany in a process
standardised according to EN
14179.
DIN 1055-100 (effects on loadbearing structures) and DIN EN
1990 ‘Eurocode: Basis of
structural design’ limits in building products the failure probability to a maximum of pf = 1 :
1,000,000 per year (reliability
index β ≥ 4.7 for reference period of 1 year). This target is not
met with heat-soaked SSG
according to EN 14179. The
German building rules list therefore specifies the regulation
building product SSG-H with
heat-soaking criteria diverging
from the standard. Thus the
holding time of the temperature
for heat-soaking of SSG-H –
after reaching a surface temperature of 280 °C for the last
glass – is 4 instead of 2 hours.
Furthermore, the heat-soaking
furnace must be inspected as
part of the initial inspection
process by an institute accredited by DIBt (German Institute
for Civil Engineering) and production must be subjected to
continuous external monitoring
by an approved authority,
among other requirements.
SSG-H must be provided by
the manufacturer with a ‘Ü’
symbol. If the heat-soaked
SSG only meets the European
product standard EN 14179,
this glass may only be installed
in Germany with consent on a
case-by-case basis. With SSGH, the failure probability due to
NiS is clearly above the
required value for failure probability in line with current scientific knowledge. SSG-H is therefore a safe product.
UNIGLAS® | SAFE safetyglass
with heat-soaking therefore
meets both the criteria of EN
14179 and also of the German
building rules list, regardless of
the country in which the production facility is located.
In Germany, in the cases of
installation heights exceeding 4
m above a public area for the
outer panes of insulating glass
too, in point-supported facades
made of monolithic SSG, and in
rear-ventilated outer wall coverings, SSG-H is explicitly
required instead of SSG. For
point-supported and rear-ventilated wall coverings made of
SSG, special rules apply in
many of the federal states of
Germany
and
Austria.
Consultation in good time with
the responsible authorities is
recommended.
Both EN 14179-1 and the
building rules list (BRL) mandate a permanent identification
of SSG-H, which can resemble
the following:
Permanent identification of SSG-H
If this identification is completely absent, the use of this glass
as a building product is not permitted in accordance with the
European building products
directive.
In the event of complaints or
market observation measures
by the building inspection
| 35
2
Design Glass
authorities, the documentation
of the manufacturing process
and the identification of the
product SSG-H are important
tools for verification that the
heat-soaking process has been
properly performed.
SSG-H can be subjected,
thanks to the thermal tempering process, to higher mechanical and thermal stresses than
annealed glass. However, as a
brittle material SSG can nevertheless fail when stressed too
greatly or handled incorrectly.
In many cases, the cause of the
failure is attributed too quickly
to an NiS inclusion. There are a
number of other possible causes of failure, for example:
n
Edge damage
n
Contact with hard materials
n
Incorrect block setting
n
Unplanned distortions in the
design
n
Structure settling
n
Subsequent glass processing
n
Vandalism
n
Unplanned structural or thermal stressing
Design Glass
To ascertain nickel sulphide as
the cause of failure, the current
state of scientific knowledge
requires verification of the following seven features:
1. Butterfly-shaped
fracture
centre (can only be ascertained if the pane remains in
the frame or if large and connected glass fragments are
present)
2. Spherical, usually metallically
shining inclusion on the fracture surface
3. Characteristic rough surface
structure (elephant skin) and
brass colour of the inclusion
under a light microscope (in
reflected light)
4. Diameter of inclusion approx.
0.05 to 0.5 mm
5. Position of inclusion in tensile
stress area of pane crosssection
2.3 Heat Strengthened Glass (HSG)
According to EN 1863-1 HSG
is not classified as safety glass.
It is heat-strengthened in the
same way as SSG but the cooling process is much slower. As
a consequence, slight stress
differences are generated in the
glass, unlike in SSG, and its
bending strength is between
that of SSG and float glass.
HSG is also used for glazing
where a high resistance to temperature changes is required
due to a high degree of incident
sunlight or due to formation of
deep shadows (see also Þ
page 291). This type of glass is
distinguished by its characteristic fracture pattern, with cracks
running radially from the fracture centre to the edges of the
pane.
Due to its fracture behaviour,
laminated safety glass (LSG)
made of HSG has - unlike LSG
made from SSG (see Þ
Section 2.7) a very high degree
of residual load-bearing capacity. Only slight bending will be
observed upon fracture of a
LSG (laminated safety glass)
pane made of 2 x HSG.
‘Sagging’ of the pane is prevented thanks to the favourable
fracture pattern.
For use of HSG in Germany, a
general approval by the building inspection authorities is
required. HSG with a valid
approval by a building inspection authority is suitable for use
within the framework of TRLV
and TRAV (see Þ Sections 9.5
and 9.6).
Fracture patterns SSG / HSG
6. Verification of composition of
inclusion of nickel and sulphur, e.g. by energy-dispersive X-ray spectroscopy
(EDX)
7. Fracture surface analysis
The occurrence of only a few
features is insufficient as evidence that NiS caused the failure.
2.3.1 Tensile bending strength
n
HSG from float glass
• HSG from ornamental glass
• HSG from enamelled float
glass* fg,k = 45 MPa,
determined according to
EN 1288-3
* enamelled side under tensile stress
36 |
| 37
2
Design Glass
Design Glass
2.3.2 Heat and cold effects
Resistance to failure of HSG due
to temperature differences in the
pane surface, e.g. between the
centre and the edge of the
pane, is assured up to 100 K.
Applications:
n
Facade glazing for windows
and balustrades
n
Solar control skirting
n
Solar collectors
2.4.2 Rolling process
n
Protection of art objects
n
Overhead glazing (as LSG)
n
Accessible and tread-on
glass surfaces (as LSG)
The plane glass pane is passed
underneath a fluted rubber
roller that applies the enamelling paint onto the glass surface. This ensures an even and
homogeneous distribution of
paint (prerequisite: absolutely
plane glass surface), which
however is limited in the
adjustability of the quantity of
applied paint (paint thickness,
covering capacity). A typical
characteristic is that the roller
structure is visible if viewed at
close distance (painted side).
From the front side (viewed
through the glass), this structure is hardly visible under nor-
2.4 Enamel Coating with Glass Ceramic Paint
2.4.1 General
The enamel layer is applied to
the plane glass surface by
means of various application
methods (screen printing,
rolling) either on the full surface
or on parts of it and firmly fused
with the glass by firing it at a
temperature of more than
600 °C. In this way the enamel
coat becomes largely abrasionresistant, solvent-resistant and
resistant to UV radiation and
discolouring. Enamelled glass
is generally viewed from the
uncoated side, so that the
enamel colours are influenced
by the natural colour of the
glass.
Ceramic paint is a glass-like
layer that is applied by melting
onto the glass and cannot be
mechanically removed without
damaging the glass itself.
Ceramic paint largely consists
of transparent, soft molten
glass that encloses the pigments during firing and so
binds them permanently.
In the same way as glass itself,
the ceramic paint layer can be
38 |
ible when the latter is viewed
from the rear, i.e. from the coated side.
subjected to chemical and
mechanical attacks.
The paint layer should therefore
always be applied to the nonaccessible side of the glass, or
that side of the glass least subjected to mechanical stresses.
Depending on the intended
application, a number of different production processes are
available that are characterised
in detail as described in the following.
2
mal conditions. Rolled enamel
glass is not suitable for lookthrough purposes; the intended
applications must be previously
agreed with the manufacturer
(starry sky).
In this type of process, a slight
‘paint overhang’ may occur at
the edges. However, the edge
surfaces will generally be kept
free from enamel. It must be
borne in mind that with bright
colours a medium (such as
sealant, panel adhesive, insulation, brackets, etc.) directly
applied to the rear side (painted
side) may shine through.
2.4.3 Screen printing
Examples:
n
With insulating glass on the
side facing the space between the panes,
n
with facades, facing inwards,
n
with shower cubicles, facing
outwards,
n
with table tops, facing downwards.
In addition to the type of glass
used,
translucency
also
depends on glass thickness,
colour and layer thickness.
Brighter colours generally have
a higher degree of light transmission than dark colours. With
differences in luminance or high
light intensity levels (daylight)
optical bright/dark shadows
inside a pane may become vis-
Aesthetics, functionality and
colour in connection with the
transparency of glass as a construction material have contributed to the development of
SSG and HSG screen printing
as a product. In the screen
printing process, ceramic leadfree paint is applied to a finished glass pane and is then
firmly fused to the glass surface
by firing during the tempering
process. This type of finishing
can only be carried out on one
side of the pane, and the paint
is then rendered scratch-resistant, weatherproof, solventresistant and permanently lightfast. This process allows for
selection of nearly any printing
pattern, ranging from geomet-
ric lines and random shapes up
to photos and paintings.
Depending on the application
purpose, the colours and
degree of printing can be freely
selected.
As a rule, the colour selection is
based on standard colour
charts (RAL, NCS etc.). The
degree of printing is defined by
the application:
n Pure design aspects
In this context, colours and
images are applied that exclusively serve for optical purposes and where the colour and
degree of printing are defined
by the original pattern.
| 39
Design Glass
Design Glass
Examples for design objects
n
Printing for screening and
solar control
For this type of application,
selection of colour and degree
of printing are extremely important. The brighter the colours
the more light can pass through
the pane, and the smaller the
degree of printing the more
transparency. The definition of
these two parameters therefore
depends on the efficiency to be
obtained. A large number of
standardised designs are available at our production facilities.
It is of course also possible for
us to apply your own creations
to the glass, based on detailed
instructions.
n Skid resistance
The trend today is accessible
glazing - either as steps or as
cut-outs in floors. In public
areas - and also recommended
for private applications - TRLV
rules, German workplace regulations and information from the
statutory accident insurance
companies prescribe various
skid-resistance categories for
specific areas according to DIN
51130. By varying the degree
of printing and the special paint
used, different categories can
be complied with, thus contributing to stability and safety
when using glass floors or
steps.
Skid resistance can also be
obtained
by
means
of
40 |
LaserGrip® (Þ Section 2.8.1) or
frosting (Þ Section 2.8.3).
Examples for screening /
solar control
On a horizontal screen printing
table, the paint is applied to the
glass surface through a narrowmesh screen using a squeegee;
in this process the thickness of
the applied paint can only be
slightly influenced by the mesh
width. The applied paint layer is
here generally thinner than with
rolling, and depending on the
colour it will have a covering or
translucent effect.
The glass surface is printed
with enamel paint on the basis
of specific decor patterns and
screen templates, and like the
enamelled glass is then fired in
the thermal process (SSG and
HSG manufacture).
Any media directly applied to
the painted side (i.e. sealant,
panel adhesive, insulation,
brackets, etc.) may shine
through. Using this type of
glass for see-through purposes
requires previous agreement
with the manufacturer.
Typical phenomena in this production process are the formation of slight stripes (depending
on the colour) both in the printing direction and transverse to
it, or occasionally occurring
‘slight blurs’ through pointbased cleaning of the screen
during production.
In screen printing the edges are
commonly kept free from paint;
however, a slight bead of paint
may occur in the fringe area.
For this purpose it is important
for the customer to clearly indicate edges visible when the
pane is installed in order to
allow for suitable applicationrelated production.
Printing of glass with a slight
texture is possible; however,
this must be agreed upon with
the manufacturer. It must be
noted that paint application
onto float glass is not possible.
2.4.4 Assessment
The assessment is in accordance with the regulation for
evaluation of the visual quality of
enamelled and screen-printed
glass.
2.5 SSG Alarm Glass
This special safety product
takes advantage of the specific
fracture properties of SSG.
Regardless of the initial damage point, the pane will shatter
along its entire surface. This
effect is used by providing an
electrical circuit using the
acquiescent current principle.
In the event of fracture, the circuit is always interrupted and
this triggers an alarm. As a general principle, there are three
different ways to create this cir-
cuit: the conventional method
is a conductor loop that is
printed on and fused into the
pane in the visible area. The
visibility of the conductor loop
might have a deterrent effect,
but is visually unsatisfying particularly in solar control glazing.
For this reason, there are special conductor loops that operate to the same principle but
which are exclusively installed
in the covered marginal area of
| 41
2
Design Glass
the pane so that they do not
interfere with the visible surface.
In the third variant, the electrical
conductivity of the function
Design Glass
layer of insulating glass is used,
by providing two soldering
points in the covered marginal
area. This method has been
developed and patented by an
associate of UNIGLAS®.
Versions of conductor loops (web)
Conventional alarm web in the visible area
Conventional alarm web in the non-visible marginal area
n
No visible alarm web
n
Coating always in Pos 2,
making it ideal for solar control glass
n
No cut-out in the coating
n
Ideal for small-size panes
n
Up to three elements can be
connected to one evaluation
unit
n
Evaluation unit can be connected to conventional systems
In all three cases, the SSG
panes are equipped with connection cables of approx. 30
cm length that must be carefully laid in the rebate, extended
and connected to an alarm
unit. Ensuring permanent and
safe functioning requires precise glazing as well as
absolutely correct wiring and
cable laying. The general glazing regulations and the regulation for installation of electrical
systems VDE 0833 and DIN
57833 as well as VdS provisions must be observed for
installation.
2.6 Curved Glass
For cutting-edge architecture,
curved glass is increasingly in
demand. A good overview of
the possibilities, from planning
to installation, of glass of this
type can be found in the guideline printed in the following for
thermally curved glass in construction and available from
Bundesverband
Flachglas
(German Federal Association
for Flat Glass). This guideline
does not answer all the questions relating to production
options and the tolerances to
be taken into account. We
therefore recommend that you
already contact your UNIGLAS®
partner in the planning phase
for professional advice.
2.6.1 Manual for thermally curved glass in construction
Excerpt from Merkblatt 009 of Bundesverband Flachglas e.V.,
Date: 08/2011
2.6.1.1
Insulation glass: Coating functions as invisible alarm circuit
The particular feature of this
alarm glass is that the measurement points are connected
to an ‘intelligent’ evaluation
unit. This takes into account,
during initialisation and monitoring, the individual resistances in different glass dimen42 |
sions. The evaluation unit is so
small that it can easily be
accommodated inside a flush
switch box or in a distribution
box. Up to three alarm glasses
can be connected to one evaluation unit.
Introduction
The use of glass in the building
shell is becoming increasingly
popular among planners and
builders alike. The development
of glass as a building material
over recent decades has
shown that there are practically
no limits to its use. The planner
and builder have at their disposal a wide range of design
options. The result is multifunctional and geometrically complex facades which require not
only flat, but also curved glazing to make them a reality.
The first glass facades were
constructed almost exclusively
with flat glazing. Research too
in the past decades has
focused mainly on these glazing methods. The use of curved
glass was fairly rare. But thanks
to continuous developments of
production processes and
other finishing techniques, for
| 43
2
Design Glass
example functional coatings for
thermal insulation and solar
control, the applications for flat
and curved glass have
widened.
This manual is intended to provide the user (architects, planners, engineers) with advice on
how to use curved glass, both
in the planning and design
phase and in the actual building
work, and to supply the user
with answers to important
questions. The basics of building law are described, and
2.6.1.2
For any questions beyond the
scope of this manual or on special cases, the manufacturers
or specialist planning offices
must be consulted.
For specific applications, e.g. in
shipbuilding as yacht glass or in
furniture construction, consultation with the manufacturers is
necessary on the possible
products and tolerances and
on the visual quality of these
products.
Manufacturing and geometry
Since the beginnings of modern glass bending for its use as
architectural glass – in the mid19th century in England – the
principle of manufacture for hot
curved glass has not substantially changed. As a rule, the
principle of gravity bending
shown in Fig. 1 is applied. Here
the flat float glass blank is
placed on a bending mould,
and then heated in a bending
kiln to 550 to 620°C. After it
has reached the softening
range, the blank sinks under
gravity into the bending mould
or, in the case of a convex
bending mould, arches around
it. The subsequent cooling
phase decides on the properties of the final product.
44 |
instructions for glass assessment and for glazing are provided. In addition, the basics
for assessing the visual quality
of curved glass are explained
and information on possible tolerances
is
set
forth.
Furthermore, information is
provided on transport and
installation.
Applicability
This manual is valid for thermally curved glass in the construction industry (use in outer shell
of buildings and for completing
structures/edifices).
2.6.1.3
Design Glass
To manufacture curved float
glass, the cooling process has
to be very slow, as a rule several hours, in order to obtain a
cuttable end product almost
free of any residual stress.
By contrast, a partially or fully
heat-strengthened
curved
glass is obtained by rapid cooling. The manufacturing process
for heat-strengthened and
curved glass has evolved
thanks to further developments
in machine technology. Modern
bending kilns for making heatstrengthened glass operate
with movable bending moulds
which shape the heated blank
from both sides into the
required form and also keep it
in that shape during tempering.
Bending and cooling here takes
place in the same kiln unit.
Although the principle of glass
bending is in itself simple, its
practical implementation is
both difficult and demanding.
The success of a bending
process depends on many
parameters. Beside the geometric boundary conditions,
the coatings and the basic
glass used (for example lowferrous-oxide glass, or ‘white
glass’) also have a crucial effect
on the most important production phases of heating and
cooling. Of course experience
in bending techniques and the
technical characteristics of the
bending kiln used are also of
major importance for the quality of the end product.
The feasibility of the required
bending geometry with the
selected glass structure –
which may have a coating – is
thus also dependent on the
manufacturer, which is why
clear-cut specifications on possible bending radii and glass
structures can only be provided
to a limited extent. It can however be stated as a general
principle that complex geometries, such as spherical curves,
are as a rule only possible with
float glass.
If curved laminated glass or
laminated safety glass (LG or
LSG) is needed, the individual
panes can be placed together
on the bending mould during
the float glass bending
process. As a result, the tolerances of the individual panes
are usually markedly lower than
in laminated safety glass made
of heat-strengthened and
curved glass, since the panes
can in this case only be manufactured singly.
For the manufacture of curved
panes, a general distinction is
made between slightly curved
glazing with a curvature radius
over two meters, and highly
curved glass types with smaller
curvature radii. In addition,
glass curved in one axis (cylindrically) is differentiated from
glass curved in two axes
(spherically). The method of
thermal bending allows very
small bending radii to be
achieved. The exact values
depend on the manufacturer,
however radii of up to 100 mm
are possible, and around 300
mm with glass thicknesses
above 10 mm.
| 45
2
Design Glass
Design Glass
Fig. 1: Principle of manufacturing steps
standardised throughout Germany, and instead it must be
ascertained in the state in
2.6.1.4.2
Step 1:
Construction of a bending mould
and inserting the flat blank
Step 3:
The blank sinks into the bending
mould
2.6.1.4
2.6.1.4.1
Step 4:
n Slow cooling in the case of float
glass (several hours)
n Fast cooling in the case of heatstrengthened glass
Construction laws and regulations
General
As a general rule, regulations
and standards for the products
(properties) and for their application must be distinguished.
Whereas product standards set
out rules for manufacture and
include specifications about the
technical characteristics of
products, the standards and
guidelines relating to application deal with design requirements and describe the necessary verifications of structural
safety and utility of a construction product or variant in a
building or structure.
46 |
Step 2:
Heating the glass up 550 - 620 °C
Product standards are incorporated throughout Germany into
the ‘Building Regulations Lists’
(BRL) A, B and C as publicised
by the German Institute for Civil
Engineering (DIBt), in consultation with the supreme building
supervisory authorities of the
German states. Standards and
guidelines for application are by
contrast publicised separately
in each of the states in their
respective lists of technical
building regulations. It is therefore not possible here to
assume that arrangements are
question which regulations are
currently valid there.
Thermally curved glass
Thermally curved glass is not
covered in the Building
Regulations Lists A, B and C.
From the building law viewpoint, therefore, it is an unregulated building product. In this
case, its usability can only be
verified with a general building
inspection authority approval or
by a European Technical
Approval (ETA). If neither of
these verifications of usability is
available, approval on a caseby-case basis must be applied
for from the responsible
supreme building supervisory
authority of the state in question, or from an office authorised to do so.
(without fall-preventing function) can then be assessed
without any problem on the
basis of TRLV. If the range of
application of the general building
inspection
authority
approval includes the TRLV
rules, the curved glass can then
also be used for manufacturing
fall-preventing glazing in accordance with TRAV rules.
Regarding the verification of
usability or suitability, the provisions of BRL A Part 2 and/or
Part 3 then apply additionally.
The current ‘Technical rules for
the use of linear-mounted glazing’ (TRLV) [1] and the
‘Technical rules for the use of
fall-proof glazing’ (TRAV) [2]
currently valid throughout
Germany set out the design
regulations and the necessary
verifications of structural safety
and utility, which as a general
principle also apply for curved
vertical glazing.
In the future glass assessment
standard DIN 18008, structures
with curved glass types are not
covered. The use of curved and
linear-mounted vertical glazing
currently regulated in TRLV is
also no longer described in this
standard. The use of the building product ‘curved glass’ is
then only possible with AbZ or
ETA approval, or with approval
on a case-by-case basis.
The TRLV rules represent – with
the regulations they contain on
which glass types are usable,
design requirements, instructions for glass assessment etc.
– a basis for the TRAV rules.
The permissible tensile bending
stresses stated in TRLV and the
assessment procedure for taking into account climatic strains
cannot be used for assessment
of curved glazing. As a general
rule, the provisions of the product approvals apply.
For curved glass, general building
inspection
authority
approval is required, specifying
the characteristics and the
range of applications for the
product. Curved vertical glazing
A general building authority
inspection certificate is then
envisaged.
The verifications of shock
resistance according to Table 2
of TRAV do not apply for
curved glass.
| 47
2
Design Glass
2.6.1.5
2.6.1.5.1
Building products
To distinguish flat from curved
glass and to differentiate the
products from one another in
respect of their characteristics,
the abbreviations gb (denoting
curved) are introduced as additions to the known abbreviations for glass construction
products.
Curved float glass (gb-Float)
The starting product for curved
float glass (gb-Float) is
described in EN 572-2.
Accordingly, a float glass is a
flat and transparent, clear or
tinted soda-lime silicate glass
with parallel and fire-polished
surfaces, made by continuous
casting and flowing over a
metal bath.
2.6.1.5.3
2.6.1.5.4
General
The following lists the different
curved building products
according to the European
product standards for flat glass.
To supplement these, the differences and special features for
curved glass are illustrated.
2.6.1.5.2
Design Glass
In addition, other basic glass
products according to EN 572,
e.g. ornamental glass, wired
glass, wire plate glass or channel-shaped glass, can also be
manufactured as curved products. This requires consultation
with the manufacturers. The
standards for these products
also relate only to flat glass.
Curved single-pane safety glass (gb-SSG)
The product standard EN
12150-1 describes only flat
SSG. However, the informative
section of this standard (Annex
B) contains the following formulation:
‘Curved and heat-strengthened
soda-lime single-pane safety
glass was given a fixed shape
during manufacture. It does not
form part of the present standard since there is insufficient
data
for
standardisation.
Regardless of this, the information of the present standard
relating to thicknesses, edge
finishing and fracture structure
can also be applied to curved
and heat-strengthened sodalime single-pane safety glass.’
Curved Heat Strengthened Glass (gb-HSG)
1863-1 describes only flat
HSG. However, the informative
section of this standard (Annex
B) contains the following formulation:
information of the present
standard relating to thicknesses, edge finishing and fracture
structure can also be applied to
curved and heat strengthened
soda-lime glass.’
‘Curved and heat strengthened
soda-lime glass was given a
fixed shape during manufacture. It does not form part of the
present standard since there is
insufficient data for standardisation. Regardless of this, the
It should be noted that above
all the fracture pattern of flat
HSG cannot be exactly transposed to curved HSG. In
Germany, an ‘AbZ’ approval is
required for HSG and for LSG
made of HSG.
2.6.1.5.5
Curved laminated glass or
laminated safety glass (gb-LG or gb-LSG)
14449 describes only flat LG
and LSG.
For use in Germany, however,
LSG must additionally conform
to the requirements according
to BRL A Part 1, No. 11.14.
This makes LSG a building
product with intermediate films
of polyvinyl-butyral (PVB)
according to BRL or made up
of other intermediate layers of
2.6.1.5.6
LG by contrast is a building
product with other intermediate
layers of which the properties
have not been verified according to the BRL or to an ‘AbZ’
approval.
Curved multi-pane insulating glass (gb-IGU)
The product standard EN 1279
is applicable with some restrictions for curved IGU. In Part 1
of EN 1279, section 4.6, the
following is formulated:
‘Units with a bending radius >
1000 mm conform to the present standard without having
undergone the additional tests
for curved test specimens.
Units with a bending radius of
1000 mm or less conform to
the present standard if additionally curved test specimens
with an identical or smaller
48 |
verified usability. Which intermediate layer, apart from PVB,
may be used for curved LSG
can be found in the appropriate
‘AbZ’ approval.
bending radius meet the
requirements for water vapour
diffusion in EN 1279-2. The test
specimens should be curved
with the bending axis parallel to
their longest side.’
As a general principle, triple
insulating glass can also be
designed as curved glazing.
However, the manufacturers
must be consulted here regarding feasibilities (size, glass
structures, glass types, technical values etc.) and tolerances.
| 49
2
Design Glass
2.6.1.5.7
Design with curved glass
As a general principle, curved
glass can be designed with, for
example, enamelling, screen
printing or digital printing, printed films, sandblasting, fusing or
partial coatings.
2.6.1.6
2.6.1.6.1
General
To ascertain the visual characteristics, particularly for larger
projects, samples in component size should be used right
from the start, to achieve
agreement with the manufacturer on the expected visual
quality. An initial product definition can also be done with so-
2.6.1.6.3
called ‘hand samples’, as a rule
sized 200 x 300 mm.
Which coating options are
available here, depending on
the geometry, glass structure
and size etc., must be clarified
with the manufacturer of the
curved glass for each individual
case. A generalised definition of
achievable Ug-values, g-values
etc. is not possible due to the
large number of previously
mentioned parameters. Ug-values and the light-related and
radiation-physics characteristics are as a rule specified for
flat glazing with the same glass
structure. They are determined
in accordance with EN 673 and
EN 410.
Sound insulation
The sound insulation value is
measured according to EN ISO
140, and the weighted sound
reduction
is
ascertained
according to EN ISO 717. The
measurement is conducted on
flat glazing of 1.23 x 1.48 m in
size.
2.6.1.7
that requirements are also
defined for the permissible primary energy requirement of a
building. The EnEV, the energy
conservation regulations representing Germany's implementation of this EU directive, sets
out requirements placed on the
components of window and
facade for thermal insulation
and heat protection during
summer.
Thermal insulation and solar control
The requirements stated must
be met by both curved and flat
glazing alike. Thermal insulation
and solar control coatings may
be used here. In addition to the
functional requirements, aesthetic requirements (e.g. reflection of coated glass, colouring
due to the coating or even the
glass substrate) are also important, particularly for solar control coatings.
50 |
The resultant characteristics
must be determined for each
individual case, and the feasibilities and tolerances agreed
upon with the manufacturers.
Building physics
The Energy Performance of
Buildings Directive (EPBD) formulates requirements intended
to reduce the energy consumption of buildings and to increase
the use of renewable energies.
At the European level, the
EPBD sets minimum requirements in that context, which
can be appropriately modified
or adjusted by the individual
member states. This means
2.6.1.6.2
Design Glass
2.6.1.7.1
Safety with glass
Special safety glazing
Requirements for resistance to
thrown objects, penetration
and bullets, as well as for
explosion-limiting effects, must
be met by both flat and curved
glazing. Whether all of the stated requirements – taking into
account the window and
2.6.1.7.2
Transposability to curved glazing is only possible to a limited
extent, since the reflecting surface is larger than in flat panes
of comparable size. In this
case, a test with a suitable testing institute is recommended.
facade structure – can be met
and whether the testing methods for flat glazing are transposable must be clarified for
each individual case with the
manufacturer or with a testing
institute.
Traffic safety
Traffic safety means here that
with normal and appropriate
use of glazing the risk of accidents can be assessed and
reduced by structural measures.
This applies to the safety of
glazing which adjoins areas frequented by people, meaning
that although the glass component might fracture due to their
actions, falling fragments cannot cause dangerous injuries.
Responsibility for minimising
the accident risk lies with the
customer/owner etc. The safety-relevant requirements must
be defined by the planner or
checked in advance and
agreed upon with the authorities responsible.
The safety requirements must
be met by curved glazing too
when used in a corresponding
manner.
| 51
2
Design Glass
Design Glass
2.6.1.7.2.1 Suitable glass products
The requirement for traffic safety can also be met for the glass
area by a functioning glazing
system and by the use of safety glass.
German workplace regulations
(Arb-StattV) and the rules of the
professional
associations
(BGR) must be complied with.
In general, reference is made to
the publication BGI/GUV–I 669
of the German statutory accident insurance companies.
According to this publication,
the following glass types meet
the safety requirements and
can be used as safety glass:
n
SSG and SSG-H
n
LSG and
n
translucent plastics with
comparable safety characteristics.
This however refers to flat
glazing.
2.6.1.8
For SSG, this includes the fracture pattern, and for LSG the
characteristics of the intermediate layer according to BRL and
where necessary the residual
load-bearing capacity. These
characteristics must be certified by an ‘AbZ’ approval or as
part of a case-by-case
approval.
the self-reflection of the
basic glass
n
coatings
n
bending radius
n
wide bending angle (e.g.
over 90°)
n
tangential transitions (see
Fig. 7)
n
glass thickness
It is recommended that model
panes be made to obtain an initial impression of the visual
quality and the visual impression.
2
Examples of curved glass
For UVV/GUV regulations, it
may be necessary in individual
cases to consult the insurers
regarding the use of the products.
It must therefore be assured
that the glass structure is suitable for the intended use. Every
single area of use must meet
the safety requirements.
Visual quality
As a general principle, the
German regulations for assessment of the visual quality of
glass in building [3] are applicable. In addition to the permissible faults stated in section 3 of
the guideline, fusion penetrations, coating faults and surface marks are permissible in
curved glass.
Checks are conducted in diffuse daylight (e.g. with overcast
sky) without direct sunlight or
artificial lighting, and at a dis-
52 |
Curved glass may be used as
safety glass when verification of
the required characteristics has
been furnished.
n
tance of at least 3 m from the
interior to the outside and with
a viewing angle corresponding
to normal room use.
The transparency and the
colour impression are affected
by the curvature of the glass,
since the reflection of curved
glass is always different to that
of flat glass due to the laws of
physics governing appearance.
The reflection behaviour is influenced by the following criteria:
2.6.1.9
Tolerances
The following tolerances apply
for cylindrically curved glass.
The tolerances in Table 1 are
stipulated for a maximum edge
length of 4000 mm and a maximum bending angle of 90°.
For dimensions beyond that,
the manufacturer must be consulted. The specified tolerances
are applicable for all edge finishes. The quality of the edge
finish is at least arrissed. All
other edge finishes must be
agreed upon in writing before
award of order.
For special applications, for
example in shipbuilding as
yacht glass or in furniture-making, the tolerances must be
agreed upon with the manufacturer.
All specified tolerances relate to
the glass edges.
| 53
Design Glass
n
Design Glass
Tab. 1: Tolerances
Flat
Flat
Flat
Flat
projection
projection
projection
projection
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
/
/
/
/
height
height
height
height
(L)
(L)
(L)
(L)
≤ 2000 mm
≤ 2000 mm
> 2000 mm
> 2000 mm
Contour accuracy (PC)**
**
Float glass
≤ 12 mm
> 12mm
≤ 12 mm
> 12mm
±
±
±
±
≤ 12 mm
> 12 mm
-
In LG/LSG, the glass thickness is the sum of the individual glass thicknesses
without intermediate layer.
The tolerances apply for LG/LSG made of float glass, SSG or HSG.
With curved glass, tangential transitions and bulging in the projection edge
must be expected.
n Local distortion
The specifications in the product standards for flat SSG and
HSG cannot necessarily be
transposed to curved glass, as
they depend partly on the glass
size, geometry and glass thickn Contour accuracy (PC)
Contour accuracy indicates the
precision of a curvature. All
edges of the contour are offset
by 3 mm inwards/outwards.
The bending contour must not
diverge from the set contour by
2
3
3
4
SSG
LG/LSG*
±
±
±
±
2
3
3
4
± 3 mm/m
Absolute value: min. 2 mm,
max. 4 mm
-
Straightness of height edge (RB)
Straightness of height edge (RB)
Warping (V) ***
Edge offset (d)**** ≤ 5 m2
Edge offset (d)**** > 5 m2
Position of drilled hole
Glass thickness tolerance
*
Glass thickness (T)
±2
±3
±3
EN 572
±2
±3
±3
EN 12150
EN 572
±
±
±
±
Double
insulating glass
2
3
3
4
±
±
±
±
2
3
3
4
mm
mm
mm
mm
2
± 3 mm/m
Absolute value: min. 2 mm,
max. 5 mm
±2
±3
±3
±2
±3
EN 12150
-
±2
±3
±3
±3
±4
-
mm per running meter
mm
mm
mm
mm
*** Based on the longest edges of the glazing unit.
**** Based on the height and projection edge; the specification applies for all
edge finishes; the offset of the drilled holes in LG and LSG depends on this
tolerance.
Fig. 3: Straightness of height edge (RB)
nesses. In individual cases,
these tolerances must be
agreed upon with the manufacturer.
RB
m
1000 m
more than that dimension (see
Fig. 2). When checking the
contour accuracy, the glass
may be averaged within this set
contour.
Fig. 2: Schematic representation of contour accuracy (PC)
n
Warping (V)
Warping describes the accuracy of the parallelism in the
height edges in the curved
state. The warping may be
max. +/- 3 mm per running
meter in curved glass (straight
edge) (see Fig. 4). For this, the
glass must be placed with its
height edges on a flat surface
and then checked (convex
position or N position).
Fig. 4: Schematic illustration of warping (V)
PC
v
PC
Glass thickness
54 |
1000 mm
| 55
Design Glass
Design Glass
Fig. 5: Edge offset in LSG (d)
Fig. 7: Tangential transitions
d
d
Tangent
With tangential transition
90
2
°
A, H
R
Fig. 6: Edge offset in insulating glass (d)
A, H
d
Arc centre-point
R
Without tangential transition
<
90
°
R
d
A, H
n Tangential transitions
A tangent is straight line contacting a given curve at a
defined point. The tangent is
vertical to the associated
radius. Without a tangential
transition, the glass is kinked!
Although this is technically possible, it is not recommended.
The tolerances are greater at
the kink point than at a tangential transition.
Arc centre-point
R
2.6.1.10 Assessment
2.6.1.10.1 Static features in comparison with flat glass
panes
Shell supporting
curved glass
effect
of
The computation of the stresses and deformations of curved
glass sheets must be conducted with a suitable finite-element
model based on the shell theory. This model must be capable
of illustrating the geometry of
the pane, in particular its curvature.
56 |
A simplified computation of the
curved glass sheets as flat
glass sheets necessarily leads
to incorrect stresses and deformations.
When stipulating the necessary
glass thickness, the curvature
can, depending on the mounting conditions for single glazing
(monolithic, LG and LSG), have
a favourable effect since the
shell supporting effect can be
taken into account.
| 57
Design Glass
Design Glass
2.6.1.10.2 Climatic stresses with curved insulating glass
With insulating glass panes,
taking into account of the glass
curvature is essential, since the
higher bending stiffness can
result in very high climatic
stresses (internal stresses). The
advantage obtained from the
shell supporting effect of
curved individual glass sheets
is not as great when they are
designed as insulating glass as
in their use as single glazing.
A structural verification of these
high stresses is only possible
with inclusion of the glass curvature. The climatic stresses
must not be determined
according to TRLV [1], since
these rules are derived from the
plate theory for flat glass
panes.
Curved insulating glass units
with flat attached parts must be
considered separately when
dimensioning them, since the
flat area is considerably more
flexible than the curved part.
The stressing of the insulating
glass edge connection is
greater, due to the higher climatic stresses in curved insulating glass, when compared
with flat insulating glass. The
edge connection must be
designed accordingly. This in
turn can have effects on the
edge connection width or the
necessary glass inset. This
must be taken into account as
early as the planning and
design stage.
2.6.1.10.3 Bases of design
Characteristic tensile bending strengths
For flat glass panes, the characteristic tensile bending
strengths are stipulated in the
product standards or in the
general building inspection
authority approvals (e.g. for
HSG). The use of curved glass
panes is to date only possible
when an approval has been
granted on a case-by-case
basis or when a product with
authority approval is used. If
permissible
tensions
are
defined in an ‘AbZ’ approval,
they can be used directly for
assessment. If characteristic
values are stated, the procedure is the same as that when
values from tests are used.
If a curved glass without ‘AbZ’
approval is used, the character58 |
For a preliminary assessment,
the characteristic tensile bending strengths fk according to
Table 2 can be used. Based on
the global safety concept of
TRLV [1], the characteristic tensile bending strengths can be
ascertained for engineering
n
purposes with a safety coefficient on the basis of TRLV.
In individual cases, this procedure must be agreed upon with
the supreme building supervisory authority of the state in
question.
Tab 2: Characteristic tensile bending strengths on the
basis of [4]
fg,k (N/mm2)
Glass surface Glass edge
Glass type
Curved float glass (gb-Float)
Curved and heat strengthened Glass (gb-HSG
Curved and heat strengthened glass (gb-SSG)
40
55
105
32
55
105
2.6.1.10.4 Utility
2.6.1.10.4.1 Bending limits for glazing
Bending of the curved glazing
must be restricted in such a
way that it is dependably pre-
vented from slipping out of the
glass mountings and that the
criteria for utility are met.
2.6.1.10.4.2 Bending limits for substructure
istic tensile bending strengths
of the respective manufacturer,
which are the basis for assessment and which have been
ascertained by a testing institute, should be confirmed in
consultation with the supreme
building supervisory authority of
the state in question.
The basis for this is a wellfounded statistical evaluation of
tests with a correspondingly
sufficient number of samples
(e.g. 20).
The conduct of the tests is
described in [4] and [5].
The tests should be conducted
with samples transposable to the
actual structure. The planning
and conduct of the tests must
already be taken into account
during scheduling and costing as
part of the planning phase.
The specifications for flat glazing must not be transposed to
curved glazing, since slight
deformations of the substructure have considerably greater
effects on curved panes than
on comparable flat glass
panes. For that reason, the
behaviour of the substructure
must be taken into account
without fail in the static assessment.
2.6.1.11 Storage and transport
The glazing units must be
stored and transported upright
in a low-stress manner
depending on their geometry.
The glazing units must also not
be set down, even briefly, on
hard surfaces such as concrete
or stone floors.
The specifications of the manufacturer must be followed.
During handling and insertion,
the edge connection and the
glass edges must not be damaged, since even minor damage to the edges of the panes
that cannot be detected immediately might be the cause of
later glass fractures.
The supports and bracings
against tipping over must not
cause any damage to the insulating glass edge connection or
to the glass itself.
| 59
2
Design Glass
As a general principle, the glazing units must be protected
from damaging chemical or
physical effects.
All glazing units must be protected from long-lasting humidity impacts or from solar radiation by means of suitable and
complete covering.
Transporting heavy glazing
units must be done in such a
way that all individual panes are
held evenly. Briefly lifting the
glazing unit by only one pane
during handling and insertion is
Design Glass
possible and should be done
with suitable equipment.
When transporting insulating
glass at or over higher altitudes
above sea level, the use of a
pressure relief valve may be
necessary due to possible differences between the pressure
inside the cavity and the ambient climate (depending on the
height above sea level of the
manufacturing location). This
must be specified when ordering from the glass manufacturer.
2.6.1.12 Glazing
2.6.1.12.1 General
The glazing guidelines formulated for flat glazing can in principle also apply for curved glazing. Due to the particular char-
acteristics of curved glass, supplementary instructions of the
manufacturers must be complied with.
2.6.1.12.2 Design instructions
Due to its high stiffness, the tolerances of curved glass (see
Section 9) must be taken into
account without fail during
design work, in order to ensure
installation and mounting without any stresses.
Mounting without stresses is
necessary to prevent glass
fracture or, if curved multi-pane
insulating glass is used, over-
stressing of the edge connection too. In addition, mounting
which is not stress-free can
cause visual impairments.
The substructure must comply
with the special requirements
for curved glazing. In this connection, sufficiently dimensioned rebates are needed for
frame or facade structures.
2.6.1.12.3 Required rebate width
Minimum required rebate width
= (total glass thickness + tolerance from contour accuracy) +
6 mm
60 |
Glass thickness must be taken
into account as nominal dimensions. Furthermore, the specifications of DIN 18545 [6] must
be complied with.
In addition, tolerances of the
substructure must be taken
into account.
It is recommended that window
and facade systems be
designed with wet sealing.
The manufacturers of curved
glass should be involved in the
planning work from an early
stage, so that the design can
take into account the specific
features of curved glass. This is
particularly the case when the
glass is used for structural purposes.
2.6.1.13 Block setting
The basic principles of block
setting are described in [7]. The
blocks must transmit the load
of the glazing unit dependably
into the substructure. The glazing units as a rule do not
absorb any loads from the
structure. If it is intended that
loads from the structure be
absorbed, this must be taken
into account in structural/
design planning. The glass
manufacturer
or
system
provider should also be consulted.
In all systems with curved
glass, all-round vapour pressure equalisation and permanent drainage must be
assured. The block setting itself
is a task for planning and
should be done before the
assembly work is performed.
The centrally set spacer block
(see Fig. 8) is intended for stabilisation and prevents the
glass tilting during assembly. It
must be removed again once
the glazing is fixed.
Curved single glass or insulating glass units in a vertical
installation must have block
setting as for flat panes. In
System 1, the glass weight
onto the lower curved glass
edge is transmitted via the supporting blocks to the frame
structure and on to the holding
structure (see Fig. 8).
In differing installation situations, e.g. inclined glazing, the
manufacturer or planner must
be contacted.
With System 2, the glass
weight and the wind load
effects are distributed over the
glass edge (see Fig. 9).
This must be taken into
account in particular during
mounting. These versions represent only a few of the possible situations. With different
curvatures, e.g. spherical curvature, inset sections in the
insulating glass edge connection or with use in structural
glass applications, consultation
with the manufacturer is always
required.
For curved glazing, the following block settings are additionally recommended:
the support blocks must be
designed such that the glazing
is balanced and cannot tilt. To
do so, the support blocks must
be arranged such that the connection of the two centrepoints of the glazing blocks
intersects the centre-of-gravity
line of the glazing. At the centre
of gravity, the dead weight of
| 61
2
Design Glass
Design Glass
Fig. 8: Arrangement of blocks in
System 1
Fig. 9: Arrangement of blocks in
System 2
Fig. 10: Allowance
Re
i
Ca
T
D
A
F
The position of the support
blocks must be taken into
account when assessing the
substructure.
A
the glazing is transmitted into
the structure. The position
depends on the geometry, the
size and the glass structure.
Ri
2
Ra
D
T
A
α
L
D
D
T
T
D
T
T
2.6.1.15 Literature
2.6.1.13.1 Definitions
T = Support block, transmits
the weight of the glazing unit.
Blocks consist of elastic material with about 60-80 Shore A
hardness and a load-bearing
base.
D = Spacer block, ensuring a
clearance between glass edge
and rebate bottom. These
blocks too are of elastic material with about 60-80 Shore A
hardness. The weight is
absorbed only by the support
blocks. The distance to the
glass corner should equal the
regular clearance of 100 mm.
With cylindrically curved glass,
the parameters listed below
must be provided, regardless of
the glass type planned, in order
to ascertain a technically feasible and inexpensive solution.
62 |
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
2.6.1.14 Allowance
To make the required end product, an extremely precise
allowance and the provision of
various information on dimensions etc. are very important for
curved glass.
T
A = Projection outside
Ra = Radius of pane centre
(neutral projection)
Ri = Radius inside
Re = Radius outside
F = Pitch
Cai = Chord inside
α = Opening angle
T = Glass thickness
They include the specification
of at least two of the values
stated in the following:
n
projection
n
bending radius
n
pitch (inside or outside)
n
opening angle.
In addition, the length of the
straight edge and the number
of panes must be stated.
[5]
[6]
[7]
TRLV:2006-08 - Technische Regeln zur Verwendung von linienförmig gelagerten Verglasungen [technical rules for the use of linear-mounted glazing].
Deutsches Institut für Bautechnik (German Institute for Civil Engineering), Berlin
TRAV:2003-01 - Technische Regeln für die Verwendung von absturzsichernden Verglasungen [technical rules for the use of fall-proof glazing]. Deutsches
Institut für Bautechnik (German Institute for Civil Engineering), Berlin
Richtlinie zur Beurteilung der visuellen Qualität von Glas für das Bauwesen
[regulation for assessment of the visual quality of glass for the construction
industry]. Bundesverband Flachglas e.V. (German federal association for flat
glass), Troisdorf, 05/2009
Bucak, Ö., Feldmann, M., Kasper, R., Bues, M.Illguth, M.: Das Bauprodukt
‘warm gebogenes Glas’ – Prüfverfahren, Festigkeiten und Qualitätssicherung
[test methods, strengths and quality assurance for hot curved glass used in
building]. Stahlbau Spezial (2009) - Konstruktiver Glasbau, p. 23 - 28
Ensslen, F., Schneider, J., Schula, S.: Produktion, Eigenschaften und
Tragverhalten von thermisch gebogenen Floatgläsern für das Bauwesen –
Erstprüfung und werkseigene Produktionskontrolle im Rahmen des
Zulassungsverfahrens [production, properties and loadbearing behaviour of
thermally curved float glass for building – initial, testing and in-house production checking during the approval process]. Stahlbau Spezial (2010) –
Konstruktiver Glasbau, p. 46 - 51
DIN 18545: Abdichten von Verglasungen mit Dichtstoffen – Teil 1:
Anforderungen an Glasfalze [Glazing with sealant Pt. 1; rebates, requierements]. Beuth-Verlag, Berlin, 02/1992
Technische Richtlinie des Glaser-handwerks Nr. 3: Verklotzung von
Verglasungseinheiten [technical guideline of glazing no. 3: blocking of glazing
units]. Verlagsanstalt Handwerk GmbH, Düsseldorf, 7th edition, 2009
| 63
Design Glass
Design Glass
2.7 Laminated Safety Glass and Laminated
Glass
2.7.1 Manufacture
Laminated safety glass (LSG) is
a product that complies with
EN 14449 and consists of two
or more float glass panes - for
specific conditions also ornamental glass panes - that are
combined to form a laminated
product by means of elastically
tough and highly tear-resistant
polyvinyl butyral interlays (PVB).
The safety effect of LSG is
based on the high degree of
tear-resistance of the intermediate PVB layer and its strong
adhesion to the glass. In the
event of mechanical overload
due to shock or impact, the
glass will break but the fragments will adhere to the PVB
layer. This minimises the risk of
injury and the glazed opening
remains closed.
Production of laminated safety glass
2.7.2 Building physics properties
Thermal conductivity, thermal
expansion, resistance to pressure, modulus of elasticity and
chemical properties correspond
to those of the individual basic
glasses. Translucency results
from the values of the processed basic glasses and of the
intermediate PVB layers and is
between 90 % and 70 %,
depending on the thickness of
the laminated composite.
The colour rendition is influenced by the number, thickness
and type of the individual panes
and by the number of PVB layers used. For thick units, the use
of white glass low in iron oxide is
recommended.
For design purposes, coloured
PVB films, which can like the
colourless ones be transparent
or translucent, can also be used
without compromising on their
safety characteristics.
For noise prevention, NC
(Sound Reduction) interlays
from UNIGLAS® are ideal, offering numerous safety functions
as well as being classifiable as
laminated safety glass in the
meaning of the standard and of
the technical rules.
2.7.3 Impact resistance
Positioning
Cleaning
Depending on the size of the
pane and the LSG structure,
the requirements of the pendulum impact test for glass used
in buildings (according to EN
Lamination (clean room)
12600) are complied with. The
pendulum impact test serves to
determine the behaviour of
glass subjected to shock or
impact stress.
2.7.4 Applications
mech. Pre-bonding
Depending on the desired function, one or more intermediate
PVB layers are placed between
the individual glass panes and
are bonded with the glass.
Then the glass/film sandwich is
either placed inside an autoclave or into a special furnace
under a vacuum, where the
glass and the intermediate layers are firmly bonded together
Autoclave
Storage
under the effect of heat and
pressure to form a clear seethrough unit with very high
strength. This manufacturing
process allows for bonding of
several panes of the same or of
different glass types and glass
thicknesses so that with laminated safety glass the advantages of various glass types
can be combined.
n
Injury protection
n
Overhead glazing
n
Parapets and balustrades
n
Facades
n
Sports facilities
n
Partition walls
n
Accessible glass
n
Room-height glazing
2.7.5 Resistance categories according to EN
A special production range of
laminated safety glass is available with burglary and impact
resistant properties. These are
achieved by combining glasses
and interlays of various thicknesses.
64 |
For glazing with fall-proof function, the regulations of TRAV
must be complied with (see Þ
section 9.6).
The glass is tested by official
inspection bodies according to
valid EN standards and is
available in various resistance
categories (see Þ Section 7).
| 65
2
Design Glass
Design Glass
2.7.6 Decorative laminated glass
Accessories with more depth
can also be integrated between
the individual panes of laminated glass, for example grasses,
metals etc. In this case, several
intermediate layers of PVB or
EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) or
special cast resin intermediate
layers are required to enclose
the inserts. This kind of laminated glass does not per se meet
the requirements placed on
safety glass. For that reason, the
suitability of this glass must be
separately verified and consent
on a case-by-case must be
obtained, or a general approval
by the building inspection
authorities must be given.
This also applies in similar form
when a photo-realistic colour
print or a Low-E coating is provided as the intermediate layer.
Examples for decorative laminated
glass
2.8 Glass Design Techniques
2.8.1 LaserGrip® – Accessible glass
LaserGrip® is a world-wide
patented procedure for machining of surfaces in stoneware,
ceramics and glass. Since this
process only changes the structure of the surface and no additional chemicals are applied, the
material (i.e. glass) is not affected in its transparency and hardness. Glass acts like glass.
2
Example with digital printing
n
Engineering
With a heavy-duty diode laser,
micro-hollows (with a diameter
of approx. 200 µm) are cut into
the glass surface, thus creating
an effect of small ‘sucker disks’.
This effect is multiplied 10,000
times and results in footsteps
being slowed down smoothly
and not stopped with a jerk.
Example stairs
n
Combination with digital
printing
Photo-lamination is a technique
for embedding high-resolution,
digital photos and logos into
LSG. In conjunction with the
transparent LaserGrip® surface,
this allows the presentation of
motifs in optimum optical quality
even on accessible surfaces.
This is another possibility for presenting corporate designs.
n
66 |
LaserGrip®
Advantages
n Full-surface transparency
n
Permanently abrasionresistant
n
Further processing without
problems
n
Best-possible cleaning
properties
n
0 % chemicals
n
Skid-resistance category 9
(acc. to DIN 51130)
n
n
Can be applied as Float,
SSG and HSG
Possible applications*
n Entrance areas in public
buildings
n
Ticket halls
n
Stairways
n
Hallways
n
Showrooms
n
Trade fair presentation
areas
n
Illuminated floor areas
| 67
Design Glass
Design Glass
n
Checkout areas
n
n
Medical consultation
rooms
Max. dimensions:
1.500 x 2.500 mm
n
Min. glass thickness:
4 mm
n
Catering areas and canteens
* as per ZH 1/571 HVBG 1998, BGR 181 leaflet, test acc. to DIN 51130
2.8.2 Digital glass printing
An interesting variation for decorative glass design is digital printing on clear or frosted, thermally
annealed or tempered glass
using UV-hardening acrylic ink.
The advantage of this variation is
a photo-realistic rendering of
images with high colour brilliance
and a potential print resolution of
up to 1200 dpi, depending on
the original photo and the viewing distance.
process must be carried out by
means of ceramic fused-on
colours only possible in conjunction with tempered glass.
Both alternatives of digital printing can be further processed in
the form of laminated safety
glass. Here too, required safety
properties must be achieved on
the basis of a suitability verification and approval on a case-bycase basis.
However, if higher scratch resistance or better resistance against
chemicals is required, or if acid
etched designs, silver or metallic
paint is to be printed, the printing
2.8.4 Artistic glazing
Lead glazing has been made
by craftsmen since the Middle
Ages. Right up until today,
nothing has changed in the
process of connecting small
tinted glass panes by means of
lead rods to create an image.
The main applications of lead
glazing are in religious architecture.
Glass fusing is based on a
2,200 year old technique to
fuse various glasses together.
In recent years, this method
has been further developed
and is experiencing a revival.
Art objects produced by means
of the fusing process are exclusive and unique pieces. Their
character is defined by light,
colour and shape.
2.8.5 Grinding techniques
Special grinding techniques
include edge-finishing as a
facet; with this method most of
the edge is ground at an angle
to the glass surface. Depending on the angle and width of
the facet, it is possible to distinguish between flat and steep
facets.
Grinding of V-shaped or Cshaped grooves in widths of
between 3 and 25 mm (engraving) provides countless options
for artistic surface design in
glass. The grooves can be produced both with a polished and
with frosted surface finish.
Digital printing on glass
2.8.3 Frosted glass
By blasting of the glass surface
by means of fused alumina, the
glass surfaces can be given a
frosted finish over the complete
or partial surface to create
artistic motifs.
68 |
Another variant is acid etching
of the glass surface. Glass
etched over its full surface is
generally manufactured industrially. This glass is referred to
as satin finish glass.
| 69
2
Design Glass
Design Glass
2.9 Self-Cleaning
2.9.1 Basic Information
Self-cleaning glasses have
become an integral part of
product ranges in recent years.
However, there are various
approaches available both with
regard to durability of the coating and with regard to their
operating principles. In general
it must be noted that it is not
the case that self-cleaning
glasses never need to be
cleaned again, however the
cleaning intervals are increased
significantly depending on the
product.
2.9.2 Products
2.9.2.1 UNIGLAS® | CLEAN
Under the name UNIGLAS® |
CLEAN, a UV-resistant, titanium oxide layer is available that
is permanently fired into one of
the surfaces during the float
glass manufacturing process,
depending on the manufacturing process, and that provides
amazing properties. The UV
radiation of the day light
impinging on this layer will
decompose any kind of organic dirt in a continuous process.
Moreover, the layer is hydrophilic (Greek: water-friendly)
which means that a rain shower will not flow down the glass
pane in the form of drops but in
the form of a water film that
70 |
rinses the pane and flushes
away the decomposed dirt.
The essential condition for this
photo-catalytic and hydrophilic
effect to function is the unobstructed exposure of coated
glass to natural UV and water.
This significantly minimises the
cleaning effort both in residential applications and with large
facade glazing, as the glass
handles most of the cleaning
chore itself. The titanium oxide
layer is very durable and resistant to environmental influences.
The disadvantage of this layer
is that due to the requirement
for UV radiation it can only be
used for outdoor applications.
Moreover, the layer is incompatible with silicone oils, neutralising the hydrophilic property. Special requirements for the
glazing systems up to the window seals therefore apply.
Alternatively, under the name
UNIGLAS® | CLEAN, hydrophobic (Greek: water-fearing), i.e.
water-repellent coatings, are
available. These layers are
based on chemical nano-technology and are characterised
by very high degrees of abra2.9.2.2
sion resistance and a high
resistance to conventional
cleaning agents. Due to their
excellent UV stability, these layers can also be applied in outdoor areas.
Both coating systems generate
the so-called ‘lotus effect’ that
significantly simplifies cleaning
of the glass surfaces.
Your UNIGLAS® partner would
be happy to recommend the
optimum coating for you to
match your requirements.
Installation and maintenance
The self-cleaning coating is
permanently connected to the
glass surface and has very
good durability and long service life. As with any type of
coated glass, specific issues
must be considered for installation and maintenance.
n Handling
In order to prevent damage, the
layer must not come into contact with hard or sharp objects.
Any scratches might impair
functionality.
n
n
Storage
In the same way as every glass
product, UNIGLAS® | CLEAN
as basic glass or transformed
product should be stored
n
in a dry and well-ventilated
place, protected from
major temperature and
humidity fluctuations,
n
not in rooms/spaces containing a large amount of
organic vapours/fumes
(e.g. silicone fumes in production or solvents from
painting shops).
Recommended tools
n clean gloves, free of
grease, dry and free of silicone.
n
n
clean sucker disks, in good
condition, free of silicone.
In order to guarantee permanent cleanliness of the
sucker disks, suitable protective covers should be
used.
Glazing
n The coated side of the
pane must always be
installed to face outwards
in windows and to face
inwards to the shower
cubicle in the case of
ShowerGuard®.
| 71
2
Design Glass
n
Use of silicone-containing
products must be avoided
as far as possible during
installation of the frame
and insertion of the pane
(e.g. blocks, silicone-containing oils and sealants,
adhesives and lubricants).
Sealing agents for glass frame seal:
n
n
n
n
n
72 |
Preferably dry glazing systems, such as EPDM
(APTK) or TPE.
Weatherstripping exclusively with silicone-free
lubricants (glycerine, wax,
talcum ...).
In any case, excessive use
of oil-containing lubricants
must be avoided. Excessive oil must be removed
using a cloth and methylated spirit if required.
Minimise contact of the
sealing agents with the
surface required for installation.
Under no circumstances
use putty containing linseed oil.
Design Glass
The coated pane will soil significantly less than conventional
glass. However, cleaning is still
required from time to time. The
cleaning frequency depends on
the conditions of installation
(orientation of the glazing
towards the sun, direct contact
with driving rain) and on the
ambient conditions (for example air pollution).
Please comply with the general
notes in the ‘Code of practice
for cleaning of glass’ (see Þ
Section 10.12.13).
n
Objects recommended for
cleaning
n a soft and clean cloth
n
a clean and non-scouring
sponge
2.10 ShowerGuard®
ShowerGuard® is a type of
glass specially developed for
shower cubicles and having
revolutionary properties when
compared with conventional
glass for shower separation
panels. It is the only type of
glass on the market that is permanently resistant against corrosion and exceptionally easy
to clean. Conventional glass
usually corrodes due to hard
water, heat effects, humidity
and soap residues. Even cleaning agents may leave a spotted, stained or corroded glass
surface which gives the surface
a coarse and unsightly appearance.
With ShowerGuard®, the glass
surface facing the shower is protected by an ion-binding method
during
the
manufacturing
process. This patented technology is used to permanently seal
the glass surface and allows lime
stains to be easily wiped away.
Unlike with applications that are
sprayed on or rubbed in, but
come off again sooner or later,
the ShowerGuard® surface is
permanent.
In daily use, ShowerGuard® does
not require any special handling
and there is no need for renewal
of the coating.
Comparison between conventional glass and ShowerGuard™
If a squeegee is used, its rubber lip must be clean, in a good
condition and silicone-free.
n
Products permitted for
cleaning
Plenty of clean water and conventional, neutral glass-cleaning agents are sufficient. As
with any other glass, the water
used for cleaning should be as
low-lime as possible. If necessary, use demineralised or softened water.
Magnified conventional glass that
displays corrosion damage as a
result of the usual conditions that
are present during use of a normal
shower cubicle.
In comparison:
Magnified ShowerGuard™ also
being exposed to normal conditions
of use in a shower cubicle.
| 73
2
Design Glass
Design Glass
n Cleaning
does
not
ShowerGuard®
require any special agents for
cleaning and care, but can easily be cleaned with a damp
cloth.
n Engineering
Available as SSG in 6 and 8
mm, plane or cylindrically
curved. Other thicknesses
upon request.
n
Advantages
n easy-care glass: permanently corrosion-resistant –
guaranteed for 10 years!
n
less cleaning effort
n
increase of the service life
of the glass
ShowerGuard®
n
n
improvement in hygiene
n
high degree of transparency
n
long-lasting brilliance like
on the first day
n
maintenance-free
Possible applications
n
Residential applications
n
Hotels
n
Holiday resorts
n
Hospitals
n
Nursing homes
n
Spa and sauna areas
2.11 DiamondGuard® – Scratch Resistant
Glass
DiamondGuard® is less prone
to scratches than conventional
glass and therefore maintains
its original elegance much
longer. By means of a patented
technology, the glass is
improved with a diamond-like
surface coating on one side
that provides permanent protection
and
cannot
be
removed.
It is 10 times more resistant to
scratches than regular glass or
stainless steel and is resistant
to all materials with a hardness
lower than that of DiamondGuard®,
such
as
keys,
bracelets, vases, etc. (see table
below).
With conventional glass, these
objects/materials
would
destroy the flawless surface on
the long run. In all applications
where appearance and design
play a role, using DiamondGuard® considerably reduces
the frequency of glass replacement.
n
DiamondGuard® has passed a
compatibility test carried out
with a range of silicone sealing
materials.
n Engineering
Available as float glass in any
thicknesses between 4 and 15
mm. Further requirements (e.g.
SSG and/or LSG) in the property sector are possible upon
request.
DiamondGuard®
Degree of hardness (Mohs
hardness)
Hardness
degree (Mohs
hardness)
1
5,5
6,5
8
9
10
74 |
n Cleaning and compatibility
DiamondGuard® does not
require special agents for
cleaning and care, but can easily be cleaned with a wide variety of conventional cleaning
agents.
Material (e.g.)
talcum
uncoated glass,
knife blade
tiles, steel file
DiamondGuard®,
topaz
silicon carbide,
boron carbide
diamond
n
Advantages
n increase in the lifespan of
the glass for a large number of applications in
indoor areas
n
improvement in hygiene,
since dirt and bacteria can
no longer gather in the
scratches and grooves
n
high degree of transparency
n
easy-to-clean
| 75
2
Design Glass
n
Design Glass
n Kitchen & bathroom
n
n
Furniture design (tabletops, cabinets, glass furniture, furniture for multimedia sets, etc.)
Shop and laboratory fittings
n
Partition walls
2.13 X-Ray Protection Glass
n
Sliding doors
n
Interior glass doors
n
Wall panels
n
Lifts
n
Balustrades
Line-of-sight connections between the control room and the
X-ray room and to the outside
require a type of glass that
retains X-rays. This effect is
achieved by means of special
glass with particularly high lead
content and hence high density.
The critical absorption values are
2.12 Fire Protection Glass
A very special type of safety
glass is fire protection glass.
Transparent structural components to protect against
smoke, heat and open fires are
a challenge. Fire protection
glasses are therefore not normal stock merchandise, and
can only be purchased as part
of a tested and approved system. These systems already
have approval for the building
inspection authorities or must
undergo approval on a caseby-case basis (see Þ page
219). Classification of the individual requirements is conducted out according to EN 135012 and DIN 4102.
In this context, a distinction is
made between:
n
Room enclosures with
thermal insulation
This is the highest requirement
and means that neither smoke,
fire nor heat may penetrate the
glass within a defined period.
Depending on the resistance
period, the classifications are EI
(F) 30 (resistance time 30 minutes) to EI 120 (resistance time
120 minutes) for the entire system (according to DIN 4102 F
30 - F 120). With El glazing, the
temperature on the side avert-
76 |
ed from the fire must not
increase on average by more
than 140 K, and in the most
unfavourable position by no
more than 180 K during the
defined period.
n
Room enclosures with
reduced heat radiation
For this category, the area to
be protected must be protected from above-average heat
radiation, max. 15 kW/m2, and
in addition absolute protection
from smoke and flames is
required, e.g. in escape routes
- category EW 30.
n
Room enclosures without
protection from heat radiation
No smoke and fire must penetrate the protected area during
the period of 30 minutes, and
the glass must remain transparent even in case of fire - category E (G) 30 (according to
DIN 4102 G 30).
The whole subject of fire protection glasses is complex.
These descriptions are necessarily brief. For detailed
inquiries and projects, please
contact your UNIGLAS® partner.
stated in EN 61331-2 and DIN
6841. The UNIGLAS® partners
recommend that the requirements placed on the glazing in
respect of the lead equivalent
values be agreed upon in good
time between the planners and
suppliers, i.e. as early as the
planning phase.
2.14 Safety Mirrors and Spy Mirrors
For specific applications,
including the issue of road safety, mirrors must be made from
safety glass. It is possible here
to cover SSG by application of
a splinter binding adhesive film
or to make the mirror from laminated safety glass. Another
special form of mirrors are spy
mirrors. Spy mirrors consist of
glass that is partially silvered on
the one side and are used for
example
as
separation
between a monitored room and
an observation room or for cov-
ering of information displays
and television sets. The reflection on the coated side is higher than the reflection on the
glass side. Consequently, the
observer can see into a brighter
room (minimum brightness
ratio between the rooms 1:10
Lux) while looking through in
the other direction is not possible.
Spy mirrors too are available as
LSG mirrors.
2.15 Anti-Reflective Glass
In glass cabinets, shop/display
windows and many other applications, reflection of light from
the glass surface is often irritating.
For these applications, a special anti-reflective coating can
be applied to the glass sur-
face(s). With this special coating, reflection is reduced to a
minimum. Maximum brilliance
of colours and perfect lookthrough
properties
are
achieved. Anti-reflective glass
can be processed into safety
glass or insulating glass.
2.16 Bird Protection Glass
Thanks to a special coating of
the glass, UV radiation is
reflected that is invisible for
humans but is perceived by
birds. This means that birds will
recognise windows and glass
facades as obstacles. The
functionality of this glass has
been verified by the MaxPlanck Institute for Ornithology
in experiments under laboratory conditions.
| 77
2
3
3
3.1 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.14 Circadian Light Transmittance τc(460) . . . . . . . . . 100
3.2 U Value (heat transmittance coefficient). . . . . . . 81
3.15 UV-Radiation Transmittance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.3 Glass Joints and All-Glass Corners in
Windows and Facades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
3.16 Selectivity Factor S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.4 Emissivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.5 Solar Gains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.6 Global Radiation Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.7 Light Transmittance τv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.8 Total Energy Transmittance (g value) . . . . . . . . . 98
3.9 Shading Coefficient (SC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.10 Solar Transmittance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.11 Absorption of Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.12 Colour Rendition Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.17 UNIGLAS® | SLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.18 Thermal Insulation during Summer . . . . . . . . . . 101
3.19 Interference Phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.20 Insulated Glass Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.21 Dew Point Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.22 Plant Growth behind Insulating Glass. . . . . . . . 105
3.23 Electromagnetic Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.24 Insulated Glass Units with Stepped Edges . . . 107
3.25 Decorative Insulated Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.26 Dimensioning of Glass Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . 110
3.13 Light Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
78 |
| 79
3
Insulating glass is the generic
term for almost all transparent
outer shell enclosures in buildings - windows, doors and
facades of any type. The official
definition of ‘insulating glass’ is
determined in EN 1279-1 and
reads as follows: ‘Multiple-pane
insulation glass is a mechanically stable and durable unit
comprising minimum two glass
panes that are separated from
each other by one or more
spacing elements and are hermetically sealed at the edges.’
3.1 Structure
The cavity between the panes
contains an inert gas with low
thermal conductivity or air. At
the beginning of industrial production of insulating glass,
three different techniques were
devised to join the insulating
glass together:
n
Fusion of glass
n
Soldering on of a lead channel and
n
Adhesion
Of these three systems, adhesion has spread to become the
usual production method
today. In the adhesion processes, a distinction must be made
between one-sided and twosided
edge
connection.
Insulating glass with a sealing
level comprises a perforated
hollow section, filled with a
highly active desiccant, as the
spacer. The space between the
spacer section and the two
glass edges is filled with an
elastic sealant/adhesive.
For insulating glass with two
sealing levels, as for UNIGLAS®
insulating glass, a further sealing level (primary seal) is
applied between the spacer
section and the glass as an allround sealing bead of poly-
80 |
isobutylene. The polyisobutylene acts as a vapour brake to
prevent the penetration of
moisture from the outside, and
protects against loss of the filler
gas.
In the spacer sections, materials with improved thermal characteristics such as special steel
or plastic composites have
today become standard. A further variant with brand-name
insulating glass from UNIGLAS®
is the flexible spacer (TPS)
made of a thermoplastic material with integrated desiccant,
which is applied directly onto
the glass panes and represents
in one a gas barrier and a spacer. Insulating glass systems
with flexible spacer are stocked
by UNIGLAS® GmbH & Co. KG
under the product name
UNIGLAS® | STAR. (see page
Þ 25)
The particular functions of insulating glass are defined by the
physical parameters that it
needs to comply with, such as
thermal insulation, sound insulation, solar control, etc.
3.2 U-Value
(heat transmittance coefficient)
The unit of measurement for
the heat loss through a component: the U-value of glazing, is
a parameter characterising the
heat transmittance through the
central area of the glazing, i.e.
without edge effects, and stating the stationary heat flow
density for each temperature
difference between the ambient
temperatures on each side.
The U-value is stated in Watts
per square meter and Kelvin
(W/m2K). The lower the Uvalue, the better the thermal
insulation. The unit of measurement is W/m2K.
n
U-value of glazing:
Ug (= ‘Uglass’)
n
U-value of window:
Uw (= ‘Uwindow’)
n
U-value of frame:
Uf (= ‘Uframe’)
n
U-value for curtain walls:
Ucw (‘Ucourtain-wall’)
n
Ψ-value = linear heat transmittance coefficient (PSI)
n Ug-value
The basis for calculating the Ugvalue is EN 673.
The nominal Ug value of glazing
depends on four factors: emissivity of the function layer, width
of the pane cavity, the type of
gas filling and the degree of gas
filling. To ascertain the values
for assessment, national regulations must be complied with.
When installing sash bars, for
example in Germany, a fixed
additional amount of Ä Ug
according to Table 10 from DIN
4108-4 must be taken into
account for determining Ug,BW,
and a fixed additional amount Δ
Uw according to Table J.1 from
EN 14351-1:2006+A1:2010,
Annex J, for determining Uw,BW.
n Uf-value
The heat transmittance coefficient of the frame section Uf is
usually determined by measurement of the entire section
according to EN 12412-2. The
Uf-value can however also be
calculated using a FiniteElement Program (FEM) or
Finite-Difference
program
according to EN ISO 10077-2.
Alternatively, the heat transmittance coefficients of the frames
can also be determined
according to EN ISO 10077-1
Annex D or to the ift guideline
WA-04/1.
n Ψ-value
The linear heat transmittance
coefficient Ψ for the window
describes the thermal bridge in
the transition area between the
window frame and the insulating glass edge. The Ψ-value is
the figure for the heat quantity
lost per unit of time through 1
m of the section line with 1 K of
temperature difference between the room side and the
outside. The unit of measurement is W/mK.
The linear heat transmittance
coefficients needed for Uwvalue calculation can be taken
as fixed values from the tables
E.1 and E.2 of EN ISO 100771. Usually, Ψ-values are provided by the manufacturers of
spacer sections for standard
frame materials such as metal,
wood or plastic. Data sheets
for different systems and frame
| 81
3
materials are available from
your local UNIGLAS® partner. If
divergent Ψ-values are used,
detailed verification by a notified authority according to EN
ISO 10077-2 must be furnished. The ift provides in its
guideline WA-08/1 on thermally
improved spacer elements and
determination of the Ψ-value
for window frame sections a
procedure for representative
values.
n
Uw-value
The basis for calculating the
Uw nominal value is EN ISO
10077-1. The nominal value Uw
of the heat transmittance coefficient is either read off from the
appropriate tables, or calculating using the following formula:
Uw =
Af · Uf + Ag · Ug + Σ( lg · Ψ)
Af + Ag
Uw: Heat transmittance of the window
Uf: Heat transmittance of the frame
(measured value!)
Ug: Heat transmittance of the glazing
(nominal value!)
Af: Area of the frame
Ag: Area of the glass
lg: Area of the glazing
Ψ: Linear heat transmittance of the
glass edge
To ascertain the values for
assessment, national regulations
must be complied with. When
installing sash bars, for example
in Germany, either a fixed additional amount of Δ Uw according
to Table J.1 from EN 143511:2006+A1:2010, Annex J must
be taken into account for determining Uw,BW, or the appropriate
Ψ-values of the sash bar manufacturer must be used in the
above formula.
82 |
n Ucw-value
For determining the Ucw-value of
system facades, as a rule mullion-transom facades, the component method is ideal. This is
as a general principle identical
with the method for windows
(EN 10077-1).
The heat transmittance coefficient is ascertained for each
component of the facade, such
as mullion, transom, window
frame, glazing, opaque filler etc.
The U-value of the complete
facade is composed, as for the
Uw-value calculation, individual
component U-values weighted
by their percentage area. To this
is added the associated linear
heat transmittance coefficient Ψ
with which the thermal interaction of the components in the
adjacent area is recorded. For
facades, the holding structure
and the substructure must also
be taken into account (expansion of the aforementioned formula by panels and thermal
bridge effects).
If component values are not sufficiently defined, an individual
assessment method can also be
used. A method of this type is for
example worthwhile for a ‘structural sealant-glazing facade’. To
apply the component method
for insulating glass corners and
joints, the following VVF leaflet
V.07 offers important directions.
3.2.1 Glass joints and all-glass corners in windows and
facades
Leaflet V.07 of VFF (Association of Window and Facade Manufacturers),
May 2010 version
3.2.1.1
Introduction
Transparency an architectonic requirement
The architectonic requirement
for filigree and transparent windows and curtain walls leads to
frameless structures in which
the glazing permits an apparent
complete transparency and an
almost
unrestricted
view
through it, without any interruptions. Architects have been
planning all-glass corners since
the last century, when wellknown figures such as Le
Corbusier discovered this construction method. Their aim is
to showcase the lightness of
the building by means of filigree
elements characterised by a
high proportion of glass.
Thermal insulation hinders
implementation
At that time, all-glass corners
were still constructed with single-pane glass, so there were
no problems with implementing
3.2.1.2
this design method. Today
however, EnEV thermal insulation requirements must be met
with multi-pane insulating
glass, making planning and
implementation more difficult as
well as restricting transparency.
Consultation with the insulating
glass manufacturer is necessary on a case-by-case basis.
This leaflet provides information
on a number of variants for vertical glass joints and all-glass
corners, and on ascertaining
key thermal values in consideration of these design methods.
The leaflet also provides tips on
the design and building physics
requirements. The leaflet is not
a dimension specification and
does not obviate the need for
dimensioning and evaluation of
the structure by engineers.
Design and building physics requirements
Basic Information
An all-glass corner is distinguished in that it has no frame
or post at the corner area to
conceal the glass joint. There
are several approaches to
designing glass joints and allglass corners. This leaflet
describes some of the variants
and provides tips for evaluating
the design and building physics
aspects.
As a general point, it must be
borne in mind that an insulating
glass joint is always a weak
spot from the thermal insulation
viewpoint. There is a risk of
condensate forming on the
inside of the glazing.
| 83
3
Requirements of building
inspection authorities
requirements from Germany's
state building regulations
(LBO's), the list of German
technical building regulations
and the Building Regulations
List etc. must be complied with
for the window and facade
components.
General requirement
For a functioning glazing system, damage from the following
effects must be prevented:
n
permanent moisture on the
edge connection
n
UV radiation
3.2.1.2.1
n
inadmissible
stresses
n
incompatible materials
mechanical
The edge conditions of the glass
rebate design between the adjacent panes for sealing must be
considered in the same way as
standard glazing encased in
frames. Requirements placed on
a glazing system, for example for
structural strength and glass
sealing, are described by the relevant sets of regulations (e.g.
TRLV, TRAV, TRPV and in future
also DIN 18008) and by the
requirements of the insulating
glass manufacturer. These form
the basis for designing and
building windows and facades.
Requirements for the edge connection
Insulating glass edge connection
The insulating glass edge connection must be UV-resistant,
or requires a suitable and properly designed covering (e.g. by
screen printing, enamelling or
metal strips made of aluminium
or stainless steel). Surfaces for
adhesive application must be
approved by the adhesive manufacturer. It must be borne in
mind that if the edge connection is not covered, design features may be left visible.
If it is designed as a system for
transferring structural loads
(mounting on four sides),
appropriate verifications in
accordance with ETAG 002 are
required.
84 |
With UV-resistant sealants,
insulating glass systems have
previously been designed as a
rule without an inert gas filling
(argon or krypton). In view of
the stricter requirements of
EnEV 2009, systems will in
future often be used that also
necessitate a gas filling in insulating glass for all-glass corners
and glass joints.
When gas-filled insulating glass
systems are to be used, they
must comply with the requirements according to EN 1279-3.
Since the insulating glass connection is subjected to high
temperature, UV and mechanical stresses, only sealants and
adhesives ensuring permanent
functioning should be used.
(e.g. silicone)
Compatibility
It must furthermore be ensured
that the compatibility of all
materials coming into contact
with it is assured (ift guidelines
DI-01/1 [12] and DI-02/1 [13]).
Ground edges
All-glass corners without outer
ground edges can pose a hazard in frequented areas. For this
reason and for reasons of
improved finish, the use of
ground edges is recommended.
3.2.1.2.2
Protection from moisture
The edge connection of insulating glass must be protected
from continual moisture in order
to safeguard it over the course
of its life. The requirements for
vapour pressure equalisation
and for tight connections
known from framed structures
must also be applied to allglass corners and joints.
The secondary sealant covering of the edge connection
should be at least 6 mm.
Structural dimensioning
Design:
not structurally load-bearing
If the joint of a glass corner or
of a glass joint has only a sealing function and not a structurally load-bearing one, the
suitability of the sealant must
be verified according to DIN
18545-2 or EN ISO 11600 by
the sealant manufacturer. No
structural dimensioning is performed.
geometry of a movement joint
of this type with exclusively
sealing function should be
designed as follows:
The joint width b should be
≥ 8mm.
The joint depth is t ≈ 0.5 x b,
however at least 6 mm.
Design:
structurally load-bearing
By contrast, a glued joint can
also withstand structural loads.
These must be calculated during planning and provided to
ensure stability. Structural
dimensioning of the design
should be performed by a
structural engineering office
specialising in glass construction, and should cover all adhesive and sealant joints as well
as the insulating glass edge
connection.
Since the structure is loadbearing, loads are transmitted
into the adjacent insulating
glass via the connecting joint of
the glass corner. The glueing of
the glass corner absorbs structural loads, when appropriately
designed, so that a ‘4-sided
mounting’ of the pane can be
achieved.
To do so, appropriate dimensioning and the use of a suitable sealant or adhesive are
necessary.
| 85
3
The joint dimensioning or
design of the structurally loadbearing adhesive joints including the edge connection covering of the secondary sealant
must be performed on a caseby-case basis, taking into
account wind loads, climatic
stresses, live loads, dead
weight and so on.
For dimensioning and designing structurally load-bearing
bonds, the EOTA guideline
ETAG No. 002 can be used,
among others. According to
ETAG 002, a joint geometry of
at least 6 x 6 mm is required.
Since this design method is
beyond the scope of TRLV
and/or TRAV, a building inspection authority approval on a
case-by-case basis or an
approval by a building inspection authority (abZ) is required.
contains appropriate requirements. These relate to design
requirements and to the use of
certain types of glass and
sealant. In addition, requirements for the maximum permitted sag in glazing systems
mounted on 2 and 3 sides are
set forth (Table 3 of TRLV).
These must be agreed on with
the insulating glass manufacturer, as the latter can also set
narrower targets.
Dimensioning of insulating
glass edge connection
When insulating glass is used,
the insulating glass edge connection too must be dimensioned structurally in such a way
that it can safely absorb both
wind loads and climatic loads.
Other directions provided by
the sealant / adhesive manufacturer must be heeded.
With load-bearing bonds, it
must be ensured that the adhesiveness complies with the
quality assurance requirements.
No permanent load on the
joint
It must also be ensured that the
dead weight of the glazing is
fully supported by the substructure and hence that permanently acting loads on the
edge connection and on the
corner joint or butt joint are prevented.
Back-filling materials
Closed-cell PE foam, silicone or
other materials of verified suitability and compatibility can be
used as back-filling materials.
Care must be taken that these
are not inserted under pressure.
3.2.1.2.4
Diverging requirements for 2sided or 3-sided mounting
If the glazing is not linearmounted on all sides, the TRLV
3.2.1.2.3
The suitability of sealants and
adhesives for load-bearing
bonds must be verified according to ETAG 002.
Requirements for the finish
Functional bond
To ensure durable and functional sealing or bonding, the
joint flanks must be clean and
free of, for example, dust,
grease, sealant residues and
coating residues.
times are excessively long and
uncontrolled, with the result
being defects in the adhesiveness and a significantly higher
risk of non-compatibility due to
migration of non-cured sealant
constituents.
Both one-component and twocomponent materials can be
used as sealants and adhesives. It should be borne in
mind that all joint seals with
joint cross-sections exceeding
12 mm in depth should be
made using two-component
adhesives. If one-component
adhesives are used, setting
Furthermore, care should be
taken during setting of the seal
in the joint or corner that during
this sealing process no external
loads can act on the glazing
and that the glazing is fixed in
place until after complete setting.
86 |
Subsequent coverings
If the seal or adhesive joint of
the insulating glass is to be
covered by sheet metal, it must
be ensured that the adhesive
sealing joint is completely set
before the sheet metal is
attached. The sealant or adhesive for the sheet metal cover
must be applied as far as possible without any cavities, as
otherwise condensate may
occur inside them which could
lead to a loss of adhesion.
If films or coatings are used for
covering the joint, it should be
remembered that an adhesion
failure might result due to
weather effects. The design of
these covers has not been successful in actual practice and
should be avoided if possible.
Thermal requirements
High dew water risk
From the thermal viewpoint,
glass joints and all-glass corners must be classed as
unfavourable (thermal bridge)
with a high dew water risk on
the room side due to low surface temperatures. The geometrical boundary conditions of
an outer corner in particular
lead to unfavourable heat
flows, furthermore the insulating effect of the frame structure
is also absent.
For glass joints and all-glass
corners, therefore, the use of
thermally improved spacers
(see EN ISO 10077-1 Annex E)
is recommended. In accordance with DIN 4108-2, a temporary dew water precipitation
in small quantities at the window is permissible. Dew water
formation is probable at low
outside temperatures.
| 87
3
Uw-value of windows
When determining the Uw-value
of windows or the UCW-value of
facades containing glass joints
or all-glass corners, this area
must be considered separately
as it is an out-of-the-ordinary
situation.
As a rule, the UW-value indicating the loss of heat from the
inside to the outside is affected
by the glass, the frame and the
transition from glass to frame.
The result is the following calculation:
n
Formula (1)
Uw =
Af · Uf + Ag · Ug + lg · Ψ
Af + Ag
For detailed information refer to the
VFF leaflet ES.01 [9].
Heat loss via the non-protected corner or the additional glass joint
This calculation does not however take into account that
there is no frame enclosing the
3.2.1.4
corner or the additional joint. To
describe the heat transfer via
the non-protected corner or via
the additional glass joint, a further parameter must be incorporated into the calculation.
The Ψ-value for normal spacers
does not provide any correct
values in this case, as it relates
to the standard case with an
edge protected by a frame.
The Ψgg-value for glass corners and butt joints
To ascertain them, a further
Ψglass-glass-value must be included in the calculation which is
multiplied by the length of the
free edge or the length of the
glass joint 1gg. This product
ascertains the heat loss via the
unprotected corner of the butt
joint. The resultant formula is as
follows:
n
Formula (2)
Uw =
Insulating glass structure
Position
1
2
3
0.25
4
0.25
Spacer
Stainless steel all
round, 0.2 mm thick
7
U-values with glass joints and all-glass corners
6
3.2.1.3
6
16
Ug: double glass 1.1 W/(m2K) or
triple glass 0.7 W/(m2K) according to EN 673;
6
for the Ψ-values of the glass
corners only outer corners are
taken into account.
The width of the joint is given
with 10 mm.
3.2.1.5
Variants of glass joints and all-glass corners
The following variants are tabulated by increasing design and
building physics quality.
Key to the isotherm representations [°C]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Red line = 10 °C isotherm
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Af ·Uf +Ag ·Ug +lg ·Ψ +lgg· Ψgg
Af + Ag
Use outer dimensions!
3.2.1.5.1
Glass joint with sealant groove and back-fill cord
(double)
Variant 1 a: Butt joint (double) (Illustration of principle)
Typical Ψ-values of glass joints and all-glass corners
Calculation method
For the types listed in Section
5, the associated Ψgg-values
were ascertained on the basis
of EN ISO 10077-1. The calculation is based on the following
information:
Thermally improved spacer of
stainless steel
(criterion Σ d · λ ≤ 0.007
according to EN ISO 10077-1
met):
Assessment of design and
building physics
There is no venting and draining of the rebate space.
d = 0.2 mm = 2 · 10-4 m;
λ = 17 W/(mK); height 7 mm
Additional information:
n
Uncritical in the vertical
facade
n
In roof glazing, more critical
due to lack of drainage
Isotherm representation
Ψgg = 0.22 W/(mK)
88 |
| 89
3
3.2.1.5.2
Glass joint with sealant groove and back-fill cord
(triple)
3.2.1.5.5
Glass joint with sealant groove and sealing profile
(double)
Variant 1 b: Butt joint (triple) (Illustration of principle)
building physics
building physics
Venting and draining of the
rebate space is possible and
must be neatly designed at the
joint crossovers too.
As for Variant 1 a.
the profile
assured.
3.2.1.5.3
n
All-glass corner with stepped glass (double)
Variant 1 c: Corner (double)
(Illustration of principle)
Ideal for vertical facades and
also for roof glazing, provided that draining / venting of
is
n
Thanks to defined opening
cross-sections of the glazing
profile, vapour pressure
equalisation in adjacent
frame profiles is possible.
n
Loosely contacting or poorly
fitted profile edges should be
avoided to assure airtightness on the inside.
Additional Information:
Ψgg = 0.21 W/(mK)
channels
Ψgg = 0.22 W/(mK)
3.2.1.5.6
Ψgg = 0.17 W/(mK)
building physics
3.2.1.5.4
Glass joint with sealant groove and sealing profile
(triple)
There is no venting and draining of the rebate space.
All-glass corner with stepped glass (triple)
Variant 1 d: Corner (triple)
building physics
As for Variant 2 a.
Ψgg = 0.21 W/(mK)
Ψgg = 0.15 W/(mK)
building physics
90 |
As for variant 1 c.
| 91
3
3.2.1.5.7
All-glass corner with sealing profile (double)
n
symmetrical view
n
defined joint cross-section
n
thanks to defined opening
cross-sections of the glazing
profile, vapour pressure
equalisation in adjacent
frame profiles is possible.
n
n
clear assignment required of
load-bearing or sealing joint
3.2.1.5.8
loosely contacting or poorly
fitted profile edges should be
avoided to assure airtightness on the inside.
Internal spacer can be seen
from the outside, possible
visual impairment
All-glass corner with sealing profile (triple)
Ψgg = 0.15 W/(mK)
building physics
Glass joint with sealing profile and frame profile
(double)
Outer glass edge with mitre,
inner glass edge with cut edge
n
3.2.1.5.9
Ψgg = 0.19 W/(mK)
building physics
Symmetrical glass corner without inner sealing joint. In the
case of a structural load-bearing connection, it is only made
between the outer panes. As a
result, there might not be any
structural connection when the
outer panes fracture.
As for variant 2 c.
building physics
Venting and draining of the
rebate space is possible and
must be neatly designed at the
joint crossovers too.
the profile
assured
Ideal for vertical facades and
also for roof glazing, provided that draining / venting of
is
n
Thanks to joint limitation,
glass rebate venting is
assured, higher inner surface
temperature at the glass
edge from an additional inner
‘heat profile’
n
Internal profile can be seen
visual impairment
Additional Information:
n
channels
Ψgg = 0.29 W/(mK)
3.2.1.5.10 Glass joint with sealing profile and frame profile
(triple)
building physics
As for Variant 3 a.
Ψgg = 0.25 W/(mK)
92 |
| 93
3
3.2.1.5.11 All-glass corner with sealing profile and connecting plate (double)
Ψgg = 0.30 W/(mK)
building physics
As for variant 2 c.
Additional information:
n
however with internal connecting sheet so that a loadbearing connection of the
inner panes too can be created.
adhesive
joints
between metal sheet and
glass must however be
dimensioned in respect of
load and thermal expansion
(e.g. according to ETAG002
> 6 mm x 6 mm)
n
additional readily thermally
conducting profile on the
inside for increasing the inner
surface temperature
n
internal profile can be seen
visual impairment
is created at an angle of around
45 degrees and having an edge
length of generally 1 to 2 mm.
UV protection
To obtain sufficient UV protection as well as an attractive
look, the edge remaining visible
of the insulating glass unit must
be treated accordingly. For
example, an enamel coating (by
screen printing) is applied as a
rule at position 2 of single-pane
safety glass. Float glass panes
and for laminated safety glass
structures are generally coated
with a UV-resistant silicone.
The screen printing provided on
single-pane safety glass is
available in a high quality, but
longer delivery times are needed for manufacturing a unit of
this type. Coating with UVresistance silicone can be done
much more simply.
3.2.1.7
3.2.1.5.12 All-glass corner with sealing profile and connecting plate (triple)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Ψgg = 0.20 W/(mK)
building physics
3.2.1.6
Visual aspects of glass joints and all-glass corners
Glass edges fine-ground or
polished
For a uniform appearance, it is
recommended that the project-
94 |
As for variant 3 c.
ing panes of the stepped insulating glass are designed fineground or polished during edge
processing. In all cases, a bevel
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Due to the expected thermal
stress, it may be necessary to
use tempered products (SSG
or HSG). In the case of LSG
units covered with dark tones,
attention must be paid to the
surface
temperature
on
account of the durability of the
connection.
Visual assessment
Production-related finishing
features must be assessed in
accordance with the VFF leaflet
V.06 ‘Richtlinie zur Visuellen
Beurteilung für Glas im
Bauwesen’ [10] (Directive for
assessment of the visual quality of glass for the construction
industry).
Literature
DIN 4108-2: 2003-07 ‘Wärmeschutz und Energie-Einsparung in
Gebäuden - Teil 2: Mindestanforderungen an den Wärmeschutz’
DIN 18545-2: 2008-12 ‘Abdichten von Verglasungen mit Dichtstoffen Teil 2: Dichtstoffe, Bezeichnung, An-forderungen, Prüfung’
EN 673: 2003-06 ‘Glas im Bauwesen - Bestimmung des
Wärmedurchgangskoeffizienten (U-Wert) - Berech-nungsverfahren’
EN 1279-3: 2003-05 ‘Glas im Bauwesen - Mehrscheiben-Isolierglas Teil 3: Langzeitprüfverfahren und Anfor-derungen bezüglich
Gasverlustrate und Grenzabweichungen für die Gaskonzentration’
EN ISO 10077-1: 2006-12 ‘Wärmetechnisches Verhalten von Fenstern,
Türen und Abschlüssen - Berechnung des
Wärmedurchgangskoeffizienten - Teil 1: Allgemeines’
EN ISO 11600: 2004-04 ‘Hochbau - Fugendichtstoffe - Einteilung und
Anforderungen von Dichtungsmassen’
EnEV, Verordnung zur Änderung der Energieeinsparverordnung,
Bundesgesetzblatt Nr. 23, S. 954 ff vom 29. April 2009
ETAG 0002, Technische Zulassung für Geklebte Glaskonstruktionen
(Structural Sealant Glazing Systems - SSGS), EOTA (für Deutschland
DIBt)
VFF Merkblatt ES.01 ‘Die richtigen U-Werte von Fenstern, Türen und
Fassaden’
VFF Merkblatt V.06 ‘Richtlinie zur Beurteilung der visuellen Qualität von
Glas für das Bauwesen’
| 95
3
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
3.3 Emissivity ε
Every body whose temperature
is above the absolute zero
point emits thermal radiation.
The emissivity of a body indicates how much radiation it
emits in comparison with an
ideal heat radiator, a black
body. The emissivity of uncoated soda lime glass is 0.837. In
UNIGLAS® | TOP Energy
Saving Glass, at least one glass
surface towards the cavity is
provided with extremely thin
coatings which are almost
invisible thanks to the interference principle. These coatings
are to an extreme degree selective. They allow light beams in
the visible wavelength range to
pass through in a comparable
extent to uncoated glass, while
close-to-infrared heat rays are
almost completely reflected.
This low-emitting ‘Low-E’ coating reduces the emission
capacity of modern standard
glass to 0.03 to 0.07, in top
products even to 0.02. In this
way, on the coated side only
around 2 % of the thermal radiation is emitted to the outside
and around 98 % is reflected
back into the building. Since
the main proportion of heat loss
from a heated room occurs due
to heat radiation modern insulating glass improves thermal
insulation by around 66% compared to uncoated insulating
glass. At the same time, this
increases the surface temperature of the interior pane, which
again increases the feeling of
comfort.
3.4 Solar Gains
Normal insulating glazing
allows for a significant proportion of visible solar radiation to
penetrate into rooms. In the
rooms, walls, floors and furniture / objects which absorb the
visible beams more or less
strongly depending on their
colour are exposed to solar
radiation, and emit it again as
long-wave radiation. The closeto-infrared long-wave radiation
is reflected by the function
coating of the insulating glass
into the room and can no
longer leave the room in this
way, so that the insulating glass
becomes a solar collector and
hence contributes to room air
heating.
Depending on the direction of
the glazing, the solar energy
gains may vary - there will be
lower gain from windows facing
the north than from insulating
glass facing east, west or even
south. This desired and free-ofcharge additional energy provides many advantages during
the winter months; however, it
must always be considered in
light of requirements for thermal
insulation during the summer.
This phenomenon is also
referred to as ‘greenhouse
effect’. (siehe Þ Seite 114)
3.5 Global Radiation Distribution
Global radiation is understood
as the intensity of the total solar
radiation depending on wavelength ranges whose function is
indicated in the graphic below.
If the transmission curve of the
glazing is compared with this
global radiation distribution
curve, the respective proportion of radiation allowed
through the glass is obtained.
The rays not let through are
reflected or absorbed.
Global radiation
100 UV
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
300
visible
heat radiation
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100 2300 2500
solar spectrum
spectral luminous efficiency curve
conventional insulated glass
solar control insulated glass
500
700
rel. spectral luminous efficiency [%]
[12]
BF Merkblatt 002/2008 ‘Richtlinie zum Umgang mit MehrscheibenIsolierglas’
ift-Richtlinie DI-01/1 ‘Verwendbarkeit von Dichtstoffen Teil 1 - Prüfung
von Materialien in Kontakt mit dem Isolierglas-Randverbund’
ift-Richtlinie DI-02/1 ‘Verwendbarkeit von Dichtstoffen, Teil 2: - Prüfung
von Materialien in Kontakt mit der Kante von Verbund- und
Verbundsicherheitsglas’
TRLV, Technische Regeln für die Verwendung von linienförmig gelagerten
Verglasungen, August 2006, Mitteilungen des Deutschen Instituts für
Bautechnik (DIBt), 3/2007
TRAV, Technische Regeln für die Verwendung von absturzsichernden
Verglasungen, Januar 2003, Mitteilungen des Deutschen Instituts für
Bautechnik (DIBt), 2/2003
TRPV, Technische Regeln für die Bemessung und die Ausführung punktförmig gelagerter Verglasungen, August 2006, Mitteilungen des
Deutschen Instituts für Bautechnik (DIBt), 3/2007
rel. intensity of radiation [%]
[11]
wave length [nm]
The total solar radiation in the
wavelength range from 280 to
2500 nm is divided between
about 52% visible radiation and
96 |
about 48% invisible radiation
(global radiation distribution
according to C.I.E publication
no. 20).
| 97
3
3.6 Light Transmittance τv
The light transmittance τv is the
measurement quantity for the
directly transmitted and visible
proportion of the solar radiation, in the wavelength range
from 380 nm to 780 nm, relative to the light sensitivity of the
human eye. The light transmittance is influenced by the glass
3.8 shading coefficient (SC)
thickness and by the function
coating. A 4 mm thick float
glass pane has a permeability
of 90 % of the visible light, insulating glass made of 2 uncoated float glass panes 82 % and
UNIGLAS® | TOP Premium
80%.
glass unit. This factor is essential
for calculation of the required
cooling load of a building.
SC =
g value glazing
0.8
3.9 Solar Transmittance
3.7 Total Energy Transmittance (g-value)
The g-value (in %) is the sum (in
%) of the directly transmitted
proportion of radiation of the
total solar spectrum and of the
secondary radiation emission
of the glazing to the interior.
The secondary radiation emission results from absorption of
the solar radiation that neither
The shading coefficient (SC)
according to VDI regulation 2078
(shading coefficient) is the factor
of mean transmittance of solar
energy relative to the degree of
total energy transmittance of an
uncoated two-pane insulating
passes through the glazing nor
is reflected. (cf. 3.10). The g
value is determined according
to EN 410.
A low total energy transmittance is always concomitant
with a lower light transmittance.
Solar energy behaviour at an insulated glass pane
The direct solar transmittance
is determined according to DIN
5036 with reference to the
standard illuminant D65 (light
transmittance) and global radi-
ation according to C.I.E. publication No. 20 (energy transmittance). This is used for calculating the total energy transmittance.
3.10 Absorption of Energy
The radiation delivered to the
glass pane is partially transmitted, reflected and absorbed.
During absorption, the radiation
energy is converted into thermal energy and thus leads to a
temperature increase in the
pane.
3.11 Colour Rendition Index
Secondary heat
dissipation to
the exterior qi = 11 %
Solar energy reflection
Q = 29%
Total solar energy transmittance g =
98 |
Secondary heat
dissipation to
the interior qi = 8 %
The general colour rendition
index Ra indicates which influence the spectral transmission
has on the colour recognition of
objects in a room that is glazed
using functional insulating
glass. Determination is carried
out according to EN 410 taking
into consideration the reference
illuminant of equal or similar
colour temperature.
Direct solar energy
transmittance τe = 52
%
τe + qi = 60 %
| 99
3
3.16 UNIGLAS® | SLT
3.12 Light Reflectance
The light reflectance indicates
what percentage of visible light
in the wavelength range of
approx. 380 - 780 nm is reflected by the surface of the glass
pane.
3.13 Circadian Light Transmittance τc(460)
Circadian systems (Latin:
‘circa’ = about, ‘dia’ = day)
describe the day/night rhythm
of organisms. The main determinant of time for the circadian
of organisms is light.
For human beings, the circadian is determined by the melatonin metabolism. The latest
research proves that the melatonin that makes people sleepy
is replaced by performanceenhancing serotonin only by a
sufficient quantity of light in the
wavelength range from 380 to
580 nm. Maximum efficiency is
not however achieved with the
maximum daylight seen at
555 nm, but shifts towards blue
light at around 460 nm.
It is thus not sufficient to define
the maximum light transmittance solely by the light sensitivity of the eye. To describe the
light quantity passing through
glazing, in future the quality of
the light in the area of the circadian τc(460) must be specified
too.
to 380 nm relative to the incident solar radiation in this
range (EN 410).
3.15 Selectivity Factor S
The selectivity factor S is
ascertained from the quotient
between light transmittance τv
and total energy transmittance
g. The higher the value of S,
the more favourable the ratio.
The currently achievable max-
Due to the natural colour of the
glass, the above described
solar-related and light-related
values will change accordingly.
With the revised European
standards, and due to the better comparability of the products, the determination by cal-
imum is 2.14, possible with
UNIGLAS® | SUN 60/28.
S=
light transmittance
g-value
τV
According to the provisions of
EnEV 2009, verification of thermal insulation during summer
according to DIN 4108-2 must
be provided. This is to ensure
that rooms are not heated up
too much during summer due
to the glazing. This proof is
determined by means of the
so-called solar input factor S,
which is calculated as follows:
S=
Σj (Awj · gtotal,j)
AG
AW: Window surface in m2
AG: Total surface of the room/space
gtotal:Total solar energy transmittance
of the glazing including solar
protection, calculated by the
equation (*) and/or according to
EN 13363-1 or on the basis of
En 410 or assured information
by the manufacturer.
100 |
culation of the heat transmittance coefficient and of the
solar-related and light-related
values according to EN 673 will
even be expressly given precedence over the values ascertained
by
measurement
according to EN 674 or EN
675.
All UNIGLASS® associates
have a calculation programme
validated by ift Rosenheim
which they can use to determine the corresponding values
for every individual glass structure. Consequently, elaborate
and time-consuming test certificates or expert reports are
no longer required.
3.17 Thermal Insulation during Summer
3.14 UV Radiation Transmittance
The UV radiation transmittance
is the transmittance in the
wavelength range from 280 nm
It is not useful to illustrate all
product variants in an insulating
glass overview. Requirements
placed on sound insulation,
building protection or solar
control lead to different structures. To these are added the
planned-for impacts from wind
and snow which have an additional influence on the glass
thickness.
The sum is for all windows of
the room or the considered
space. The total energy transmittance of the glazing including solar control gtot can be
calculated in a simplified manner by means of the equation
(*). As an alternative, the calculation method for gtot according to DIN V 4108-6, Appendix
B can be used.
*
gtotal =
g
FC
g:
the total solar energy transmittance of the glazing according
to EN 410
FC: the reducing coefficient for solar
protection equipment according
to table 8
| 101
3
For the influencing factors of
different solar control measures
on the glazing, table 8 in DIN
4108-2 provides the specified
reducing factors. Moreover, the
position and size of the glazing
is also a crucial factor, and DIN
also provides the necessary
statements on this.
With increasing proportions of
the glass surfaces in the outer
shell of buildings, the use of
UNIGLAS® | SUN, UNIGLAS® |
SHADE or UNIGLAS® |
ECONTROL is worthwhile in
order to significantly decrease
the solar effect factor. (see Þ
Page 138)
mations are system-immanent
and do not represent a defect.
They are proof of the airtightness of the insulating glass unit.
Insulating Glass Effect
3.18 Interference Phenomena
With positioning of several float
glass panes one behind the
other - i.e. also with insulating
glass - certain optical phenomena might occur on the surface
due to the absolutely planeparallel panes and in specific
light conditions. These phenomena may be rainbow-like
blurs, stripes or rings that
change their position when the
glazing is pressed.
These interferences are purely
physical and are caused by
refraction of light and superposition / spectral overlap. They
3
are a rare occurrence and
always depend on light conditions, the position of the glazing
and the resulting angle of light
incidence. However, these
interferences rarely occur when
looking outside from the interior
but - if at all - in the reflection
from the outside. Therefore,
these phenomena are not
regarded as a defect but more
as proof for the absolute planeparallelism of the used float
glass panes, which consequently allow for a distortionfree view.
3.20 Dew Point Temperature
3.19 Insulating Glass Effect
The cavity between the panes
of insulating glass is hermetically sealed off from the outside.
The prevailing air pressure for
production is virtually frozen.
Atmospheric air pressure fluctuations, transport into other
geodetic altitudes and temperature changes cause the outer
panes to bulge inwards or outwards. The inevitable result is,
despite absolutely flat individual
panes, distorted reflections.
102 |
This effect depends on the size
and geometry of the panes, on
the width of the pane cavity
and whether it is double or
triple insulating glass. With
triple insulation the middle pane
remains almost undeformed.
The two cavities have the
effect, when illustrated in simplified form, of a single and correspondingly wide cavity. (sum
of individual widths). This significantly increases the effect on
the outer panes. These defor-
Formation of condensation
on the inside of the glazing
The U value of glazing influences the surface temperature
on the room side (tsi) of an
insulating glass unit and consequently influences comfort and
possible condensation of
humidity (depending on the
temperature difference ti-ta
between interior space ti and
exterior space ta). Air always
contains a specific proportion
of water vapour, however
depending on the temperature
it can only absorb a limited
quantity of water vapour. The
lower the temperature the less
water vapour can be absorbed.
If the temperature limit (dew
point) is undershot, water will
result (condensation). The
water quantity contained in the
air is expressed in a ratio to the
saturation limit as relative
humidity. In this way, it is for
example possible on a component having a surface temperature of 9°C, at a room temperature of 21°C and a relative
humidity of 50%, that condensate is precipitated since the
absolute quantity of water
vapour remains unchanged.
Whether there is actually any
precipitation of water also
depends on the movement and
routing of air: type and installa| 103
tion position of the window
frame in the wall niches.
Curtains, etc. also influence the
condensation effect. Short
temporary occurrence of condensate is harmless: by brief
airing, the moist air is
exchanged for dry air from the
outside, without reducing the
surface temperatures of the
components. The original room
air temperature is quickly
restored when the relative room
humidity is lowered.
Dew point diagram (acc. to DIN 4701)
100
Ug [W/m2K]
60
1,1
1,4
1,6
1,8
50
40
20
3,0
relative humidity [%]
80
5,8
30
room temperature [°C]
30
20
20
10
10
9
0
-10
0
-50
-40
Formation of condensate on
the outside of the glazing
In transitional periods, particularly in times with clear, windless and cold nights, condensate frequently collects on the
outer surface of modern insulating glass with low Ug values
. Particularly at risk are windows facing the night sky
unprotected. Due to the temperature radiation from the
104 |
-30
-20
-108
outside temperature [°C]
and condensation forms on the
outer pane. This phenomenon
does not represent a defect,
but rather is proof of the excellent thermal insulation of the
insulating glass.
3.21 Plant Growth behind Insulating Glass
Previous studies prove that
plant growth behind thermal
insulating and solar control
glass works well per se. Later
research headed by Prof. Dr.
Ulbrich at the Institute of
Chemistry and Dynamics of the
Geosphere - Phytosphere at
the Jülich research center show
however that the importance of
the blue light portion has long
been underestimated. The
increase in the shorter-wave
light radiation portion of glazing
has a measurable and
favourable effect on photosynthesis. The density of the
leaves relative to their surface
increases and the formation of
chlorophyll is enhanced. The
special coating of the glass in
UNIGLAS® | VITAL Wellnessglass shifts the maximum light
transmittance clearly to the
blue light range without reducing the overall light transmittance.
For
that
reason
UNIGLAS® | VITAL Wellness-
glass is an optimised glazing
solution for the conservatory,
guaranteeing stronger plant
growth. The leaves take on a
more intensive colour. It is
expressly pointed out that planning of the greenery requires
consideration of the location,
including the aspects of inclination angle of the glazing, the
varying position of the sun in
the course of the day, ventilation and thermal stress behind
the glass, and proper irrigation
of the plants.
The effect of UNIGLAS® | VITAL
Wellnessglass as a light-scattering variant in the construction of greenhouses is of particular interest. Due to the
increased leaf density and the
higher proportion of chlorophyll, it is possible for the active
ingredients in medicinal herbs,
for example, to develop to an
extent previously impossible
when grown behind glass.
outer pane into the night sky
(cf. 3.3), the surface temperature of the outer pane can cool
down to less than the ambient
temperature.
This
effect
becomes all the more probable
the lower the heat flow from the
interior through the insulating
glass. A low Ug value offers the
ideal conditions for this. In
addition, with a high degree of
relative humidity, the dew point
at the outer pane is undershot
| 105
3
3.22 Electromagnetic Damping
3.23 Insulating Glass with Stepped Edge(s)
Electrical appliances or systems, high-voltage lines, transmitting systems and mobile
telephones emit electromagnetic waves. Electronics and
consequently stresses through
electromagnetic fields that surround us are steadily increasing. The aim is to reduce electromagnetic radiation inside the
building. Windows as structural
elements must also provide a
valuable contribution here.
Partial absorption and reflection
of the electromagnetic waves is
already achieved by applying
Low-E coatings.
Insulating glass with a stepped
edge (projecting upper pane)
on one side for installation in
roofs, sheds, conservatories
and the like dispenses with the
need for elaborate roof constructions and allows for low
roof inclinations, so that no
glazing profiles cause water to
be trapped. The exposed edge
In this context, the technical
term ‘shielding’ expresses the
degree of damping in decibels
(dB) and/or the efficiency in
percent which can be achieved
with each measure. Shield
damping of 20 dB reduces the
so-called ‘flux density’ to 1%.
Damping of 20 dB thus results
in a reduction of 99% in the
electric smog. The key factors
for this effect are reflection and
absorption.
In certain cases, the required
shield damping values may be
achieved using a special glass
structure. This must be discussed and agreed upon
before the tendering phase.
In the vicinity of airports, false
signals caused by radar signals
being reflected off the facades
of buildings may lead to interference.
106 |
In these areas, air traffic controllers demand a damping of
the reflecting radar beams
between 10 dB and 20 dB,
depending on the building location and size. This aim is
achieved using special glass
superstructures.
Since as a rule thermal insulation, solar control and sound
insulation functions etc. must
also be provided, the superstructures can only be determined by individually adapting
them to the building. The glass
specialists of UNIGLAS® will
devise the required solution in
cooperation with the planner
and the facade / window manufacturer. In that context, the
following issues need to be
clarified:
connection of the insulating
glass may be protected from
UV radiation in different ways:
special steel or screen-printed
covers, metallic cover plates or
caps or UV-resistant sealing
agents (silicon etc.) for the secondary sealing of the insulating
glass.
SSG/Float
LSG
Cover layer / enamelling
(Protection of the insulated
glass compound from UV
radiation)
Recommendation:
Float glass with grind edge(s)
n
What needs to be shielded?
3.24 Decorative Insulating Glass
n
Which frequency ranges
must be damped and to
what extent?
n
How can the potential connections between the window and the glass be
realised? Is a special edge
connection required for this
purpose?
Requirements
for
optical
design of insulating glass
panes as well as technical
demands have led to the
development of a large number
of variants of decorative insulating glass that have become an
integral part of the product
ranges available today.
n
What other functional characteristics must be given to
the glass?
3
Shouldered insulated glass with stepped edges
n
Insulating glass with sash
bars
Windows in country style are
still very fashionable. However,
small-format insulating glass
panels in genuine lattice windows pose problems with
regard to both thermal and climatic aspects. For this reason,
modern insulating glass products are supplied with sash
bars inside the pane cavity or
alternatively mounted on the
outer pane. In addition to a
wide variety of colours, widths
and layout options, the internal
sash bars are maintenance free
and provide a long lifetime
thanks to their integration in the
unit cavity. Glazing will remain
smooth and even both on the
inside and on the outside.
Sash bar in insulated glass
Interior
decorative bar
An alternative approach to
achieving the original visual
appearance is the use of
‘Georgian bars’ (mock bars).
For this method, the large-surface insulating glass pane is
| 107
divided in its cavity by means of
profiles similar to the spacer
elements, in the desired lattice
layout. The completed insulating glass unit is then equipped
with ‘sash bar profiles’ on both
sides of the outer glass surfaces, creating an optical
impression that comes very
close to genuine lattice windows. The advantage of this
type of window elements in
comparison with the classic,
small-panel, genuine lattice
windows is that they provide
heat-related
improvements
thanks to the low proportion of
frame/edge connection as a
ratio of the actual glass surface.
(see Þ Page 116)
Georgian bar
Internal spacer
profiles
External decorative profiles
This option also provides a
plethora of possibilities with
regard to colours, widths and
window layout.
n
Insulating glass with lead
glazing
Another type of window decoration is classic lead glazing,
which is integrated as a finished element into the unit cavity, protecting it from damage
due to weather conditions as
well as to mechanical influences. This type of window
glazing is often used in churches, museums and also in residential applications. Tinted
108 |
glass pieces and lead rods are
used by artists to create decorative pictures in the form of a
pane, by soldering them by
hand as it has been done for
centuries; these pictures are
then enclosed in modern insulating glass ready for installation
to show off their aesthetic
effects maintenance free for
many years.
n
Insulating glass with decorative design on one of the
two glass surfaces
Another possibility of indulging
very personal tastes in window
glazing is processing parts of or
all of the surface of the insulating glass panes. For this purpose, various processes such
as acid etching, sand blasting
or glass fusion may be used.
With the first 2 methods, partly
automated processing has
been developed alongside
manual processing. Glass fusing though remains a wholly
manual process. This ancient
art of ‘fusing glass into glass’
has undergone a renaissance
during recent years. The relief
design of glass-fused pictures
provides an aesthetic attraction
and interesting effects due to
refraction of light, so creating a
special and very charming
impression when combined
with modern, heat-insulating
glass - modern glazing engineering at its best. The same
holds true for single-step and
multi-step acid etched decors
as well as sand-blasted glass
with which the design is not
applied onto the glass surface
but slightly below the surface,
without however jeopardising
the mechanical strength of the
pane.
n
Insulating glass with convex surface
With classic lattice windows,
convex glass is still required
even today. These so-called
bulls-eye panes are shaped in
special furnaces and are then
used to create modern style
insulating glass in small sizes.
This method allows for either
one or both sides of the insulating glass to be designed as
convex panes. Since the curvature decreases towards the
edges, the edge connections
can be made in the same way
as with normal units - during
both manufacture of the insulating glass and when glazing
with it.
Convex glass
tinted, and therefore an ideal
three-dimensional colour carrier. This not only offers extended possibilities with tinted
glass, but also a new material
for design generally.
For architectural spaces, this
ensures different and varied
applications for the direction of
daylight or for artificial lighting.
With translucent material, clear
view and transmittance of light
is reduced, with opaque material it is completely prevented.
Light transmittance of acrylic
glass can be specified exactly,
allowing for precise handling of
light incidence for the respective projects. The combination
of glass and plastic materials
creates an outstanding 3D
effect thanks to the smoothly
laser-cut and shimmering
edges of the acrylic glass that
are in contact with each other.
LIGHTGLASS examples
An interesting variant for
colours in glass architecture is
provided by LIGHTGLASS.
n
Direction of light and the
combination of design and
function
With LIGHTGLASS, tinted,
one-piece or multi-piece acrylic
glass panels are freely positioned between the two panes
of an insulating glass combination. The individual pieces are
precisely laser-cut and consequently provide great accuracy
of fit so that they form one surface without adhesion – giving
the effect of inlay work. Acrylic
glass is also a fully transparent
plastic material even when
| 109
3
3.25 Dimensioning of Glass Thickness
The installed glazing is subjected to various loads. In addition
to the permanent load of the
glass, wind and snow loads
and - in the case of insulating
glass - planned climatic loads
(due to the hermetic sealing of
the unit cavity) act upon the
glass. Glass dimensions remain
a purely national matter. For
example in Austria, for effects
ÖNORM B 1991-1-1 to 4 and
for dimensioning ÖNORM B
3716-1 to 5 including supplement 1 must be complied with,
whereas in Germany for effects
DIN 1055 and for dimensioning
the DIBt technical rules, TRLV,
TRAV and TRPV apply. The
technical rules in Germany still
follow the global safety concept, whereby all safety
allowances are taken into
account by determining maximum permissible stresses. The
Austrian model distributes,
depending on glass type, differ-
ent allowances both on the
‘effects’ side and on the ‘resistance’ side. In Germany too DIN
1055 is currently being revised
so that the EUROCODES are
implemented in the ‘effects’.
DIN 18008-1 to 7 will in future
supersede the DIBt technical
rules. At the time of going to
press, however, only parts 1
and 2 of this standard had
appeared. After the introduction of this standard for building
inspection by Germany's
states, use of the semiprobabilistic safety concept has been
implemented in Germany as is
already the case in Austria. Due
to the paradigm change, the
technical rules can only be
superseded in their entirety. To
achieve this, at least Part 1 to
Part 5 inclusively must be introduced for building inspection
as a whole. This will probably
be the case in 2013.
For reasons of the obligation to
provide extensive verification,
the maximum dimensions stated in this publication can only
refer to the options of production and do not provide any
information about static suitabilities. According to the provisions of the state building regulations (LBO), the load-bearing
capability verifications may only
be defined by engineering
companies for structural planning or by persons who have
an appropriate qualification and
adequate professional experience.
Generally speaking, the party
ordering glass products is
responsible for correct dimensioning of the panes.
Glass thicknesses stated by
any of the UNIGLAS® associations are always regarded as
non-committal recommendations.
fE (E)
fR (R)
Emean
Rmean
Nominal
safety zone
Ek
110 |
E, R
Ed Ed
| 111
3
4
4
4.1.1 Edge seal systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
4.1.2 Nominal and measured values
for glass and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4.2 UNIGLAS® Products for Heat Insulation . . . . . . 120
4.2.1 UNIGLAS® | TOP Energy Saving Glass . . . . . . . . . . 120
4.2.2 UNIGLAS® | VITAL Wellnessglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4.2.3 Heat Mirror™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
4.2.4 UNIGLAS® | SOLAR Photovoltaic glass . . . . . . . . . 123
4.2.5 UNIGLAS® | PANEL Vacuum Insulation . . . . . . . . . . 124
4.2.6 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
112 |
| 113
4
4.1 Basic Information
Nowadays the focus is on energy-efficient construction for
both new and renovated buildings. This helps to reduce energy consumption in order to
save primary energy resources
on the one hand and to reduce
above all the CO2 emissions on
the other hand, so that the
greenhouse effect is reduced.
oped, and today we can use
standard thermal insulating
glass with 1.1 W/m2K. This is a
double-paned insulating glass
with thermal insulation coating
and a cavity filled with inert
argon gas. At the moment,
demand for three-pane insulating glass with Ug values as low
as 0.5 W/m2K is increasing.
As this energy consciousness
developed over the last two
decades, people's desire to
connect their areas of life and
work more strongly with the
outside world and to create
more light-flooded rooms also
increased. This only works with
high-quality glazing that has
been continuously developed
with regard to thermal insulation during that time.
Modern insulating glasses have
excellent thermal insulation
properties due to a combination of inert gas fillings – normally argon, in exceptional
cases krypton – in the unit cavity, and an extremely thin,
almost invisible precious metal
coating on one of the glass surfaces facing the cavity. Thanks
to this precious metal coating,
which is sputtered using the
magnetron method, it cannot
be penetrated by long-wave
heat radiation and reflects this
radiation.
40 years ago, buildings in many
German regions were often
equipped with single glazing
that had Ug values of 5.8
W/m2K. After the oil crisis of
1973, the first thermal insulation ordinance was adopted,
based on which insulating glazing with a Ug value of 3.0
W/m2K became standard in all
parts of Germany. Insulating
glass was continually devel-
Precious metal coating
Metal oxide
Silver
Metal oxide
Glass
Magnetron method (schematic diagram)
Positioning
Cleaning
Coating
Enclosed inside the cavity, this
layer is long-lasting and protected from mechanic and climatic influences. It is neutral in
colour and invisible. Normally,
the coated pane is installed on
Removal
the side facing indoors towards
the cavity. In the case of threepane insulating glass units,
both outer panes are coated on
the side facing the cavity.
Structure of three-pane insulated glass
4
Glass pane
invisible heat
insulation layer
Spacer element
Inner sealing
Desiccating agent
(molecular sieve)
Outer sealing
Thanks to the excellent thermal
insulation of these panes, the
feeling of comfort increases in
the room, especially near the
windows. In comparison to
conventional older glazing, the
temperature of the inner window pane increases significantly due to the reflected heat radiation.
n
Modern thermal insulation
glass eliminates the feeling of
draught and cold near windows, especially in the cold
seasons. This is also an advantage for the plants on the window sill.
Surface temperature at 20 °C room temperature [°C]
Outside air temperature [°C]
Type of glass
Single-pane glass, Ug = 5.8 W/m2K
Two-pane insulated glass, Ug = 3.0 W/m2K
Two-pane insulated glass, coated, Ug = 1.1 W/m2K
Three-pane insulated glass, coated, Ug = 0.7 W/m2K
114 |
Inspection
0
-5
-11
-14
+6
+12
+17
+18
+2
+11
+16
+18
-2
+8
+15
+17
-4
+7
+15
+17
| 115
4.1.1 Edge connection systems
The edges of the insulating
glass and the spacer element
profiles represent a thermal
bridge to the pane surface. For
that reason, all functional insulation functional glasses have in
recent years become established with the thermally optimised edge connection system
UNIGLAS® | TS THERMO
SPACER and UNIGLAS® |
STAR TPS (‘warm edge’), and
largely displayed the previously
used aluminium profile. This
development has made condensate formation in the transitional area to the window frame
considerably rarer.
n
n
Stainless steel
Extremely thin sections
made of stainless steel
replace the aluminium, as
stainless steel has a significantly lower thermal conductivity than aluminium. Due to
the higher strength values of
stainless steel compared to
aluminium, it is also possible
to achieve much thinner section wall thicknesses, contributing to a further reduction in the direct heat transmission.
n
Combination of plastic
material with stainless
steel or with aluminium
Plastic material with its
excellent thermal insulation
properties alone is not sufficiently tight against gas diffusion, so that it needs to
obtain this property by being
combined with stainless
steel or aluminium in order to
ensure the longevity of the
insulating glass.
Aluminium spacer
Outside
0 °C
Inside
20 °C
17 °C
10,4 °C
'warm edge' spacer
Outside
0 °C
Inside
20 °C
17 °C
12 °C
This enhanced thermal separation of the individual panes in
the edge connection of the
insulating glass is achieved by
means of different approaches
that have developed in the market:
116 |
Conventional spacer systems from hollow sections
n
Flexible spacer systems
with integrated desiccant
In the insulating glass systems, the hollow-chamber
profiles are replaced by elastic or plastic materials with
integrated desiccant which
also lead to an optimisation
of the Ψ-values and hence
the Uw-values. The deformability of the spacer profile not
only permits out-of-the-ordinary special shapes for insulating glass, but also reduces
by pump movements the
stresses in the edge connection area, both in the glass
and in the secondary
sealant. The low stationary
thermal conductivity of the
materials ensures minimum
heat losses at the edge of
the insulating glass, and
superb design. For differentiation from insulating glass
systems with hollow profiles,
the systems with flexible
edge are named UNIGLAS® |
STAR.
n
Super Spacer®
This is a silicone foam covered with a stainless steel foil
to achieve gas-diffusion
tightness.
The
flanks
between the silicone foam
and the glass are sealed with
an additional primary seal of
polyisobutylene.
At
UNIGLAS® GmbH & Co. KG,
this system is preferably
used for curved insulating
glass.
n Thermoplastic systems
With this system the normal
profile is replaced by a hotextruded, plastic special
compound on polyisobutylene basis which is positioned between the panes
during production. Thanks to
application by means of
robotics, in insulating glass
of the UNIGLAS® | STARTPS
type the straight-lined – and
in the case of triple insulating
glass the parallel – course of
the spacers is assured with
exact corner formation. The
robot system can here compensate tolerances from the
basic glass products and so
limit the divergences of the
total thickness of the insulating glass to an absolute minimum. The spacer is applied
without interruption up to
widths of 20 mm and sealed
gas-tight by a patented
process. Thanks to the
absence of two limit surfaces
in double insulating glass
and four limit surfaces in
triple insulating glass, and
the
controlled
elastic
deformability of the system,
the result is an extremely
tight insulating glass system.
The diversity of products within
the range of available systems,
even taking into account the
glazing situation, is wide and in
a direct comparison results in a
more or less strong influence
on the Ψ-(PSI) value (see Þ
page 81). The advantages and
disadvantages of the individual
systems have to be considered
carefully.
Your UNIGLAS® partner has
already made a preselection of
the system which is based on
numerous tests with regard to a
sustainable and long-lasting
product.
When determining the Uw value
(window's U-value), the table
values F.3 and F.4 in EN ISO
10077-1 take into account a
general reduction for the thermally improved spacer elements. The exact calculation
method is described in section
3.2.
| 117
4
4.1.2 Nominal and measured values for glass and windows
The Ug values given for insulating glass and the Uw values
given for windows are ’nominal
values’: information by the
manufacturer which is valid for
marketing the products. For
use in construction inside
Germany, ‘measured values’
have to be calculated and
declared by means of CE/Ü
marks. The correction value for
the glass Δ Ug can be found in
Table 10 of DIN 4108-4. In
other countries, national regulations which may be applicable must be complied with. For
the calculation of Uw,BW (measured value of window) Δ Uw
according to table J.1 from EN
14351-1:2006+A1:2010,
Annex J must be taken into
consideration.
n
n
Glazing, measured value
Ug,BW = Ug + ΔUg
Where ΔUg =
+0.1 W/m2K with simple cross
sash bar in cavity
+0.2 W/m2K with multiple cross
sash bar in cavity
n
Window, measured value
Uw,BW = Uw + ΔUw
Where ΔUW =
+0.1 W/m2K with simple cross
sash bar in cavity
+0.2 W/m2K with multiple cross
sash bar in cavity
+0.3 W/m2K with glass-dividing
bars
-0.1 W/m2K when a warm-edge
connection is used
Tab. J.1: Heat transmittance coefficient for lattice windows
Δ Uw
[W/m2K]
Fig.
Description
J.1
J.2
J.3
J.4
Attached sash bar(s)
Simple cross sash bar in multi-pane insulating glass
Multiple cross sash bars in multi-pane insulating glass
Glazing bar
Fig. J.1
Fig. J.2
Fig. J.3
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.4
Fig. J.4
In addition to installation of
sash bars, the inclination of the
glazing also affects the Ug and
hence also the Uw value of the
structure. The mode of operation of thermal insulation glass
is based not only on reflection
of thermal radiation as
described and on the specific
conductivity of the filler gases,
but also on the effective prevention of convection in these
gases. For example, with a vertical installation the optimum
width of the cavity in double
insulating glass filled with argon
is between 15 and 16 mm, and
for triple insulating glass 2 x 18
mm. If the cavities are made
smaller, the U-values increase
to a greater or lesser extent. If
they are increased, no further
decrease is possible. In fact the
U-values also increase slightly.
n
Ug values as a function of the inclination in W/m2K
UNIGLAS® | TOP
Location
vertical
installation
horizontal
installation
2
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
90°
Premium
4 - 12 - :4
4 - 16 - :4
0.7
4: 12 - 4 - 12 - :4
0.5
4: 18 - 4 - 18 - :4
90°
75°
60°
45°
30°
15°
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.1
1.4
1.5
1.5
1.6
1.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.8
0°
1.8
1.7
0.9
0.8
75°
60°
UNIGLAS® | TOP Premium 4 - 12 - :4
UNIGLAS® | TOP Premium 4 - 16 - :4
118 |
If the glazing is inclined out of
the vertical, a heavier convection starts which is all the
greater the wider the spacers
are. Some examples can be
found in the following table. For
calculating the Uw value, the
nominal value of Ug in the
appropriate inclination must be
entered, which your UNIGLAS®
partner would be happy to verify with UNIGLAS® | SLT. As a
general principle, UNIGLAS®
recommends for overhead
glazing a reduction in the cavities due to the increased thermal stressing of the insulating
glass particularly in the case of
greater inclinations.
45°
30°
15°
0°
UNIGLAS® | TOP 07 4: - 10 - 4 - 10 :4
UNIGLAS® | TOP 07 4: - 12 - 4 - 12 :4
UNIGLAS® | TOP 05 4: - 18 - 4 - 18 :4
| 119
4
4.2 UNIGLAS® Products for Thermal
Insulation
As described, all insulating
glasses of the UNIGLAS® Group
are made of high-quality and
tested materials and are produced according to statutory
requirements. Irrespective of its
design, the edge connection
provides optimum protection
from the high strains to which an
insulating glass unit is exposed
during its long product life. The
quality of the final product is
ensured by our internal quality
control, which is continuously
monitored and documented
according to strict factory specifications pursuant to DIN 12766. Additionally, all UNIGLAS®
production plants voluntarily
undergo an external quality control in which the ongoing production is inspected and also
the durability of multi-pane insulating glass is checked in an
accelerated climate test. In this
external
quality
control,
UNIGLAS® applies quality
standards which go well beyond
the normal minimum requirements. UNIGLAS® functional
insulating glass is therefore quality-checked and both internally
and externally monitored.
Thermal insulation is the basic
function of any insulating glass,
to which further functions can
be added, such as sound insulation (see Þ Section 5), solar
control (see Þ Section 6), safety
(see Þ Section 7) or self-cleaning (see Þ Section 2.9) as well
as combinations of these functions.
UNIGLAS® | VITAL Wellnessglass thus has the effect that
the sleep hormone melatonin
decreases in the human organism even when inside the building, while the vitalizing serotonin is released. UNIGLAS® |
VITAL Wellnessglass thus
makes a considerable contribution to combating the widespread phenomenon of winter
depression. The quality of the
light is adjusted by this coating
much more strongly to natural
outdoor light. This also reduces
sleeping problems. In the
Scandinavian countries, light
therapy with artificially generated blue light is a long established method in the dark sea-
son. In Central European latitudes, there is sufficient highquality light available even
when the sky is overcast during
winter, and this light can reach
interiors and be used free of
charge when the glazing is with
UNIGLAS® | VITAL Wellnessglass.
It has been scientifically proven
that an increased melatonin
level has a negative effect on
the hippocampus in the brain.
This region of the brain is
important for learning and
memory capacity. UNIGLAS® |
VITAL Wellnessglass thus can
have a positive effect on mental
performance.
4.2.1 UNIGLAS® | TOP Energy Saving Glass
UNIGLAS® | TOP is a special
thermal insulation glass that
reflects long-wave heat radiation
of the heating system and thereby keeps it in the room.
However, visible light and solar
radiation can pass almost unrestrictedly, so improving the
heating of the room.
4.2.2 UNIGLAS® | VITAL Wellnessglass
The light transmittance according to EN 410 is oriented
exclusively to the light sensitivity of the human eye, the main
factor for daylight vision, and
says nothing about the quality
of the light or about the influencing of the circadian system of
organisms (see Þ Section
3.14). Thanks to a special
coating applied to one or more
glass surfaces, it is possible to
significantly increase the light
120 |
transmittance responsible for
the circadian (see Þ Fig. 2).
Depending on the product
variant, a triple insulating glass
unit with the Ug value of up to
0.6 W/m2K receives a light
transmittance in the range from
420 to 480 nm of up to 87 %
(see Þ Fig. 2). This corresponds almost to the light
transmittance of an untreated
soda-lime glass of 4 mm thickness.
For therapeutic purposes too,
the melatonin metabolism
taking place under natural light,
i.e. the circadian rhythm, is of
essential importance. Free radicals are reduced by the body's
own hormones. This results in
natural defences being built up
to prevent cancer, heart disease, arteriosclerosis and strokes,
and backing up therapies of
people already suffering from illness.
Plants in living areas and conservatories also benefit from
the circadian light transmittance. Their leaves are stronger
and less prone to pest attack.
(see Þ Section 3.22).
| 121
4
Relative spectral sensitivity
Fig. 1: Spectral sensitivity for the three cone types (receptors)
Cones/receptors = light-sensitive cells in the retina of the eye
4.2.3 Heat Mirror™
be used as the outer panes. A
combination with solar control
glass is also possible. The PET
film can be recycled to help our
environment. Heat Mirror™ is,
with its outstanding technical
values plus low installation
thicknesses, an ideal renovation glass. The UNIGLAS® partner Sofraver SA has more than
10 years of experience in the
production of Heat Mirror™
and supplies this special product without any restriction of
the warranty.
A special form of ‘triple insulating glass’ is the ‘Heat Mirror™’.
Instead of the central pane, a
PET film is inserted and
stretched in a special process.
The advantage is that with a
weight approximating to that of
2-pane insulating glass, Ug values as for triple insulating glass
can be obtained with outstanding light transmittance values.
Thanks to the elasticity of the
PET film, the sound insulation
value also increases by 1 to
2 dB. All safety glass types can
1,2
1,0
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
Wavelength [nm]
4
Heat Mirror™ schematic representation
S cone (short wavelengths) receptor for the blue range
M cone (medium wavelengths) receptor for the green range
L cone (long wavelength) receptor for the red range
Heat Mirror™ PET film
Light transmittance [%]
Fig. 2: Comparison of light transmittance in the important wavelength range of
460 nm between a typical triple insulating glass as currently used in Germany
and the new UNIGLAS® | VITAL Wellnessglass.
gas filling
95
90
85
80
70
4.2.4 UNIGLAS® | SOLAR Photovoltaic glass
Glass for free generation of energy through the sun
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 460 480 500 520 540 560
Wavelength [nm]
UNIGLAS® | TOP 0.7
UNIGLAS® | VITAL Avantgarde 0.7
122 |
Low-e glass
This glass is laminated glass
(see Þ Section 2.7), in which
normal photovoltaic cells are
embedded between two float
glass panes in a special PVB
film in a fixed and durable way.
This laminated glass can be
installed monolithically or it can
be employed as the thermal
insulation glass UNIGLAS® |
SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIK. Here
the glass is configured with
monocrystalline cells, polycrystalline cells or by using thin-layer
technology according to the
customer's specifications.
Semitransparent, coloured cells
or punched-out sections in the
cells can be created, as well as
individual dimensions and forms
within the glass panes. Thanks
to the special properties of the
PVB film, the elements can be
integrated as required into the
exterior of the building.
Overhead applications can be
implemented just as readily as
fall-protection glazing.
| 123
UNIGLAS® | SOLAR: Structure of laminated glass
Front glass
Special interlay
Solar cells/electric connection
Special interlay
Interlay composite
Hence more rentable area is
created in new buildings in
comparison to the traditional
design.
Back glass
Laminate
UNIGLAS® | SOLAR
In combination with other
facade elements, aesthetic and
sophisticated architecture can
be achieved for permanent eco-
nomic use, of course without
dispensing with the advantages
of modern insulating glass.
4.2.5 UNIGLAS® | PANEL Vacuum Insulation
UNIGLAS® | PANEL is a vacuum
panel made using insulating
glass technology for opaque
panels. The outer SSG-H pane
is printed or enamelled on the
inner side and so the colour can
be adjusted to the adjacent
transparent glazing or the colour
can stand out in order to
achieve creative accents. Behind the SSG-H pane, in the
cavity, there is a vacuum insula-
tion panel (VIP) which is covered
by a second SSG or by an aluminium or steel sheet on the
back, facing to the room.
Vacuum insulations achieve
insulation values 10 times higher
than normal insulation materials
of WLG 0.04. So panels can be
incorporated into curtain walls
with a normal insulation glass
thickness and do not intrude
negatively into the useful area.
Vacuum panel
Outdoors: SSG-H
inner surface
painted/enamelled
When curtain walls built using
the cross-wall construction
methods usual in the 1970s are
renewed with regard to energy,
facades can be brought up to
today's energy-saving standards without any compromise.
4.2.6 General notes
UNIGLAS® products for thermal
insulation are ideal for all window and facade applications, in
both new and renovated buildings. An excerpt from the full
range of insulating glass can be
found in the last part of this
book.
In Germany alone, 70 % of all
existing glazing, that is approx.
500 million m2, is outdated from
the point of view of energy. With
both increasing costs and primary energy sources running
short, and in the face of
demands for environmental protection by reducing CO2 emissions, the next few years will see
calls for replacement of this old
glazing as an essential factor of
energy modernisation of buildings. The current commitment
leads to ‘energy saving with
glass’ on all levels.
If only one m2 of ‘old insulating
glass’ is replaced by modern
UNIGLAS® | TOP Premium,
Ug = 1.1 W/m2K, this leads to
savings of approx. 20 l of heating oil and 60 kg less of CO2
emissions per year. So we are
talking about a sum of approx.
10 billion litres of heating oil or
other equivalent primary energy
sources. These arguments are
pretty impressive, and particularly in times of general discussions on energy efficiency they
are persuasive.
On our German language
homepage, you will find a heating cost calculator which will
help you determine the savings
effect achievable by replacing
your old glazing with modern
UNIGLAS® | TOP products:
microporous panel
of silicic acid
protecting fleece
material
high barrier interlay
VIP element
Inside: SSG
or aluminium/
steel sheet
spacer and
edge seal
124 |
| 125
4
Sound Insulation
Sound Insulation
5
5
5.1.1 Weighted sound reduction index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.1.2 Coincidence frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.2 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.3 UNIGLAS® | PHON Sound Reduction Glass . . . 134
5.4 Special Applications with Single-Shell Glass
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
126 |
| 127
Sound Insulation
Sound Insulation
5
Sound Insulation
Noise is not just seriously affecting our quality of life, work and
living conditions, but also causes damage to our health, as has
been proved. In addition to
irreparable hearing damage
caused by permanent noise,
cardiovascular, nervous and
vascular diseases can also
result. One of the most effective
measures for creating more
quiet in the living and working
environment is secondary
sound insulation, meaning
sound insulation of exterior
building elements of offices, flats
and houses.
A disturbing noise spectrum
consists of many frequencies of
different intensity. Some frequency ranges are perceived to
be louder and therefore more
disturbing than others. Every
source of noise has a specific
frequency distribution, even if
the intensity of the noise level in
dB is the same. So it is important for sound insulation to particularly dampen the disturbing
5.1.1 Weighted sound reduction index
frequency ranges. The measures for sound insulation must
therefore always be determined
depending on the source of
noise. The same noise levels
might require different kinds of
window constructions and
sound insulating glass.
In the sound insulation of windows, there are many important
factors. The required sound
insulation of a pane depends on
the intensity of the external
noise, the desired noise level
inside the room, the proportion
of window surface on the external wall and the general insulation properties of the wall. In
practice, sound transmission via
connecting joints and additional
elements at the window, the size
of the panes and the aspect
ratio all affect sound insulation.
The material of the frame and
the interaction of glass and
frame also play an important
role. Glazing and frames in windows should therefore be tested
as a combined element.
Third noise level [dB]
Comparison sound insulation standard/sound protection insulated glass
60
Street noise
L outside = 69 dB (A)
50
40
30
20
10
0
125
250
500
1000 2000 4000
Frequency [Hz]
Standard insulated glass
(4/16/4) RW,P = 30 dB
Indoor level with standard insulated glass
L inside = 43 dB (A)
Sound protection insulated glass (NC 9/12/8)
RW,P = 43 dB
Indoor level with sound
protection insulated glass
L inside = 30 dB (A)
Gain of sound insulation if sound protection insulated glass is used
instead of standard insulated glass
128 |
A healthy human ear can perceive frequencies between 16
and 16,000 Hz and acoustic
pressures, or more precisely
pressure fluctuations, between
10-5 Pa = 0.00001 (hearing
threshold) and 100 Pa (threshold of discomfort). In order to
make these huge differences of
one to ten million manageable,
a logarithm function is used in
practice to determine the
sound pressure levels, to
obtain in this way 120 different
sound pressure levels L with
the unit of measurement being
dB (decibel). In this case 0 dB
is the hearing threshold and
120 dB the threshold of discomfort. This logarithm function does however produce
some curious effects. If the
sound pressure is doubled, the
value increases by only 3 dB.
Multiplication by ten causes an
increase of 10 dB. This would
not be a problem in itself, however the human ear only perceives the changes very indistinctly. Hence a difference of 1
dB is barely perceptible, 3 dB
can be heard and a difference
of 10 dB is perceived as a doubling or halving of the noise
level. The ear is less sensitive to
low frequencies than to high
ones.
To evaluate the sound insulation properties of a component,
a ‘mean’ sound reduction index
is use. This index must be
‘evaluated’ so that the differing
hearing at various frequencies
is taken into account.
The sound pressure levels in
the frequency ranges between
100 and 5000 Hz are relevant
for the construction field. As a
resulting factor of the soundrelated evaluation of glass, the
weighted sound reduction
index RW according to EN
20140, part 3 is applied. This is
calculated by means of a
measurement and comparison
with a reference curve. Here RW
is the average sound insulation
value for the considered frequencies. Furthermore, in
Germany DIN 4109 is relevant
for consideration of sound
which determines the following
figures:
n
RW
index in dB without sound
transmission via adjacent
structural components
n
R’W
index in dB with sound transmission via adjacent structural components
n
R’W,res
resulting sound reduction
index in dB of the entire
structural component (e. g.
entire wall incl. windows
consisting of frames and
glass with connections)
n
RW,P
index in dB - determined on
the test station
n
RW,R
index in dB - calculation
value
n
RW,B
index in dB - values measured on the construction
In order to consider the environment when evaluating the
| 129
5
Sound Insulation
individual frequency spectra,
the spectrum adjustment values C and Ctr were introduced
according to EN ISO 717-1.
n
Sound Insulation
For the extended frequency
ranges of 3150 to 5000 Hz, the
correction factors are named
C100-5000 and Ctr100-5000.
Spectrum adjustment values
Sound source
Sound of normal frequency, such as speaking,
listening to music, radio and TV
Playing children
Rail traffic, of medium and high speed*
Motorway traffic above 80 km/h*
Airplanes with jet propulsion at a low distance
Production facilities that emit noise of medium to high
frequency
Intra-urban street noise
Rail traffic of low speed
Propeller planes
Airplanes with jet propulsion at a greater distance
Disco music
Production facilities with noise emission which is mainly
of low frequency
Spectrum
adjustment value
C
5.1.2 Coincidence frequency
Coincidence frequency
Sound incidence
Spectrum 1
λL
Airborne sound wave
Ctr
ϑ
ϑ
5
Bending wave
Spectrum 2
λB
* In some EU countries there are calculation methods for the fixation of octave
band noise levels for traffic and rail traffic noises. These can be used for comparison with spectra 1 and 2.
When the trace wave of an airborne sound wave runs next to
the bending wave generated by
the latter with the same wavelength, in this case the trace
wave is strengthened. As a
result, a particularly large
amount of sound is radiated
from the other side of the component.
With single-shell components,
the sound insulation values
worsen above a certain frequency. The limit frequency
from which the sound insulation
value drops is called the coincidence or trace adjustment frequency. Its cause is the directed sound impacting the component at a defined angle.
λsp = λL · (sin ϑ)-1
Components with a limit frequency fg < 2000 Hz are referred
to as flexurally rigid. With components of this type, the trace
adjustment effect is not important. Since glass belongs to the
so-called bending-flexible components, the coincidence frequency must be taken into
account when designing the
components. The product from
the limit frequency and the coating thickness is a material con-
stant, the coincidence constant.
With glass this constant fg is d ≈
1200 Hz • cm. In practice, a
directed and glancing sound
incidence can occur, for example in tall buildings of a perimeter
block development on high-traffic roads. In this case, the actual
sound insulation of a component
is slightly lower than ascertained
in the test station. This can be
remedied by the use of windows
with greater insulation.
5.2 Standards
In Germany, the basis for planning sound insulation in buildings is the standard DIN 4109
‘Sound insulation in structural
engineering’. This standard
defines the minimum requirements for sound insulation of
structural components in build130 |
ings depending on their use.
DIN 4109 essentially consists
of ‘requirements and proofs’, of
supplement
1
‘execution
examples and calculation
methods’ and of supplement 2
‘suggestions for improved
sound insulation’.
| 131
Sound Insulation
In case of assembled structural
parts, such as the outer wall of
a building, the sound insulation
is indicated by the so-called
‘resulting sound reduction
index’ R'W,res which includes the
sound reduction indices of the
individual structural components according to their percentage of area.
Table 8 of DIN 4109 determines
the minimum value R'W,res for
the exterior structural element
depending on the use and the
exterior noise level range.
In accordance with the EU
building products directive or
the building regulations list
respectively, there are two
ways of proving suitability of the
sound insulation of windows:
n
Proof by testing (suitability
test I) of the window in
the preferred dimensions
specified in the test standard
in
a
laboratory,
with
RW,R = RW,P - 2 dB (‘dimensional allowance’)
Sound Insulation
etc. By adding the respective
correction values C (see Þ
page 129) the sound insulation
RW,P or RW,R respectively of a
window is determined. This is
an aid for determining the
sound insulation of window and
facade constructions simply
and without a test, on the basis
of design characteristics. To
date these more recent drafts
have however not yet become
relevant for building law. For
that reason, only the table values from the supplement 1 to
the edition of 1989 may be
used for determining the sound
insulation values.
A further possibility for determining the Rw (C, Ctr) of windows up to Rw = 38 dB is
obtained by reading off the
table values B.1 to B.3 from EN
14351-1, provided the sound
insulation dimensions for the
glass are known and the windows meet the conditions
according to B.3.2.
Table 40 shows examples of
designs for turn, tilt and turn/tilt
windows (doors) and window
glazing with weighted sound
insulation dimensions RW,R from
25 dB to 45 dB (calculated values).
The weighted sound reduction
index RW indicates the sound
insulation properties of a structural component as a single
value specification. For this
purpose, the sound insulation
is calculated for the respective
centre frequency of the thirdoctave areas between 100 Hz
and 5000 Hz. The measurement is carried out in the laboratory according to EN ISO
140-3, and this is used to
determine the relevant indices
specified in EN 717-1.
Recent drafts for the table 40
provide design aids for sound
insulation windows of a certain
design depending on construction variants, glazing, sizes,
percentages of area, sash bars
Due to the harmonisation of
European standards, uniform
regulations have also become
necessary for sound insulation.
But this only relates to the test
standards. The required stan-
n
Classification of the construction according to supplement 1, table 40 of DIN
4109 ‘Sound insulation in
structural
engineering’,
Annex 4.2/2 November 1989
132 |
dards still remain a matter for
the individual EU member
states.
Due to this standardisation,
some minor changes have
resulted for the German market. On the one hand, the frequency range in the spectrum
of 50-100 Hz and 3150-5000
Hz is measured. On the other
hand, new parameters are considered for the requirements
regarding sound insulation
which are indicated as an addition to the weighted sound
reduction index: the correction
values C and Ctr. They adjust
the weighted sound reduction
index to certain standard noise
situations by means of correction: the additional C takes into
account an emitted sound level
which is consistent in frequency, while the additional Ctr
implies an emitted sound level
as with typical traffic noise. (see
Þ page 130)
The testing institutes evaluate
the measurements according
to this standard and the results
are stated for example as follows:
n
Weighted sound reduction
index (according to EN ISO
717-1): RW = 40 dB
n
Spectrum adjustment values
(acc. to EN ISO 717-1):
C = - 1 dB Ctr = - 5 dB
That means: a particular sound
protection glass has the weighted sound reduction index RW =
40 dB. In noise situations to
which correction value C
applies, the sound insulation can
be assessed with 39 dB and in
noise situations to which Ctr
applies, the sound insulation is
reduced by 5 dB, i.e. only 35 dB.
It is however important to know
that the C and Ctr values are
important aids for the planner
but have no significance for
German building laws.
| 133
5
Sound Insulation
Sound Insulation
5.3 UNIGLAS® | PHON
Sound Reduction Glass
UNIGLAS® | PHON Sound
Reduction Glass is divided into
three categories for achieving
the desired level of insulation:
n
(SSG) to be used for the thinner
pane for structural reasons.
n
Single panes of different
thickness outside and inside.
This is the simplest way of
transparent sound protection. If the two panes of insulating glass are of different
thicknesses, very good
sound insulation values are
achieved thanks to the different coincidence frequencies
of the glass panes.
By enlarging the cavity, the
sound insulation values are normally increased, although there
are limitations. On the one hand,
the heat transmittance coefficient slightly increases with a
larger cavity and on the other
hand the insulating glass effect
becomes significantly more
intense due to the larger gas
volume enclosed, so that insulating glass with a larger cavity
often requires toughened glass
5.4 Special Applications with Single-Shell
Glass Construction
n
If there are higher requirements placed on the sound
insulation, one or more
panes of the insulating glass
are made of laminated glass
or laminated safety glass.
The laminated glass is made
of float glass panes which
are flexibly connected by
means of a special transparent intermediate layer which
has a vibration-damping
effect.
With UNIGLAS® NC (sound
reduction interlays), intermediate layers are inserted as
required especially only for
noise protection or also in
combination with safety
properties, up to P4A safety
glass. (see Þ Section 7)
These special LSG interlays
are also perfectly suitable for
overhead glazing as they
strongly absorb the pattering
noise of rain.
In addition to its use as insulating glass in the building shell,
sound reduction glass is also
used as a single-shell construction, e.g. as a mono facing
formwork in front of building
facades that are subject to
strong noise exposure. This
construction can also be made
in combination with solar control.
The use of monolithic sound
reduction structures is steadily
increasing in road construction.
Classic sound protection walls
made of concrete, steel or
wood have been in service for
decades, but they create a
restrictive feeling and often they
destroy the appearance of the
landscape.
Noise protection walls made of
glass however leave the view
open and adapt to the environment. Additionally, they can fulfil the requirements of airborne
sound insulation, stability under
wind load and stone impact
resistance depending on the
design.
The
‘Additional
Technical
Provisions
and
Guidelines for the Construction
of Noise Protection Walls on
Roads’ (ZTV-Lsw) of the
Federal Ministry of Transport,
are authoritative for the requirements and hence the designs.
5
Enclosure of roads
UNIGLAS® | PHON: 3 categories of sound reducing insulated glasses
Asymmetric construction of individual panes
with different cavities
134 |
Asymmetric construction with laminated or
laminated safety glass
in one or both insulated
glass shells
Asymmetric construction with laminated
safety glass made of
special sound reduction
interlays in one or both
insulated glass shells
| 135
Solar Control
Solar Control
6
6.2 UNIGLAS® | SUN Solar Control Glass . . . . . . . . . 138
Switchable Insulating Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6.4 Solar Control Systems
within Insulated Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6.4.1 UNIGLAS® | SHADE Venetian Blind System . . . . . . . 140
6.4.2 UNIGLAS® | SHADE Foil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
136 |
| 137
6
Solar Control
Solar Control
6
Solar Control
The permanent trend towards
transparent architecture requires
increasingly large glazing. Large
glass facades in office and
administration buildings have
only become possible by means
of solar control glass. But solar
control glass is also being used
more often for large-area glazing
of terraces or conservatories.
Such glasses reduce unpleasant heating up of the rooms by
means of reflection and absorption of solar energy, thereby
reducing the stress on air conditioning systems in buildings. So
they contribute to energy savings and to the reduction of
environmental pollution.
The energy conservation regulations also consider the solar
energy gains achieved by glass,
using the g-values as a basis.
The higher the g-value is, the
higher the energy gains – and
also the greater the heating up
effect. This is why the energy
conservation regulation requires
calculated verification of ‘thermal insulation during summer’,
which limits the amount of overall energy input. The aim is to
reduce the average maximum
temperatures in buildings without air conditioning to a tolerable extent or to limit the energy
consumption required for air
conditioning. Even modern air
conditioning systems consume
many times more energy to
reduce a temperature than heating systems need to heat up the
rooms. In specific terms, heating
up due to sunlight must not
exceed a maximum value, the
‘maximum solar energy income
Smax’, (see Þ page 101).
According to DIN 4108-2, this
maximum value depends on the
construction method of the
building, the inclination and orientation of the windows and the
climatic region.
For large window surfaces, a
low g-value (see Þ page 98)
that solar control glasses normally have is reasonable. So the
size of the window surface can
be increased in comparison to
normal heat-insulation glazing if
solar control glass is used, without affecting the energy balance
of the building.
6.2 UNIGLAS® | SUN Solar Control Glass
With UNIGLAS® | SUN Solar
Control Glass, a wide range of
solar control glasses is available to building owners and
planners. Depending on the
requirements, it is possible to
freely choose from maximum
138 |
light transmission value and
minimum g-value, and also with
regard to colour.
tecture, the reflective colours of
these glasses can be ‘played
around with’ for design effect.
Therefore many products with
different reflective colours are
offered in addition to the neutral
products. As the name implies,
the reflection has a ‘colour’, not
the transparent view. This
remains largely neutral, even
with glasses that have a strong
reflection in terms of colour.
The only exception are completely pigmented basic glasses which are also used for solar
control purposes. With some
types, they are used as basic
glass for the reflecting solar
control coating. If such glass is
used, prior type-testing is reasonable and convenient.
Structure of solar control glass
Glass pane
Glass pane
Invisible solar
protection layer
Inner sealing
Outer sealing
UNIGLAS® | SUN high-end
solar control glasses have a
balanced ratio of selectivity (see
Þ page 100), which means
achieving a g-value that is as
low as possible and a light
transmittance that is as high as
required. In general, there are
two layer systems that are
designed for solar control ‘hard coatings’ and ‘soft coatings’. Some hard coatings can
also be placed outside on the
weathered side as they can
permanently resist environmental conditions. However, the
inner pane of hard-coated insu-
Spacer element
Desiccating agent
(molecular sieve)
lating glass units must have a
thermal insulation coating to
comply with the energy-saving
requirements. The ‘soft-coat
layers’ are applied to the outer
pane, but facing the cavity, so
that a permanent protection of
the coating is ensured similar to
thermal insulation. These layers
also reflect heat rays. The thermal insulation is thus as a rule
already integrated in the solar
protection layer, and an additional thermal insulation layer
applied to the inner pane is not
necessary.
UNIGLAS® | SUN Solar Control
Glass can be effectively used
for design purposes. In archi-
| 139
6
Solar Control
Solar Control
Switchable Insulating Glass
An interesting alternative available from UNIGLAS® is a special solar control glass of which
the g-value can be varied
according to season and
weather. By means of an electric switching mechanism with
a low-voltage current, the electrochromic outer pane and
hence the performance values
of the insulating glass can be
changed in 5 steps. With a
two-pane insulating glass, the
g-value varies from 50% in
unswitched state to a sensational 15% in switched state,
with a Ug-value of 1.1 W/m2K.
The light transmittance values
are 38% and 12% respectively.
6.4 Solar Control Systems in
Insulating Glass
Another possibility of variable
solar control glasses is the installation of solar control devices
inside the cavity of the insulating
glass with UNIGLAS® | SHADE.
Normal systems, such as external shading devices or internal
curtains or sunblinds, have the
disadvantages of being affected
by pollution and damage due to
storms and/or other mechanical
stresses. Solar protection placed
inside the room is not as effective by far.
Systems in the cavity of insulated glazing have the advantage
that they are permanently protected from mechanical destruction or pollution of any type, and
even the most extreme weather
conditions, such as storms, do
not affect the stability of the system. These integrated systems
are operated manually, electrically via switches, via remote
control, or fully automatically
means ranging from simple sensors to a central ‘bus control’
from a control room.
In addition to pure shading, light
deflection, screening and antiglare measures can be realised.
Requirements of the directive on
workplaces and the regulation
on workstations can thus be met
without any difficulty.
UNIGLAS® differentiates between two systems in the cavity as follows:
6.4.1 UNIGLAS® | SHADE Blind system
The UNIGLAS® | SHADE Blind
system provides an ideal solution for shielding of sunlight and
for targeted control of light and
heat. The heating of rooms is
minimised by the high degree
of reflection.
140 |
Blind system in insulating glass
As aluminium lamellae are
installed in the hermetically
sealed cavity, the system is
weather-resistant and requires
neither maintenance nor cleaning. Shading is also ensured on
gusty days. Long life is guaranteed thanks to protection from
damage by outside influences.
Depending on the required profile, the lamellae can be turned
and twisted, or lifted and lowered, manually or by motor
power. The inclination of the
lamellae
is
continuously
adjustable via the control so
that the light incidence can be
n
The
multi-purpose
glass
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Blind
System combines the functions
shading, anti-glare measures
and daylight deflection in one
element. It makes a major contribution to balanced air conditioning and to provision of daylight for office and private buildings.
Technical Data
Type
Blinds up
Blinds down
- 90° inclination
n
regulated. The light reflection
on the lamellae in opened position can be used for indirect
lighting of the ceiling. This
makes glare-free working with
daylight possible.
Total energy
transmittance
g [%] EN 410
Degree of Light
transmittance
τV [%] EN 410
63
12/3
61
Structure
Two-pane insulating glass
with aluminium lamellae in
the pane cavity. Lowering,
lifting, twisting and turning of
the lamellae possible by
means of different drive systems. Control of several blind
units is also possible.
n
Drive
Ball chain, crank, turning
knob, motor
n
Dimensions
Keep the design alternatives
in mind! For pane sizes of
more than 4 m2, a double
hanging is used. The maximum width with one hanging
is approx. 2,600 mm (with
manual drive approx. 2,200
mm). Maximum production
dimensions on request.
80
3
72
Ug-value
EN 673 with 15 K
Ug [W/m2K]
1.2
1.2
1.2
Maximum production sizes
available on request.
n
Thickness
Outer pane:
Inner pane:
Float 6 mm
Float 6 mm
εn = 0.03
Cavity:
27/32 mm
Total installation thickness:
39/44 mm
Þ The glass thicknesses
must be determined by others depending on the structural requirements.
n
Colours
9 basic colours according to
colour chart.
Of course the blind system can
be combined with all other
functions of UNIGLAS® insulating glasses. It can also be used
laminated or single-pane safety
glass, ornamental, alarm,
| 141
6
Solar Control
sound insulation, fire protection, solar control or thermal
insulation glass.
Diversity of the system
The standard system is motordriven. The lamellae can be
turned and twisted as well as
lifted and lowered.
Systems that are driven manually can be turned and twisted
(operated by turning knob) or
additionally lifted and lowered
(operated by ball chain or
crank).
For the roof area and glazing
slanted more than 12°, the
Solar Control
ROOF variant is available. It is
driven by two 24V DC motors.
The lamellae can be turned and
twisted. The vertical and horizontal tensioning cords ensure
a safe operation of the system
in nearly any installation situation.
The UNIGLAS® | SHADE Blind
System can also be constructed as a three-pane insulation
glass with outstanding physical
properties. Here the blinds are
placed in the outer cavity. This
system allows Ug values of up
to 0.7 W/m2K, the optimum for
modern buildings with large
glass facades.
Drive systems
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Blind System – Model I-10 / Ball chain
Model I-10 Ball chain
n
Drive systems
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Blind System – Model I-06 / Motor
Model I-06 Motor
n
n
n
n
Functions
n Lifting
n Lowering
142 |
n
n
Turning
Twisting
Dimensions
n W app. 400 to 3200 mm
n H app. 300 to 3000 mm
Lamella
n Width: 16 mm
n Thickness: 0.21 mm
Functions
n Lifting
n Lowering
n
n
n
Dimensions
n W app. 400 to 2200 mm
n H app. 300 to 2700 mm
n
Lamella
n Width: 16 mm
n
Ball chain
n Ball chain available in the
colours white, grey, black
and transparent
n Standard length of the
ball chain is approx. 2/3
of the pane's height
n n case of heavy hangings,
the ball chain is fixed by
means of a special holder
n Convenient and easy
handling
n Ball chain holder included
in delivery
Turning
Twisting
Drive systems
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Blind System – Model I-09 / Crank
Model I-09 Crank
n
Motor data
n PG-98 Encoder motor 24
Volt / DC with 4-wire connection cable
n Cable length standard 4 m,
special lengths possible
n Motor and gear drive unit
can be easily changed
n Electric parts
n Transformer 24 Volt / DC
for up to 8 drives at the
same time
n Control relay IV for single,
group and central control
n
Functions
n Lifting
n Lowering
n
n
Dimensions
n W app. 400 to 3200 mm
n H app. 300 to 2700 mm
n
Lamella
n Width: 16 mm
n
Crank
n Crank in standard grey
colour
n Standard length of the
crank is approx. 2/3 of the
pane's height
n Crank can also be provided in detachable design
n Smooth-running operation
n Crank holder included in
delivery
Turning
Twisting
| 143
6
Solar Control
Solar Control
Drive systems
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Blind System – Model I-11 / Turning knob
Model I-11 Turning knob
n
Lamella
n Width: 16 mm
n
Turning knob
n Turning knob in standard
silver-grey colour
n Length of the flexible shaft
can be determined as
required
The system turning knob for
‘turning’ and ‘twisting’ is suitable for offices, meeting and
seminar rooms.
n
Functions
n Turning
n Twisting
n
Dimensions
n W app. 300 to 3200 mm
n H app. 300 to 2700 mm
As a partition or separating
wall, the turning knob system
provides privacy and individually adjustable transparency.
Drive systems
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Blind System – Model I-Roof
Model I-Roof
n
Functions
n Turning
n Twisting
n
Dimensions
n W app. 400 to 1000 mm
n H app. 300 to 2500 mm
n
Lamella
n Width: 16 mm
144 |
n
n
Motor data
n PG-98 Encoder motor 24
Volt / DC with reverse gear
and 2-pole connection
cable
n Cable length standard 4 m,
special lengths possible
n Motor and gear drive unit
can be easily changed
Electric parts
n Transformer 24 Volt / DC
for up to 8 drives at the
same time
n Pulse control relay IV for
single, group and central
control.
ropes prevent contact between
blinds and glass.
By using an additional motor
that is offset diagonally in the
second system box, a continuous ‘turning’ and ‘twisting’ is
possible over the entire surface
of the hanging.
6.4.2 UNIGLAS® | SHADE Foil System
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Foil
System is a new and innovative
roller blind system that is based
on developments and experience in aerospace technology.
For the insulation of satellites, a
high degree of solar control and
thermal insulation is assured by
using specifically coated films.
System is an electrically controllable system that is entirely
integrated into the cavity of an
insulating glass unit. The characteristic, wavelike embossed
and extremely thin aluminiumvaporized polyester film gives
the roller blind unit its unique
and elegant appearance.
Thanks to its versatility, the
System is suitable for universal
use; in office or business buildings with workstations, in conference rooms, in hospitals or
residential buildings and conservatories, both for solar con-
trol, screening and anti-glare
measures and for additional
thermal insulation. The possibilities of roller blind control are
manual, via remote control or
fully automated control by
means of microprocessors or
bus controls.
By winding and unwinding the
roller blind device, which is
operated electrically, the functions of solar control, screening, anti-glare and thermal insulation can be individually
accessed depending on the situation on site. In addition to the
standard power control, there
is alternatively a solar version of
the UNIGLAS® | SHADE Foil
System that allows operation of
the roller blind independently of
the mains current. Here an
accumulator
battery
is
recharged again and again by
means of a solar cell which is
integrated in the insulating
glass.
Mode of operation
The wavelike embossed and
partly transparent film of UNIGLAS® | SHADE Foil System
reflects the impinging solar
radiation and avoids excessive
heating of the rooms behind it.
This results in significantly lower
costs for energy-consuming air
conditioning in the summer
months.
The I-roof system was specially
designed for various applications in the roof area. Vertically
and horizontally installed steel
| 145
6
Solar Control
Solar Control
Thanks to the partly transparent film, it is possible to look outside
During the day, the highly
reflecting, coated solar control
film of the UNIGLAS® | SHADE
Foil System prevents viewing
into the room whilst ensuring
that visibility from inside the
room looking out is maintained.
For absolute screening in any
light conditions, an opaque film
is optionally available which is
also used for dimming. The uniform wavelike embossing and
the light transmission of the
System avoids glare due to
sunlight and creates pleasant
light conditions in the room to
reduce fatigue and allow reflection-free working, especially at
computer workstations.
If the UNIGLAS® | SHADE Foil
System is installed, a significant
reduction of the heat transmittance coefficient is achieved in
comparison to conventional
thermal insulation glazing.
During the cold weather seasons, the heat loss with twopane insulating glass is
reduced by 18% if the roller
blind of the UNIGLAS® | SHADE
Foil System is lowered, which
has a positive impact on the
heating bills. No other solar
control system combines a
highly efficient solar and glare
protection with such a signifi146 |
cant enhancement of thermal
insulation as the compact roller
blind of the UNIGLAS® | SHADE
Foil System does; hence it contributes to notable energy savings.
Thanks to its design advantages, the UNIGLAS® | SHADE
Foil System is in no way detrimental to the design of the
facade.
Design advantages and arguments:
n
n
n
Absolutely
maintenancefree, no maintenance or
cleaning costs are incurred
No annoying wind noises, no
danger of damage in case of
high wind speeds
Does not retract in the event
of wind like exterior blinds
n
Safe from vandalism in publicly accessible buildings
n
No impact on the design of
the facade, as no superstructures are required
n
No ‘striped shadows’ as with
blinds systems
n
Unbeatable look, no comparable product on the market
n
Elegant appearance
n
Neutral appearance if seen
from a distance
n
Thanks to the homogeneous
dimming, there is optimum
anti-glare protection for
workstations while retaining
the possibility to look outside
n
The low g-value saves energy for air conditioning in
summer
n
Variable
required
n
Effective heat insulation in
summer
n
Summer: less use of air conditioning, thus cost savings
n
Energy savings during winter
and at night time: film down
leads to an improvement of
the U-value of the insulating
glass pane by 0.2 - 0.3
W/m2K
n
n
solar
control
if
Anti-glare protection in
accordance with workplace
regulations for workstations
3 variants of film type, from
transparent to dimmed
Application of UNIGLAS® | SHADE
in a residential building
n
The mechanism is covered
by a narrow stripe that
matches the window frame
n
Trouble-free installation in
nearly all window systems,
overall
thickness
from
28 mm
n
Three-pane insulation glass
is today already used with
the UNIGLAS® | SHADE Foil
System as a standard
n
Warm edge can be applied
with three-pane insulation
glass in the 2nd cavity
n
Permanent use in large
objects without important
defects, nearly free from
wear
n
Long-term stress test since
5/2006, as at 6/2009:
200,000 cycles (1 cycle = 1 x
up, 1 x down)
n
Reliable 24 Volt DC technology
n
Can be combined with control systems of known manufacturers
n
Solar version: saves the
entire cabling, especially for
retrofitting
n
Solar variant: accumulator
and control can be installed
in the window casement
n
Solar variant: operation with
remote control or membrane
keyboard
n
Solar variant: functional safety also on the northern side,
e.g. in Hamburg, with a
power reserve of approx. 2
months if used normally.
| 147
6
Solar Control
Solar Control
Producible sizes, recommended size limits [mm]
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Foil System Overall view on the room side
Motor
Switching unit
Microswitch
Motor
Winding shaft
RS
W: 1200 - 1320
H max: 1800
W: 1100 - 1199
H max: 2200
W: 600 - 1099
H max: 2400
W: 400 - 599
H max: 2200
W: 320 - 399
H max: 1500
SS
Solenoid
Deviations from the recommended min./max. width/height ratios possible by
arrangement.
Absolute max. size = 1320 x 2400 mm possible by arrangement. Absolute
min. width = 230 mm, smaller dimensions might be possible by arrangement.
Recommended minimum width with solar cell = 560 mm; with 1/2 solar cell 300
mm possible, restricted loading capacity of the accumulator.
n
Physical data by comparison
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Foil System
Symbol
Heat transmittance coefficient (W/m2K)
Light transmittance for standard illuminants D65 (%)
Light reflectance for standard illuminants D65* (%)
Light reflectance for standard illuminants D65** (%)
Radiation transmittance for global radiation (%)
Radiation reflectance for global radiation* (%)
Radiation reflectance for global radiation** (%)
Secondary heat output inwards for global radiation (%)
Total energy transmittance for global radiation (%)
Reducing coefficient
Transmittance of UV-radiation (%)
General colour rendering index (DIN 6169) (%)
Shading coefficient (= g/0.8)
Ug
τV
pV
pV
le
pe
pe
qi
g
Fc
luv
Ra
sc
Possible dimensions in mm (cavity 20 mm)
Max. width:
Max. height:
148 |
320-399
1500
400-599 600-1099
2200
2400
RS = Reed switch SS = security dowel
In the upper area of approx. 80 mm the mechanism is covered by interlay or
enamelling on the room side and on the outer side.
OD (Optical Density) = 1.1 / 2 / 4
Physical characteristics (terms according to EN 410)
Glass structure
n
Aluminium tube
1100-1199
2200
1200-1320
1800
2-pane heat protection insulated glass
with SHADE Foil System
without
OD 1.1 OD 2
OD 4
4-20-4
4-16-4
Premium
0.9
6.0
79.0
62.0
4.0
66.0
54.0
6.0
10.0
0.16
3.0
82.0
0.11
0,9
0,7
79.0
72.0
0.6
74.0
61.0
7.0
7.0
0.11
0.8
64.0
0.08
0,9
0,0
88.0
81.0
0.1
74.0
67.0
3.0
3.0
0.05
0.0
0.03
1,1
79,7
12.1
12.3
53.4
27.0
27.8
8.2
61.7
32.0
97.0
0.67
3-pane heat protection insulated glass
with SHADE Foil System
without
OD 1.1 OD 2
OD 4
4-20-4-12-4***
4-16-4-16-4
Premium
0,6
6,0
79.0
62.0
4.0
66.0
54.0
6.0
10.0
0.20
3.0
82.0
0.11
0,6
0,7
79.0
72.0
0.6
74.0
61.0
7.0
7.0
0.14
0.8
64.0
0.08
0,6
0,0
88.0
81.0
0.1
74.0
67.0
3.0
3.0
0.06
0.0
0.03
0,6
70,1
15.0
15.3
41.8
32.4
32.4
7.5
49.4
20.0
95.7
0.53
* Radiation from outside
** Radiation from inside *** values accordingly, as there is no test certificate
All calculation values are only for orientation and do not represent a guarantee
for the final product. The specified glass structures do not represent a guarantee
for availability of the product.
| 149
6
Solar Control
Solar Control
Versions
In addition to the use of solar
control glasses as insulating
glass in climate covers, hardcoat layers on LSG or certain
soft-coat layers arranged as a
composite film, e.g. on pergolas, can also be used as singlepane.
In areas of fasciae or parapets,
the originally transparent panes
can be rendered opaque by
means of enamelling or sometimes also varnishing. This procedure permits an adaption in
colour to the adjacent elements
with regard to the reflective
colour. In this way facing tiles
Non-ventilated facade
(system section)
can be used as shells with a
neutral appearance or with
coloured accentuation. They
are installed as an outward
weather protection in front of
the fascia or parapet areas,
which are normally designed
with insulating material, and so
they blend well with the other
adjacent transparent glass surfaces.
Depending on the requirements, they can be designed
as float glass, and in exceptional cases also as ornamental
glass, as single-pane or as laminated safety glass.
Ventilated facade
(system section)
Insulated
glass
Insulated
glass
6
Parapet
glass pane
Parapet
glass pane
Ventilation
150 |
| 151
Safety
Safety
7
7.2 Special Applications for Safety Glass . . . . . . . . 155
7.2.1 Safety and resistance to ball impact . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.2.2 Lift glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.2.3 Accessible glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
7.2.4 Classification of safety glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
7
152 |
| 153
Safety
7.
Safety
Safety
Glazed areas are often the
weak point of a building shell
with regard to attacks of any
kind. High-grade insulating
glass with active and/or pas-
7.2 Special Applications for Safety Glass
sive safety provides protection
against burglary, bullets and
explosion for not only the building but also persons who are
inside.
Applications for safety-relevant
transparency can of course also
be found outside the range of
safety insulating glass. In this
respect, a design depending on
the requirements of laminated
safety glass (LSG), toughened
includes thrown-object-resistant, penetration-resistant, bullet-resistant and explosion-limiting effects (see Þ Section
7.2.4).
7.2.1 Safety and resistance to ball impact
Passive safety means that a
sufficient shatter protection and
protection against injuries is
assured if the pane breaks. For
example for the use of glazing
in schools and nursery schools
or in doors.
Active safety however means
that the glazing withstands
defined attacks for penetration.
The requirements with regard
to active safety are governed
by standards or by requirements
of
the
German
Association of Insurers (VdS)
and they are divided into different classes. The classification
154 |
The version as fall-protection
glazing or use of the glazing in
the overhead area also means
active safety.
This tested safety is part of the
UNIGLAS® | SAFE Safetyglass.
If it is used for insulating glass,
it also provides the functions of
thermal insulation, sound insulation and/or solar control in
addition to the defined safety.
Safety glass such as LSG and
SSG tested to DIN 18032-3 are
proof against thrown balls.
According to DIN 18032-3, the
glass is shot at with the following testing devices:
n
Handball
425 to 475 g,
diameter 185 to 191 mm
n
Hockey puck
156 to 163 g,
diameter 70 to 75 mm
glass (SSG), heat-strengthened
glass (HSG) or a combination of
these respectively is possible. In
addition to the traditional
demands and fall-protection
requirements (see Þ Section 9.6)
the following areas are important:
The test panes are shot at 54
times with the handball and 12
times with the hockey puck
without the pane breaking. The
inspector can decide at which
part of the pane the balls are
thrown. Weak points are deliberately targeted.
7.2.2 Lift glazing
Transparent lift shaft glazing
and lift cars are popular at the
moment. When planning and
building these systems, a number of rules, regulations and
directives must be complied
with. As a general principle,
both the German lift regulations
(AufzV) 6/98 and the European
lift directive 95/16 EC 7/99 are
applicable. Furthermore EN 811 02/99 and EN 81-2 02/99,
‘safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts’, are
applicable. In front of public
areas, lift shaft glazing must
comply in addition with the
appropriated
valid
public
mandatory provisions for fallprotection glazing. In Germany
these are for example TRAV
and in Austria ÖNORM B 3716-3.
Walls of the lift car and of the lift
shaft and doors are subject to
differing requirements:
For the load-bearing capability
verification of the glass shaft,
according to EN 81 an individual load of 300 N must be
taken into account for the
effects on a round or square
area of 5 cm2 size. Outdoors,
the wind load must be included
additionally.
The glazing of the lift car must,
in the case of mounting on all
sides and a maximum ledge
| 155
7
Safety
length of the short side of 1 m,
must be designed at least from
LSG 10 mm + 0.76 mm PVB
film or LSG-V 8 mm + 0.76 mm
PVB film (laminated safety glass
using
heat-strengthened
glass). With a maximum edge
length of 2 m, the minimum
thickness is LSG 12 mm + 0.76
mm PVB film or LSG-V 10 mm
+ 0.76 mm PVB film. If the
lower edge of the glass surface
is below a height of 1.1 m
above the floor of the lift car, a
strong handrail must be fitted,
and not attached to the glass,
in addition at between 0.9 m
and 1.1 m height.
The door glazing must as a
general principle be made of
LSG-V. Here the glass thicknesses are at least as follows:
Safety
n
n
n
2-sided mounting:
720 ≤ b ≤ 360 mm;
h ≤ 2100 mm (clear dimension): 16 mm + 0.76 mm
PVB film
3-sided mounting:
720 ≤ b ≤ 300 mm;
PVB film
all-sided mounting:
870 ≤ b ≤ 300 mm;
PVB film
According to EN 81, the glass
panes must be identified with
the following minimum information:
n
Name of manufacturer/
product name
n
Type of glass (LSG or LSG-V)
n
Thickness of glass e.g. 55.2
7.2.3 Accessible glazing
Tread-on glazing refers to glass
structures that have to be temporarily accessed for cleaning
and maintenance purposes.
The test criteria GS-BAU-18
(February 2001) of the German
federation of statutory accident
insurance institutions for the
industrial sector (HVBG) apply
to this glazing. If the area
underneath the tread-on glazing at the time of the cleaning
or maintenance work cannot
be cordoned off in the public
access area, the approval of
such glazing must be additionally obtained from the supreme
building inspection authority of
the state as part of an approval
on a case-by-case basis.
156 |
Glazing approved for use by
persons or more traverse by
wheeled vehicles as a rule
require approval on a case-bycase basis.
Essential for granting of such
approval is, besides an informal
application, the submission of a
tested structural analysis and
an expert appraisal of the residual load-bearing capacity of the
structure to the supreme building inspection authority of the
state in question (see Þ
Section 9).
Glazing recommendation and structure of the pane
Sealing
Glazing tape
Distance piece
Bedding material
Frame on all sides
≥ 30 mm
Structure of the pane from top to bottom:
Protection pane, protects the supporting glass bond from damage. Minimum
thickness 6 mm, SSG or HSG with/without printing. Supporting glass bond
made of two or three glass panes which are connected to each other by
means of PVB interlays. Hardness of the elastomer bedding material:
60° to 70° Shore A
A special case for accessible
(walk-on) glazing is regulated by
the building inspection authorities
with TRLV 2006. According to
this, LSG of at least three panes
must be used. The upper pane
must consist of SSG or HSG
which is at least 10 mm thick and
which is slip-resistant and in proof
of stability it must not be
assessed as a supporting element. The two lower panes must
be at least 12 mm thick and
made of float glass or HSG; the
maximum length is 1500 mm, the
maximum width 400 mm. The
occurring stresses must not
exceed the values defined in table
2 of TRLV (see Þ Section 9.5).
The glazing subject to regulation
may be neither driven over nor
subjected to high continual
loads. The mounting must be on
all sides with a contact width of
at least 30 mm. The film thickness of the PVB interlay must be
at least 1.52 mm. A shear coupling having a favourable effect
on the load capacity must not be
taken into account. Holes or
edge cutouts are not allowed.
Furthermore the edges must be
protected. The maximum deflection must not exceed 1/200 of
the span width in an undamaged
state.
7
| 157
Safety
Safety
7.2.4 Classification of safety glass
EN 356 distinguishes thrownobject-resistant and burglarresistant glass types.
Thrown-object-resistant glasses are tested with a steel ball of
4.05 to 4.17 kg and a diameter
of 98 to 102 mm.
Depending on the classification
from P1A to P5A, the ball is
dropped several times from different heights onto the same
point of the test pane. The test
is deemed passed when the
dropped object does not break
through the glass.
Resistance class
according to EN 356
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
A
A
A
A
A
Drop height [mm]
(hits)
1.500
3.000
6.000
9.000
9.000
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(9)
Protection against
burglary acc. to VdS
Drop height [mm]
(hits)
EH 01
EH 02
9.500 (3)
12.500 (3)
If there is an increased need for
safety and within the scope of
insurances, burglar-resistant
glazing with the resistance
classes P6 B, P7 B and P8 B or
VdS EH1, EH2 and EH3 respectively is used. The suitability test
is carried out with a 2 kg axe
which is driven by a machine. It
is decisive for the classification
how many times the test pane
has to be hit to obtain an opening of 400 x 400 mm in the
pane.
Resistance class
Hits
according to DIN / VdS (at least)
P6 B / VdS EH1
P7 B / VdS EH2
P8 B / VdS EH3
30
51
71
Bullet-proof glazing additionally
provides increased protection
against burglary.
EN 13541 determines the
requirements and the test procedures of explosion-resistant
n
safety glazing in building. The
classification only applies to a
test body size of approx. 1 m2.
An increased thrown-object
and penetration resistance
exists due to the structure of
the glass.
Classification explosion-resistant
according to EN 13 541
Index
number
of the
class
ER
ER
ER
ER
1
2
3
4
Characteristics of the flat shockwave
Minimum values of the
pos. maximum
pos. specific
pressure of reflected impulse (i+)
shockwave (Pr)
[kPa]
[kPa x ms]
50
100
150
200
≤
≤
≤
≤
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
<
<
<
<
100
150
200
250
370
900
1500
2200
≤
≤
≤
≤
i+
i+
i+
i+
<
<
<
<
900
1500
2200
3200
duration of the pos.
pressure phase (t+)
[ms]
≥
≥
≥
≥
20
20
20
20
Attempt of breaking through with an axe
According to their classification, bullet-proof glazing is fired
at with different weapons and
calibres three times each from
a fixed distance. Additionally
there is a differentiation of
‘shatterproof’ (NS) and ‘non
shatterproof’ (S).
7
n
Classification bullet-resistant EN 1063
Calibre
.22 LR
9 mm x 19
.357 Magn.
0.44 Magn.
5.56 x 45
7.62 x 51
7.62 x 51
Shotgun 12/70*
Shotgun 12/70
Bullet
Type
L/RN
Lead round nose bullet
VMR/Wk
Full metal jacket flat nose bullet with soft core
VMKS/Wk
Full metal jacket coned bullet with soft core
VMF/Wk
Full metal jacket flat nose bullet with soft core
FJ/PB/SCP 1 Full metal jacket pointed bullet with soft core with steel reinforcement
VMS/Wk
Full metal jacket pointed bullet with soft core
VMS/Hk
Full metal jacket pointed bullet with hard core
Brenneke
Brenneke
Dimensions
[g]
Firearms protection class
Shooting distance Speed
Non shatterproof Shatterproof
[m]
[m/s]
2.6
8.0
10.25
15.55
4.0
9.45
9.75
31.0
31.0
BR1-S
BR2-S
BR3-S
BR4-S
BR5-S
BR6-S
BR7-S
SG1-S *
SG2-S
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
0,10
0,10
0,10
0,10
0.10
0,10
0,10
0,50
0,50
BR1-NS
BR2-NS
BR3-NS
BR4-NS
BR5-NS
BR6-NS
BR7-NS
SG1-NS *
SG2-NS
10
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
360
400
430
440
950
830
820
420
420
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
20
* The weapon is fired one time in the test
158 |
| 159
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
8
for Insulating Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.1.1 UNIGLAS® | SHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.2 UNIGLAS Glass Fitting Systems
for Projecting Glass Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
®
8.2.1 UNIGLAS® | OVERHEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.4 GM BRACKET S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
8.5 UNIGLAS® | STYLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.5.1 GM TOPROLL 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.5.2 GM TOPROLL 100 SHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
8.5.3 GM TOPROLL SMART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.5.4 GM TOPROLL 10/14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
8.3 UNIGLAS Glass Fitting Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.5.5 GM ZARGENPROFIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8.3.1 GM PICO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.5.6 GM LIGHTROLL 6/8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
8.3.2 GM PICO KING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.5.7 GM LIGHTROLL 10/12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
8.3.3 GM PICO LORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.5.8 FITTINGS for swing doors and
fully glazed constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
®
8.3.4 GM PUNTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.3.5 GM POINT P 60/22 SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
8.3.6 GM POINT P 80/29 SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.3.7 More glass fitting systems - an overview . . . . . . . . 175
8.5.9 GM RAILING® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
8.5.10 GM RAILING® SOLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
8.5.11 GM RAILING® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
8.6 only|glass® LightCube –
Seating Furniture and Art Object. . . . . . . . . . . . 192
160 |
| 161
8
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
8
UNIGLAS® Systems
8.1 UNIGLAS® Glass Fitting Systems for
Insulating Glass
8.2 UNIGLAS® Glass Fitting Systems for
Projecting Glass Roofs
8.1.1 UNIGLAS® | SHIELD
The fitting system UNIGLAS® |
OVERHEAD with general building
inspection
authority
approval
for
Germany
(UNIGLAS® | OVERHEAD from
Z No. Z-70.3-103) is very
advantageous due to the following points:
UNIGLAS® | SHIELD brings
solutions to the world of pointsupported systems that are
technically and visually attractive:
UNIGLAS® | SHIELD is flexible
and it enables a deformation of
the insulating glass due to differences in air pressure.
UNIGLAS | SHIELD reduces
the heat loss from the inside to
the outside by means of thermal separation. The double
seal in the edge connection
and in the area of the point
support is one of the essential
quality
characteristics
of
UNIGLAS® | SHIELD.
®
The support made of stainless
steel has a clear shape. The
flush-mounted visible part is
available in all anodised
colours.
n Varied glass selection
With UNIGLAS® | SHIELD, the
use of Low-E coated glass is
also possible in addition to hard
coatings.
UNIGLAS® | SHIELD
162 |
UNIGLAS | SHIELD Support
®
8.2.1 UNIGLAS® | OVERHEAD
n
n
Only system with 3 support
diameters
Technical Data
Aspect
Type
Supporting disc
Designation
flush
flexible
Ø 60 mm
UNIGLAS® | SHIELD
45/60
Anodised colour black / natural
Turned parts stainless steel
1.4301, ALU
Plastic material Polyamide 6 natural
Screws
stainless steel
(1.4301)
n
Smallest support diameter of
45 mm
n
Approved for snow loads of
up to 1.5 kN/m2
n
Big dimensions possible,
e. g. up to 1800 x 4080 mm
n
UNIGLAS® | OVERHEAD
Type I
Type II
Type III
Ø 45 mm
Ø 60 mm
Ø 80 mm
Installation view
System section
À
Á
Â
Ã
Distance middle of wall bracket to middle of wall bracket
Inclination projecting roof in degrees β
α = min. 35°
Dimension wall to middle of drilled hole
8
| 163
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
Projecting roof system with two connecting rods type I, type
II and type III
Information on the general
building inspection authority
approval no. Z-70.3-103 (valid
for Germany).
Draft for the bores
Type
I
I
II
II
II
II
III
III
III
III
a
780
780
950
950
1120
1120
1280
1280
1450
1450
x
VT
b
160
160
190
190
220
220
260
260
290
290
1000
1000
1200
1200
1400
1400
1600
1600
1800
1800
1200
900
1200
900
1300
900
1550
1100
1500
1100
y
VB
Glass structure
Snow load
240
180
240
180
260
180
310
220
300
220
1680
1260
1680
1260
1820
1260
2170
1540
2100
1540
LSG 2x8 mm HSG
LSG 2x8 mm HSG
LSG 2x8 mm HSG
LSG 2x8 mm HSG
LSG 2x10 mm HSG
LSG 2x10 mm HSG
LSG 2x10 mm HSG
LSG 2x10 mm HSG
LSG 2x12 mm HSG
LSG 2x12 mm HSG
0.75 kN/m2
1.50 kN/m2
0.75 kN/m2
1.50 kN/m2
0.75 kN/m2
1.50 kN/m2
0.75 kN/m2
1.50 kN/m2
0.75 kN/m2
1.50 kN/m2
Projecting roof system with four connecting rods type I, type
II and type III
x = 20 % of a
Information on the general
y = 20 % of b
À Depth of the projecting roof (VT)
approval no. Z-70.3-103 (valid
for Germany).
Draft for the bores
Á Width of the projecting roof (VB)
Installation view / glass bore
Type I (Ø 45 mm):
y = 20 % of b
x = 20 % of a
Type II (Ø 60 mm):
À Depth of the projecting roof (VT)
Á Width of the projecting roof (VB)
Installation view / glass bore
Type III (Ø 80 mm):
Type I (Ø 45 mm):
Á Inclination β max. 10°
Â α = min. 35°
Important information: the
values are only valid if the entire
All specifications are made in mm.
8
Type II (Ø 60 mm):
authority approval is respected.
Subject to technical alterations!
Type III (Ø 80 mm):
Á Inclination β max. 10°
164 |
Â α = min. 35°
All specifications are made in mm.
| 165
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
Important information: the
values are only valid if the entire
authority approval is respected.
Subject to technical alterations!
Type
y
VB
Glass structure
150
100
170
110
170
110
260
180
240
160
2550
1700
2890
1870
2890
1870
4420
3060
4080
2720
LSG 2x8 mm HSG
LSG 2x8 mm HSG
LSG 2x8 mm HSG
LSG 2x8 mm HSG
LSG 2x10 mm HSG
LSG 2x10 mm HSG
LSG 2x10 mm HSG
LSG 2x10 mm HSG
LSG 2x12 mm HSG
LSG 2x12 mm HSG
I
I
II
II
II
II
III
III
III
III
a
950
950
1120
1120
1280
1280
1280
1280
1450
1450
x
VT
b
190
190
220
220
260
260
260
260
290
290
1200
1200
1400
1400
1600
1600
1600
1600
1800
1800
750
500
850
550
850
550
1300
900
1200
800
Technical construction
Snow load
0.75 kN/m2
1.50 kN/m2
0.75 kN/m2
1.50 kN/m2
0.75 kN/m2
1.50 kN/m2
0.75 kN/m2
1.50 kN/m2
0.75 kN/m2
1.50 kN/m2
Instructions for use
Float glass, mirrors:
x min. 20 mm
y min. 20 mm
Single-pane safety glass:
x min. 2 x glass thickness +10 mm
y min. 5 x glass thickness +10 mm
8.3.1 GM PICO
GM PICO was specially developed for simple and effective
mounting in indoor areas. For
the installation of all panel
materials (thickness 6 - 8 mm
or 10 - 12 mm), any countersunk screws with a diameter of
6 mm can be used. The soft
support disc keeps the element
to be fixed at a distance from
the supporting structure.
Examples for application:
n
Mirrored walls
n
Wall panelling
n
Kitchen rear walls
n
Glazing in sanitary facilities
n
Glazing in furniture construction
166 |
Press GM PICO.
System part
Design
6 - 8 mm
GM PICO Point support
plastic, black
plastic, transparent
plastic, black
plastic, transparent
brass, nickel-plated
brass, gold-plated
10 - 12 mm GM PICO Point support
Cover disc
Screws: countersunk screw, dia. 6 mm with head of dia. 12 mm,
by others.
8.3.2 GM PICO KING
Simple installation
GM PICO for
counterbores 45°
Ø 12 mm.
Glass thickness
Screw in a normal
6 mm countersunk
screw.
Clip in flush cover
disc - finished!
GM PICO KING was specially
developed for simple and effective mounting in indoor areas.
For the installation of all panel
materials (thickness 8 12 mm), any countersunk
screws with a diameter of 6
mm can be used. The height
can be adjusted by slightly
twisting the plastic part. This is
why fast adjustment and
mounting of the panel elements
is a great advantage with this
type of support. Thanks to the
eccentric integrated in the support head, an additional adjustment of ± 1.5 mm is possible.
n
Mirrored walls
n
Wall panelling
n
Kitchen rear walls
n
n
| 167
8
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
Recommended glass types:
but also
n
Preferably single-pane safety
glass SSG
n
Mirrors
n
Float glass
n
SSG enamel glass
n
Wired glass
8.3.3 GM PICO LORD
GM PICO LORD was specially
developed for simple and effective mounting in indoor areas.
For the installation of all panel
materials (thickness 8 - 12
mm), any stair bolts or set
screws with a diameter of 6
mm can be used. Thanks to
the flexibility of the support,
angles or adjustment errors in
the supporting structure can be
compensated. The support is
pre-mounted on the glass and
is directly screwed to the subsurface from the outer surface.
This direct installation substantially reduces the installation
times. If the screws are
screwed in at different depths,
uneven conditions (such as
recesses, bevels, etc.) can be
compensated with only one
type of support.
are possible.
n
Mirrored walls
n
Wall panelling
n
Kitchen rear walls
n
n
Recommended glass types:
n
Preferably single-pane safety
glass SSG
n
SSG enamel glass
but also
n
Mirrors
n
Float glass
n
Wired glass
are possible.
Instructions for use Float glass, mirrors: Single-pane safety glass:
x min. 25 mm
x min. 2 x glass thickness + 10 mm
y min. 25 mm
y min. 5 x glass thickness + 10 mm
Height adjustment at once
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Height adjustment
8
Glass thickness
System part
Design
8 – 12 mm
GM PICO KING
plastic, black
plastic, light grey
brass, gold-plated
Cover disc
Instructions for use Float glass, mirrors:
x min. 25 mm
y min. 25 mm
Screws: countersunk screw, dia. 6 mm with head of dia. 12 mm,
by others.
168 |
| 169
UNIGLAS® Systems
Set screw or stair bolt
UNIGLAS® Systems
Suppleness of the support
Glass thickness
System part
Design
8 - 12 mm
GM PICO LORD
plastic, black
plastic, light grey
brass, gold-plated
Cover disc
Distance set screw: Y1
Distance stair bolt: Y1
34 / 44 / 54 / 64 mm
22 / 40 / 60 mm
Screws, nuts and standard parts
have to be specified depending on
the subsurface respectively.
Countersunk screws Ø 4 mm,
head Ø 8 mm not included in delivery.
x min. 20 mm
y min. 20 mm
8.3.4 GM PUNTO
GM PUNTO 13
GM PUNTO was developed for
simple and effective mounting
in indoor areas. It is suitable for
glass thicknesses between 3
and 6 mm. For the installation
of all panel materials, any countersunk screws can be used.
The soft support protects the
glass bore and keeps the element to be fixed at a distance
from the supporting structure.
n
Sanitary facilities
n
Furniture construction
n
Shopfitting, trade fair construction and construction of
displays
and of course also for
n
Mounting of information and
door plates.
Simple installation
GM PUNTO
Ø 13 mm for bore
Ø 6 mm.
170 |
Simply pre-assemble
the soft support for
protection of the
glass bore by means
of the installation
tools.
Glass thickness Material
Fix the glass with a
clamping disc and a
normal 4 mm countersunk screw.
Clip on the cover
disc and PUNTO is
complete!
3 - 6 mm
Parts
Stainless steel polished Cover disc
ZDG
Clamping disc
Silicone
Soft support
Installation tools
GM PUNTO 25
and 10 mm. For the installation
of all panel materials, any countersunk screws can be used.
The soft support protects the
glass bore and keeps the element to be fixed at a distance
from the supporting structure.
Glazing in the fields of
n
Sanitary facilities
n
n
displays
n
door plates.
| 171
8
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
The spacer can be fixed with countersunk screws or with hexagon
screws.
x min. 20 mm
y min. 20 mm
4 mm
6 mm
8 -10 mm
4 mm
6 mm
8 - 10 mm
Parts
ZDG
Clamping disc
Silicone
Soft support
ZDG
Silicone
ZDG
Clamping disc
Soft support
Support disc
GM PUNTO 36
and 13.5 mm. For the installation of all panel materials, any
countersunk screws can be
used. The soft support protects
the glass bore and keeps the
element to be fixed at a distance from the supporting
structure. Examples for application:
172 |
Glazing in the fields of
x min. 20 mm
y min. 20 mm
Parts
8 mm
Stainless steel polished
10 - 13.5 mm
ZDG
Silicone
8 mm
10 - 13.5 mm
ZDG
Silicone
ZDG
8 mm
10 - 13.5 mm
ZDG
Silicone
ZDG
Cover disc
n
Sanitary facilities
n
8.3.5 GM POINT P 60/22 SP
n
displays
The fitting is based on a pointtype glass support which is
mounted by means of drilled
holes. With the GM POINT system, all metal fitting parts are
made of stainless steel without
exception. All fitting parts that
are in contact with the glass
surface are made of plastic or
rubber of weather-resistant
grade. All screw connections
must be secured in a suitable
way (e.g. Loctite).
n
door plates.
Clamping disc
Soft support
Cover disc
Clamping disc
Soft support
Support disc
Cover disc
Clamping disc
Soft support
Spacer
The design of the fittings and
the mentioned glass thicknesses are only recommendations.
A structural analysis can only
be provided by an authorised
structural engineer. For this
purpose, the structural strength
of the entire point fitting system
in conjunction with the glass
and the supporting structure
should be tested and verified.
| 173
8
UNIGLAS® Systems
System section
UNIGLAS® Systems
Application facade
System section
Application facade
Glass bore
Glass bore
Supporting structure (on site), thickness according to static requirements.
Aspect
Type
Supporting disc
Designation
Glass thickness (X)
Length of the set screw (Y3)
Material
raised
steep
Ø 60 mm
P 60/22 SP I
8 - 13.5 mm
30 - 90 mm
Turned parts
Plastic material
Screws
Supporting structure (on site), thickness according to static requirements.
TRAV + TRPV conforming
P 60/22 SP II
14 - 17.5 mm
P 60/22 SP III
18 - 22 mm
Stainless steel 1.4301
Polyamide 6 black
Stainless steel A2 (1.4301)
8.3.6 GM POINT P 80/29 SP
The fitting is based on a pointtype glass support which is
mounted by means of drilled
holes. With the GM POINT system, all metal fitting parts are
made of stainless steel without
exception. All fitting parts that
are in contact with the glass surface are made of plastic or rubber of weather-resistant grade.
All screw connections must be
secured in a suitable way (e.g.
Loctite).
174 |
Aspect
Type
Supporting disc
Designation
Glass thickness (X)
Length of the set screw (Y3)
Material
raised
steep
Ø 80 mm
P 80/29 SP II
10 - 14 mm
40 - 60 mm
Turned parts:
Plastic material:
Screws:
TRAV + TRPV conforming
P 80/29 SP III
15 - 19.5 mm
P 80/29 SP IV
20 - 22 mm
Stainless steel 1.4301
Polyamide 6 black
Stainless steel A2 (1.4301)
8.3.7 More glass-Fitting Systems - an overview
The design of the fittings and the
mentioned glass thicknesses
are only recommendations. A
structural analysis can only be
provided by an authorised
structural engineer. For this purpose, the structural strength of
the entire point fitting system in
conjunction with the glass and
the supporting structure should
be tested and verified.
Type
steep
hinged
Ø [mm]
GM POINT
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
25
36
36 HUK
36 RR
45
45/5 SP
45/30 ST
50
60/7 SP
60/22 SP
80/9 SP
80/29 SP
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
25
36
36
36
45
45
45
50
60
60
80
80
| 175
8
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
Type
steep
hinged
Ø [mm]
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
45
45
45
60
60
80
80
GM POINTBALL
PB
PB
PB
PB
PB
PB
PB
45/30
45/30
45/40
60/33
60/33
80/44
80/44
HM
S
S
HM
S
HM
S
GM SHIELD
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
27/36
27/36 A
27/36 A 90°
27/45 ST
27/50
45/60
60/80
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
36
36
36
45
50
60
80
n
Attached facades
n
Arcade glazing
n
Stairwell glazing
n
Multi-storey car park glazing
n
Wind and weather protection
n
Back-ventilation
n
Solar control
Installation view
Detailed view
System section top
GM SHIELDBALL
SB 27/45
SB 45/60
SB 60/80
•
•
•
45
60
80
System section middle
8.4 GM BRACKET S
GM BRACKET S was developed specially for easy and efficient mounting of overlapping
glass facades. The mounting
system requires no drilling or
other machining of the glass.
The glass is placed with the
soft mounting insert and with a
special fastening system into
the mounting and clamped
there.
176 |
The
available
structural
strength calculations for the
mounting system permit easier
dimensioning of glass sizes and
thicknesses.
8
System section bottom
| 177
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
Approvals
100 system can be used for
office partitions, between dining room and kitchen, in the
bathroom or also for wall systems.
Type D
Type A
Type B
Type C
8.5 UNIGLAS® | STYLE
8.5.1 GM TOPROLL 100
n System
Sliding door system suspended
from the ceiling for all-glass
sliding elements. The glasses
are held in the upper carriage
by means of adhesion and
additionally by means of a
mechanical securing device.
Thanks to the various creative
combination possibilities of the
system (e.g. attachment from
ceilings, attachment to walls or
adjustment of fixed parts) a
wide range of applications is
possible. The system has an
actual installation height of only
105 mm. As it is possible to
install the rail flush with the ceil-
178 |
ing, the height of the visible fitting is reduced to 55 mm.
n Handles
Shell handles made of stainless
steel in dia. 55 mm or the Ghandle made of stainless steel
(handling is easier in niche version, as the handle is placed
directly at the glass edge) stand
out due to their particularly
understated appearance.
8
n Guide system
The local guide system at the
edge provides a barrier-free
passage. The GM TOPROLL
| 179
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
8.5.2 GM TOPROLL 100 SHIELD
8.5.3 GM TOPROLL SMART
n System
sliding elements. Every sliding
element is mounted on 2 visible
straps made of stainless steel
which also permit height
adjustment. The outwardly visible screw connection is either
made with visible socket
screws made of stainless steel
or with a special visible screwin part made of stainless steel,
as required. Thanks to the various creative combination possibilities of the system (e.g.
attachment from ceilings,
attachment to walls or adjustment of fixed parts) a wide
range of applications is possible.
n System
sliding elements. The system
has a minimum installation
height of only 40 mm. The
glasses are held in the upper
carriage by means of adhesion
and additionally by means of a
mechanical securing device.
The system is designed for a
glass weight of up to 150 kg.
This permits the use even of
extremely large sliding glass
elements.
n Handles
n Guide system
passage. The GM TOPROLL
100 SHIELD system was developed for attractive solutions in
indoor areas, such as in shops,
bars or in the banking sector.
System section
tion with low headroom or for
installation of sliding door glazing flush with the ceiling.
System section
n Handles
n Guide system
passage. Due to the low installation height of the system (40
mm) GM TOPROLL SMART is
particularly suitable for installa-
8
180 |
| 181
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
8.5.4 GM TOPROLL 10/14
n System
Frameless sliding door system
with all-glass sliding elements
suspended from the ceiling.
The sliding glasses run on 2, 3
or 4 rails and can be slid to the
right or to the left. This means a
maximum opening of 50 - 75
%. The installation height is
only 108 mm.
n
Handles
n Guide system
GM TOPROLL 10/14 is a
unique multi-rail sliding system
without a floor guide rail (without a threshold) with catch
function and therefore is an
ideal solution for partition walls.
8.5.5 GM FRAME PROFILE
System section
GM FRAME PROFILE is
designed for conventional fitting systems for all-glass doors.
With a facing width of only 23
mm the GM FRAME PROFILE
is suitable for installation in
bearings provided by others
and made of wood, concrete or
steel.
ty glass in the stock dimension
5200 mm or mitred with a fixed
dimension.
Detail
Made of high-quality aluminium, anodised, available in all
RAL colours or similar to satin
stainless steel, rubber gaskets
available in grey or black. Ideal
for SSG all-glass doors in combination with GGA fittings. For
8 and 10 mm single-pane safeTechnical structure
Glass dimension = frame outer dimension - 22 mm =
Lowest wall clearance (width) = frame mounting width =
mm
mm
8
182 |
| 183
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
8.5.7 GM LIGHTROLL 10/12
8.5.6 GM LIGHTROLL 6/8
n System
Frameless sliding system with
all-glass sliding elements running in a bottom rail. The sliding
glasses run on 2, 3 or 4 rails
and can be slid to the right or to
the left.
This leads to a maximum opening of up to 75 %. The system
GM LIGHTROLL 6/8 is the
classic version of balcony glazing, from the parapet to the
ceiling (max. height approx.
1800 mm).
Profiles made of aluminium,
weather-resistant brush seals,
specially developed weatherresistant end pieces made of
plastic and ball bearing rollers
made of stainless steel are
used.
n Safety
The system can be easily
installed. Safety devices, locking
pins and push cylinder locks
provide additional safety. The
carriage provides perfect protection for the edge of the glass.
System section
n System
Frameless sliding system with
all-glass sliding elements running in a bottom rail. The sliding
glasses run on 2, 3 or 4 rails and
can be slid to the right or to the
left. This leads to a maximum
opening of up to 75 %. The GM
LIGHTROLL 10/12 system is
ideal for ceiling-high glazing of
balconies, loggias and terraces
as well as for thermal buffer
zones (max. height approx.
2500 mm). Profiles made of aluminium, weather-resistant brush
seals, specially developed
weather-resistant end pieces
made of plastic and ball bearing
rollers made of stainless steel
are used.
n Safety
The system can be easily
installed. Locking pins and
push cylinder locks provide
additional safety. The carriage
provides perfect protection for
the edge of the glass.
System section
À bauseits
8
184 |
| 185
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
8.5.8 FITTINGS for swing doors and fully glazed
constructions
No.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Example fully glazed construction
n
Explanation
Screw-on plate with pin
Corner fitting bottom
Corner fitting top
Skylight fitting
Angle fitting with pin
Angle fitting
Centre/corner lock PZ
Counter piece for centre lock
Bar handle made of CNS 500 mm
Bar handle made of CNS 1,000 mm
Floor closer
Maximum weight and width of the leaves
maximum weight of the leaves
maximum width of the leaf
100 kg
1100 mm
Example fully glazed construction with skylight
8.5.9 GM RAILING®
All dimensions in mm.
186 |
The series of all-glass railings
GM RAILING® allows linear
mounting without vertical posts
by means of prefabricated
glass modules in conjunction
with a substructure profile and
a continuous handrail. The
mounting base must be sufficiently stable and aligned with
the glazing system.
The prefabricated glass modules are hooked into the substructure profiles that have to
be mounted on the structure,
and then screwed to one
another using filister-head
screws or special spacers. This
screw connection allows a
compensation of tolerances of
± 2 cm at the height of the rail.
As it is clamped in the supporting rail, no glass bores are
required. Special authorisations
and project-related component
tests are not required.
| 187
8
UNIGLAS® Systems
Advantages
n
Flexible, safe, ingeniously
simple
n
German general building
inspection authority test certificate (abP), TRAV-conforming with type-tested structural
analysis
n
Highest level of safety
through 100 original component tests with an approved
MPA
n
Prefabricated glass modules
as a complete component halving the installation time
n
Ideal glass mounting without
cavities,
continuously
adjustable
UNIGLAS® Systems
n
Glass embedding without
holes, without peak stresses
resulting from the use of local
fixings or wedge bands on
the glass
n
Proven 1000 times over, the
all-glass railing with the most
extensive product range
n
Comprehensive
support
technical
n
Extremely short delivery
times are ensured.
The series GM RAILING® Solo,
GM RAILING® Top, GM
RAILING® Side, GM RAILING®
Massive and GM RAILING®
Level are available in the widths
1000/1200/1500/2000 mm
and in the height 1000 mm
within the shortest delivery time
while stocks last.
With GM RAILING® Solo, the
traditional substructure is not
required if the steel construction created by others has been
prepared accordingly. By using
a mounting block that is inserted into the welded C-rail, bolt-
ed to brackets or attached
directly to the front, design
possibilities for landings or
staircases are practically unlimited. The sleek look of GM
RAILING® Solo offers the ideal
solution for all applications
requiring a low mounting depth.
Of course, this series from the
GM RAILING® family also
meets the accustomed high
safety standards.
Type C
Type O
uous adjustability and the easy
mounting
have
remained
unchanged with this new GM
RAILING® product.
Type L
Approvals
Special Advantages
n
Hook-in profile is mounted
on steel construction made
by others
n
Cost-effective application
with many different solutions
8
8.5.10 GM RAILING® SOLO
The patent-registered all-glass
railing especially for steel construction. The substructure is a
part of the steel construction,
allowing price optimisation and
shortened delivery times to be
achieved. Another advantage
of this product is that the
preparatory work can be done
directly on-site by the proces188 |
sor with the aid of a planning
manual.
The sensationally short installation time, the ideally uniform
and cavity-free mounting of the
glass in the clamping area, the
possibility of directly hooking
the glass into the steel construction as well as the contin| 189
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
8.5.11 GM RAILING® Overview
n
On top
n
On top
n
Integrated
n
Universal
n
Flush
n
inside
adjacent
n
Steel construction conforms
n
Maximum
load
TOP
SIDE
LEVEL
MASSIVE
PLAN
FRONT
SOLO
EPIC
Top
Side
Level-U
Massive-U (Top)
Plan 1
Front AIO
Solo
Epic
Top 16
Side 16
Level-A
Massive-U (Side)
Plan 2
Front AIT
Solo 16
Level-U-30
Massive-A (Top)
Solo L
Level/
concrete-base
Massive-A (Side)
Solo O
n
Glass
railings for
french
window
WINDOWRAIL
Angled
n
Windbreak
wall of
glass
WINDGARDWALL
8
Oval
A-Form
Further Information about
GM RAILING®:
www.gm-railing.com
190 |
L-Form
| 191
UNIGLAS® Systems
UNIGLAS® Systems
8.6 only|glass® LightCube –
Seating Furniture and Art Object
The only|glass® LightCube is a
shimmering source of light, a
glassy seating cube and art
object at the same time. As a
highlight of interior design, the
LightCubes increase the value
of their environment with regard
to design and form a pleasant
centre of attraction. As the
glass cubes are non-combustible, they comply with the
safety requirements especially
when positioned in escape and
emergency routes. In foyers or
entrance halls, the LightCubes
invite the guests to have a seat,
to communicate or just to relax.
Furthermore, the LightCubes
can be provided with personalised text and logos so that
they communicate with the
observers.
The light can be a single colour
or a dynamic interplay of
colours. Also, the speed of the
colour change can be adjusted
by means of a control unit.
n
Foyers
n
Entrance halls
n
Exhibition centres
n
Event locations
n
Airports and stations
n
Museums
n
Theatres
n
Banks
n
Schools
n
Seminar centres
n
and many more
only|glass® LightCube
only|glass® LightCube
only|glass LightCube
®
Awards
Properties
n
Safety glass
n
450 mm edge length
n
Bevelled and polished edges
n
Illuminated with LEDs
n
Change of colours
n
Variable control
n
Individual labelling
n
Loadable up to 150 kg
n
Suitable for escape and
emergency routes
n
Firmly anchored or moveable
192 |
only|glass LightCube
8
| 193
Official Standards, Regulations and Guidelines
9
9.1 DIN Standards
(German national standards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
9.2 Austrian Standards
(Austrian national standards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
9.6 TRAV (short version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.7 TRPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
9.8 Energy Conservation Regulations for
Buildings (EnEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
9.3 EN Standards
(European standards that have been
implemented in D, A, CH, NL, GB ) . . . . . . . . . . 198
9.10 Ü/CE Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
9.4 ISO Standards
(International standards). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
9.11 Quality Testing by
UNIGLAS® GmbH & Co. KG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
9.5 TRLV (short version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
9.12 Application for the Use of Glass Products –
German market only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
9.9 OIB Regulation No. 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
9
194 |
| 195
9.
4242
V 4701, Part 10
Official Standards, Regulations and
Guidelines
Manufacturing,
processing,
testing and handling processes
of glass products are subject to
a number of current regulations. The most important regu-
lations are listed below.
Individual rules are accessible
on the internet if required.
Standards are available from
Beuth-Verlag.
Approved inspection bodies of the EU can be found in the NANDO
List: http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/newapproach/nando/
The most important laws, rules and standards
German Energy Saving Regulation (EnEV) dated 16 November 2001 as well as the Regulation concerning the Modification of the EnEV dated 29 April 2009 (see Þ chapter 9.8)
German Building Products Directive 1988
German Building Products Act 1992
List of Technical Building Regulations
Model Building Regulation (MBO)/Building Regulations of the Federal States (LBO)
List of Technical Building Regulations
Building Regulations List (BRL)
Notifications of the German Institute for Civil Engineering (DIBt)
Austrian Energy Certification Providing Act (EAVG)
OIB – Regulation No. 4 Safety in use and barrier freedom
OIB – Regulation No. 6 Energy saving and thermal insulation
Austrian Building Products Directive 1989
Austrian Building Products Act 1993
Austrian Building Regulation
Austrian Federal Contracts Law 2006 – 17th Federal Law relating to the
award of contracts
Austrian Federal Law Gazette – directory of Austrian standards and inspection bodies
Notifications, rules and regulations of the OIB
Austrian Federal Law Gazette, 16th Federal Act on the Protection from
Dangerous Products (Product Safety Act 2004 - PSG 2004) 4/05
Building Regulations of the Austrian Federal States
Dutch NEN Standards 2916 (utiliteitsbouw) and NEN 5128 (woningbouw) Energie Prestatie Coëfficiënt (EPC)
9.1 DIN Standard
(German National Standards)
1055,
Parts 1 - 5
1055,
Part 7
1055-100
1249,
Part 11
1259,
Parts 1 - 2
4102,
Parts 1 - 7
Parts 13 – 14
4108,
Parts 1 – 10
4109 (+ supplement)
196 |
Actions on structures
Effects on support structures – basics
Flat glass in building
Terminology for glass types, groups and products
Fire behaviour of building materials and building
components
Thermal insulation and energy economy in buildings
Sound insulation in buildings
5034,
Parts 1, 4, 6
6169,
Part 1
V 11 535
18 005
18 032
18 055
18 095
18 361
18 516, Parts 1, 4
18 545, Part 2
V 18 599
32 622
51 130
52 338
52 460
Glass block - walls
Energy efficiency of heating and ventilation systems
in buildings
Daylight in interiors
Colour rendering
Greenhouses
Noise abatement in town planning
Halls and rooms for sports and multi-purpose use
Windows – air permeability of joints, ……
Smoke control doors
German Construction Contract Procedures (VOB) –
Part C; Glazing works
Cladding for external walls, ventilated at rear
Sealing of glazings with sealants
Energy efficiency of buildings
Aquariums made of glass
Testing of floor coverings - Determination of the antislip properties
Methods of testing flat glass for use in buildings Ball drop test
Sealing and glazing
9.2 ÖNORMEN
(Austrian National Standards)
2454-1/-2
A 1610-11
A 2050
A 2060
B 1600
B 1991-1-1 - 4
B 2110
B 2111
B 2118
B 2217
B 2225
B 2227
B 2459
B 2610
B 3710
B 3714-1
B 3716
B
B
B
B
B
B
3716-1/-2/-3/-4/-5
3722
3724
3725
3738
3800-4
Testing of safety of existing lifts
Furniture – Requirements – Shelves and clothes rails
Award of contracts for services
General contract provisions for services
Barrier-free building – planning basics
Eurocode – Effects
General contract provisions for construction services
Conversion of variable prices for construction services
General contract provisions for construction services
Joinery work
Metalwork
Glazing work - Works contract
Glass for lift constructions
Sports halls – squash courts
Flat glass in building, Terms ...
Flat glass in building - Insulated glass - Part 1: Terms
and definitions
Supplementary sheet 1 – Examples for glass application
Glass in building, Structural glass construction
Sealing of glazings with sealants, rebates
Sealing of glazings with sealants, Glazing Systems
Glass in building – Glass edges
Glass in building – Insulated glass requirements
Fire behaviour of building materials and components
| 197
9
B 3806
B 3850
B 5300
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
5301
5305
5312
5315-1 - 2
5328
5330
5371
8115-2/-4
F 2030
ONR 21990
S 1310
Requirements for fire behaviour of building products
Fire barriers
Windows – Requirements – Complementaries to EN
14351-1
Avalanche proof windows and doors
Windows – Inspection and maintenance
Wooden windows – design rules
Wooden windows – design examples
Windows and doors
Doors
Stairways, guard rails and balustrades
Sound insulation and room acoustics in building construction
Signs (signals) for fire protection
Eurocodes – Application in Austria
Shot resistant constructions; Shot categories
9.3 (DIN; OENORM; SN; NF; BS) EN
Standards ((European Standards
Implemented in Germany, Austria,
Switzerland, Netherlands, Great Britain))
The standards listed in the following have been introduced in
the European area including
81
101
356
357
410
572
673
674
675
1036
1051
1063
1096
1279
198 |
Switzerland or by individual
member states of the EU by
building inspection authorities.
Safety rules for the construction and installation of
lifts
Ceramic tiles; Determination of scratch hardness of
surface according to Mohs
Glass in building - Security glazing - Testing and
classification of resistance against manual attack
Glass in building – Fire resistant glazed elements
Glass in building, Determination of luminous and
solar characteristics of glazing
Parts 1 - 9 Glass in building - Basic soda lime silicate glass
products
Glass in building - Determination of thermal transmittance (U value) - Calculation method
Glass in building - Determination of the thermal
transmittance (U value) - Guarded hot plate method
Glass in building – Determination of thermal conductivity coefficient (U-Value) – Heat flow meter method
Glass in building – Mirrors from silver-coated float
glass for internal use
Glass in building – Glass blocks and glass pavers
classification of resistance against bullet attack
Parts 1 - 4 Glass in building - Coated glass
Parts 1 - 6 Glass in building - Insulated glass units
1288
1363
1364
1748
1863
Parts 1 - 2
Parts 1 - 2
10 204
12 150
12 207
12 208
12 337
Parts 1 - 2
12 412
12 600
12 603
12 758
12 898
13 022
13 024
13 123
13 363
13 501
Parts 1 - 2
Parts 1 - 2
Parts 1 - 2
Parts 1 - 2
13 541
14 072
14 178
Parts 1 - 2
14 179
Parts 1 - 2
14 321
Parts 1 - 2
14
14
14
14
351 A1
351-1
428
449
15 254-4
15 434
1522/1523
20 140
EN 1627
Glass in building – Determination of bending strength
of glass
Fire resistance tests
Fire resistance tests on non load-bearing elements
Glass in building - Special basic products
Glass in building - Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass
Metallic products - Types of inspection documents
Glass in building - Thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass
Windows and doors - Air permeability - Classification
Windows and doors - Water tightness - Classification
Glass in building - chemically toughened soda lime
glass
Thermal performance of windows, doors and shutters
Glass in building - Pendulum tests
Glass in building – Determination of bending strength
of glass
Glass in building - Glazing and airborne sound insulation
Glass in building - Determination of the emissivity
Glass in building - Structural sealant glazing
Glass in building - thermally toughened borosilicate
glass
Windows, doors and shutters - Explosion resistance
Solar control devices in combination
Fire classification of construction products and building elements
classification of resistance against explosion pressure
Glass in furniture – Testing methods
Glass in building – Basic alkaline earth silicate glass
products
Glass in building - Heat soaked thermally toughened
soda lime silicate safety glass
Glass in building – Thermally toughened alkaline
earth silicate safety glass
Supplements to EN 14 351 -1
Windows and doors
Shower partitions
Glass in building - Laminated glass and laminated
safety glass
Extended application of test results for fire resistance
Glass in building – product standard for load-transmitting and / or UV-resistant sealants
Windows, doors, shutters and blinds - Bullet resistance
Acoustics - Measurement of sound insulation in
buildings and of building elements
Burglar resistant construction products –
Requirements and classification
| 199
9
EN 1628
EN 1629
EN 1630
ISO 10077 Parts 1 - 2
ISO 11 600
ISO 12 543 Parts 1 - 6
ISO 1288 Parts 1 - 5
ISO 13 788
ISO 14 438
ISO 14 438
ISO 140,
Part 3
ISO 140-5
ISO 717
ISO 7345
ISO 9251
Part 1
Burglar resistant construction products – Test
method for the determination of resistance under
static loading
method for the determination of resistance under
dynamic loading
method for the determination of resistance to manual
burglary attempts
Thermal performance of windows, doors and shuters
Civil engineering – visible joint material
Glass in building - Laminated glass and laminated
safety glass
Glass in building - Bending strength of glass
Hygrothermal performance of building components
and building elements
Glass in building – Determination of energy balance
sheet value
Glass in building - Determination of energy balance
value
Acoustics - Measurement of sound insulation in
buildings and of building elements - Laboratory
measurements of airborne sound insulation of building elements
Acoustics – Measurement of sound insulation in
buildings and of components
Acoustics - Rating of sound insulation …
Thermal insulation – Physical quantities and definitions
Thermal insulation - Heat transfer conditions and
properties of materials
ONR 22 000
ONR 41 010
VdS 2163
VdS 2270
VdS 3029
VDI 2078
VDI 2719
Explanations:
GUV = Gemeinde-Unfall-Versicherung (Community Accident Insurance)
VdS = Verband der Sachversicherer, Schadensverhütung GmbH
(Association of Property Insurers, damage prevention)
VDI = Verein Deutscher Ingenieure (Association of German Engineers)
9.5 Technical Rules for the Use of LinearMounted Glazing – TRLV
German Institute for Civil Engineering (DIBt), August 2006 version (excerpts TRLV must be observed as a whole in conjunction with BRL)
1 Applicability
1.1 The technical rules apply to
glazing which is continuously
linear-mounted on at least two
opposite sides*. Depending on
their inclination relative to the
vertical, they are classified in
n
overhead glazing:
inclination > 10°
n
vertical glazing:
inclination ≤ 10°
9.4 ISO Standards (International Standards)
ISO 9050
Glass in building - Determination of light transmittance, solar direct transmittance, total solar energy
transmittance, ultraviolet transmittance and related
glazing factors
Supplementary rules and standards
ETAG 002
ETAG 003
GUV-SR 2001
GUV-SR 2002
GUV-R1 / 111
GUV-I 56
GUV SI 8027
European Technical Approval Guidelines for
Structural Sealant Glazing Systems
Guideline for European technical approval for internal
partition kits
Guidelines for schools
Guidelines for Kindergarten
Safety rules for pools (swimming pools)
Stairs
Greater safety in case of breakage of glass
Buildings with special fire safety requirements (highrise buildings)
Presentation of art objects in cases
Burglar resistant glazings
Requirements for alarm glasses
Guidelines for burglar alarm systems
Cooling load calculation, determination of the SC
Sound isolation of windows
1.2 Building requirements for
fire, sound and thermal insulation as well as requirements of
other institutions remain unaffected by these technical rules.
1.3 The technical rules do not
apply to:
n
structural sealant glazing,
n
glazing regularly used for
stiffening,
n
curved overhead glazing.
1.4 As for accessible (both walkon and tread-on glazing, the latter intended for example for
cleaning purposes, which do not
correspond to point 3.4 of these
rules, and for fall-protection glazing, additional requirements
must be observed. (see Þ page
156)
1.5 The provisions for overhead
glazing also apply to vertical
glazing provided that they are
not only subject to short-term
variable impacts such as wind
loads. This includes for example shed glazing, where load
caused by snow accumulation
is possible. Stability of the glazing under such impacts must
comply with DIN 1055 and
insulating glass must additionally comply with this standard
under climatic impacts.
* DIN 18516-4:1990-02 applies to claddings for external walls made of singlepane safety glass that are ventilated at rear.
200 |
| 201
9
3.2 Additional regulations for overhead glazing
(excerpt)
5.3 Bending test
3.2.1 For single glazing and for
the lower pane in insulating
glazing, only wired glass or
LSG from SPG or LSG from
Heat Strengthened Glass
(HSG) may be used following
authority approval.
3.2.2 LSG panes of SPG
and/or of HSG with a span
exceeding 1.20 m must be
mounted in linear form on all
sides. The side ratio here must
not exceed 3:1.
3.2.3 With LSG as single glazing or as the lower pane of
insulating glazing, the nominal
thickness of the PVB films must
be at least 0.76. Diverging from
this, a thickness of the PVB film
of 0.38 mm, with linear mounting on all sides and with a span
in the main support direction of
no more than 0.80 m.
3.3.2 The use of (non-heatsoaked)
monolithic
SSG
according to Section 2.1 c) is
only permissible in installation
situations below four meters
installation height, in which persons cannot walk directly
n
n
underneath the glazing. In all
other installation situations,
including outer pans of multiple-pane insulating glazing,
instead of monolithic SSG
according to Section 2.1 c)
(heat-soaked) monolithic SSGH according to Section 2.1 d)
must be used.
Table 2: Permissible tensile bending stresses in N/mm2
Single-pane safety glass made of plate glass
Single-pane safety glass made of ornamental glass
Enamelled single-pane safety glass made of plate glass*
Plate glass
Ornamental glass
Laminated safety glass made of plate glass
Overhead
glazing
50
37
30
12
8
15 (25**)
Table 3: Bending limitations
Support
Overhead glazing
Vertical glazing
Four-sided
1/100 of the pane support
width in main load-bearing
direction
Single glazing:
1/100 of the pane support
width in main load-bearing
direction
Panes of insulated glazing:
1/200 of the free edge
No requirements**
Two- and three-sided
5.3.2 When designing the lower
pane of the overhead glazing
comprising insulating glass
1/100 of the free edge*
1/100 of the free edge**
Vertical
glazing
50
37
30
18
10
22,5
according to section 5.2.2, a
bending test is not required.
5.4 Testing facilitation for vertical glazing
For insulating glass units supported on all sides, the following conditions must be complied with
n
Glass product: plate glass,
Heat Strengthened Glass
(HSG) or single-pane safety
glass (SSG),
n
Surface: ≤ 1.6 m2,
n
Pane thickness: ≤ 4 mm,
n
Difference of the pane thicknesses: ≤ 4 mm,
n
Cavity: ≤ 16 mm,
The tensile bending stresses
must be limited to the values
listed in the table.
Type of glass
unfavourable position exceed
the values according to table 3.
* This limitation must not be complied with provided that it is proven that a penetration area of the glass of 5 mm is not fallen below under load.
** Bending limitations of the insulated glass manufacturer must be complied with.
3.3 Additional regulations for vertical glazing
(excerpt)
3.3.1 Single glazing of SPG,
ornamental glass or tempered
glass must be mounted in linear form on all sides.
5.3.1 Bending of the glass
panes may not in the most
n
Wind load w: ≤ 0.8 kN/m2,
may be used for installation
heights up to 20 m above
ground with normal manufacturing and installation
conditions (application of
calculated values according
to table 1) without any further
verification. If the length of
the shorter edge falls below
a value of 500 mm, the risk
of breakage of panes made
of plate glass increases due
to climatic impacts. (...)
The complete text of the TRLV
is available on the internet free
of charge: http://www.dibt.de/
de/aktuelles_richtlinien.html
* Enamel on the tension side
** Only permissible for the bottom pane of an overhead glazing made of insulated glass in the event of the load case ‘failure of the upper pane’.
202 |
9
| 203
9.6 Technical Rules for the Use of FallProof Glazing – TRAV
German Institute for Civil Engineering, January 2003 (abridged)
1 Applicability
1.1 The technical rules apply to
the mechanically supported
glazing types described below,
provided that they are also
intended to safeguard persons
in public areas from lateral falls,
where the minimum height difference to be protected must
be taken from the building regulations of the respective
Federal State. (...) are regulated. (...)
6 Verification of load-bearing capacity under shock effects
(excerpt)
6.3 Glazing with shock resistance verified by testing
6.3.1 The fall-protection glazing
structures
described
in
Sections 6.3.2 to 6.3.4 require,
thanks to existing test experience, no verification of loadbearing capacity under shock
effects.1
6.3.2 Design conditions for the
application of Table 2 to glazing
mounted in linear form
a) The glass inset must not be
less than 12 mm with allsided mounting of the glazing. With linear mounting on
two sides, the minimum
glass inset is 18 mm.
b) If the glazing is mounted in
the direction of shock using
clamping strips, the latter
must be sufficiently rigid and
made of metal. The clamping
strips must be fastened with
a spacing of maximum
300 m with all-through
metallic screw connection to
the supporting structure. The
characteristic pull-out force
(5% fractile, confidence
coefficient 75 %, path-controlled test with 5 mm/min) of
204 |
the screw connection must
be at least 3 kN. With smaller screw spacing, screw
connections of lower capacity may be used if it has been
verified that the resultant
capacity of the direct glass
mounting does not fall below
a structural substitute load of
10 kN/m.
The verification of sufficient
capacity of the glass link
must be provided with a
general building authority
inspection certificate.
Alternatively, verification can
be performed in testing by a
body approved to do so by
building inspection authorities, as part of a general
building authority inspection
certificate. The characteristic
load-bearing force (5% fractile, confidence coefficient
75%) must be at least 10 kN
(path-controlled test with
5 mm/min).
d) The glazing must be rectangular and flat, and not weakened by holes or recesses.
Permissible
divergences
from the rectangular form are
specified in Annex D.
e) The cavity in insulating glazing must be at least 12 mm
and no more than 20 mm.
f) The glass and film thicknesses stated in Table 2 must not
be exceeded. Instead of
LSG made of plate glass,
LSG
made
of
Heat
Strengthened Glass of the
same thickness may be
used. The individual panes of
LSG must not undergo any
strength-reducing surface
treatment (e.g. enamelling).
According to information from
DIBt, Table 2 may also be used
for triple insulating glass under
the following conditions:
1. The multi-pane insulating
glazing contained in Table 2
of the ’Technical Rules for
the Use of Fall-Proof Glazing
(TRAV), January 2003 version’, where the inner pane
(attack side) is SSG and the
outer pane (fall side) is LSG
(in this case lines 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, 8 and 9), shall be
deemed verified in respect of
shock resistance acc. to
Section 6.3 of TRAV if they
are supplemented by additional panes of SSG inside
the glass structure.
c) The other frame systems
may be regarded as sufficiently load-bearing when
the shock-stressed glass
rebate stop withstands a
structural substitute load of
10 kN/m.
Verification can be performed by calculation if this
is possible on the basis of
technical building regulations
(frame comprises regulated
construction products and
there are dimensioning standards publicised by building
inspection
authorities).
9
| 205
n
Table 2: Glass structures with verified shock resistance
Cat.
Type
1
A
C1
2
3
MIG
On all sides
mono
On all sides
MIG
On all sides
mono
On two sides,
top and bottom
On all sides
On two sides,
top and bottom
and
C2
Linear
mounting
On two sides,
left and right
C3
MIG
On all sides
mono
On all sides
(Note: the statistical verifications under the effects according to
Sections 4.1 and 4.2 shall always be reported additionally!)
Width [mm]
min.
max.
4
5
Height [mm]
min.
max.
6
7
Glass structure [mm]
(from inside* to outside)
8
500
1000
900
1000
1100
2100
900
1000
300
300
500
500
500
500
1200
1000
300
500
500
1000
1300
2000
2000
2100
1500
2500
2500
4000
500
500
1200
2000
1500
2500
2100
3000
500
2000
1300
bel.
1000
500
1000
900
2100
1100
1000
900
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1200
500
500
500
500
2000
1300
2100
2000
2500
1500
4000
2500
4000
4000
2000
1200
2500
1500
3000
2100
3000
1000
1000
1000
8 SSG/ SZR/ 4 SPG/ 0.76 PVB/
5 SPG/ 0.76 PVB/ 5 SPG/ SZR/
6 SPG/ 0.76 PVB/ 6 SPG
10 SPG/ 0.76 PVB/ 10 SPG
10 SPG/ 0.76 PVB/ 10 SPG
500
1000
800
800
500
500
500
500
500
500
2000
bel.
bel.
bel.
800
1000
1000
1500
1300
1500
500
500
500
500
1000
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1000
800
1000
1000
1100
1100
1100
3000
3000
3000
5
6
5
8
6
6
8
6
4
5
SPG/
SPG/
SSG/
SPG/
SPG/
SSG/
SPG/
SSG/
SPG/
SPG/
SPG
SPG
SPG
SPG
SSG
SSG
SPG
SPG
SPG
SSG
4 SPG
6 SSG
5 SPG
0.76 PVB/ 5 SPG
0.76 PVB/ 6 SPG
0.76 PVB/ 5 SSG
1.52 PVB/ 8 SPG
0.76 PVB/ 6 SPG
0.76 PVB/ 6 SSG
1.52 PVB/ 8 SPG
SZR/ 4 SPG/ 0.76 PVB/ 4 SPG
0.76 PVB/ 4 SPG/ SZR/ 12 SSG
0.76 PVB/ 5 SPG
* ‘inside’ means the attack side, ‘outside’ the fall side of the glazing
MIG: Multi-pane Insulation Glazing
SZR: Cavity, at least 12 mm
SPG: Plate glass (float glass)
SSG: Single-pane safety glass of plate glass
PVB: Polyvinyl-butyral interlay
The complete TRAV text can
be downloaded free of charge
from the internet:
http://www.dibt.de/de/
data/eTRAV.pdf
If it is required to use coarsely
breaking glass products as the
middle pane in triple insulating
glass, this is only possible
when the suitability of the structure has been verified.
206 |
4
4
5
5
8
8
6
6
4
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
UNIGLAS® has a general building authority inspection certificate (abP) in which as an alternative to Table 2 the following
structures have been verified in
which even coarsely breaking
glass products may be used as
the middle pane.
| 207
9
n
Glass structure with linear mounting on all sides
Float glass (plate glass)
Polyvinyl butyral film (PVB film)
Cavity
Polyvinyl butyral film (PVB film)
Total glass thickness approx.
n
Impact side
Format 1
Format 2
Height [mm]
min.
max.
300
300
5000
3500
Fall side
max.
1500
1500
Height [mm]
min.
max.
500
Of course all design requirements of TRLV and TRAV must
be complied with just as the
instructions in the inspection
certificate.
5000
500
Point-supported
structures
must be structurally calculated
according to the finite element
method (FE) and the residual
load-bearing capacity must be
tested. Normally, point-supported structures require
approval on a case-by-case
basis.
3500
5000
Table 2: Limit dimensions; Category C2
Width [mm]
min.
9.7 Technical Rules for the Design and
Specification of Point-Fixed Glazing –
TRPV
German Institute for Civil Engineering, final version, August 2006
Table 1: Limit dimensions; Categories A and C3
Width [mm]
min.
n
4.00 mm
0.76 mm
4.00 mm
min. 10.00 mm
4.00 mm
0.76 mm
4.00 mm
ca. 27,1 mm
In order to design point-supported glazing without caseby-case consent or abZ
inspection certificate, there is
TRPV available from Beuth
publishing.
9.8 Energy-Saving Regulations for
Buildings (EnEV)
max.
Summary regarding the requirements for glass, windows and facades
based on the April 2009 version
1100
The table values according to
TRAV or abP do not substitute
for the proof of stability.
Overview
n
The energy conservation
requirements for the annual
primary energy demand and
the thermal insulation of new
buildings and the substantial
changes in the existing buildings are each increased by
approx. 30 %.
n
The maximum values for the
transmission loss HT' and the
primary energy demand QP
are no longer calculated on
the basis of a table depending
on A/V (surface area/volume).
The maximum primary energy
demand is calculated according to a reference building
method, the transmission of
residential buildings is predetermined depending on the
building type and, regarding
non-residential buildings, it is
limited by a building component method.
208 |
Particular structures such as
UNIGLAS® | OVERHEAD have
received building inspection
authority approvals.
n
A new balance sheet method
for residential buildings as
described in DIN V 18599
may be applied alternatively to
the existing methods according to DIN 4108-6 and DIN V
4701-10.
n
Night-current storage heaters
located in particular buildings
are being taken out of service
gradually on a long-term
basis.
n
Strengthening of the enforcement by ‘private verifications’:
Entrepreneurs who commercially perform modifications
according to the EnEV energy-saving regulations must
declare conformity with the
EnEV in writing to the principal
and/or owner.
n
The requirements for thermal
insulation during summer
according to DIN 4108-2 will
not be tightened.
| 209
9
Glass-related building and building component requirements
n
Residential buildings
Building component
Reference building
The reference building (same
geometry, building floor space
and direction like the building to
be constructed) must be calculated, among other things, with
the following technical designs:
Property
Reference design/
value (unit)
Windows / French windows Heat transmittance coefficient
Total solar energy transmittance
of the glazing
Heat transmittance coefficient
Skylights
of the glazing
Light domes
of the glazing
External doors
Solar protection equipment No solar protection equipment
UW = 1.30 W/(m2K)
g⊥ = 0.60
UW = 1.40 W/(m2K)
g⊥ = 0.60
UW = 2.70 W/(m2K)
g⊥ = 0.64
UW = 1.80 W/(m2K)
(As for residential buildings, this has so far been predetermined in the EnEV-2007
by the max. admissible primary energy demand depending on the A/V relation)
n
Non-residential building
Building component
Property
Reference design/value (unit)
Nominal room temperature when heated ≥ 19 °C Nominal room temperature when heated < 19 °C
Curtain wall
U = 1.40 W/(m2K)
(not stated yet)
g⊥ = 0.48
(hitherto 0.65 with 2-fold, 0.48 with 3-fold,
0.35 with solar control glazing (SSV)
0.72
(hitherto 0.78 with 2-fold, 0.72 with 3-fold
and 0.62 with SSV)
U = 2.70 W/(m2K)
(not stated yet)
g⊥ = 0.63
and 0.35 with SSV)
0.76
and 0.62 with SSV)
U = 2.40 W/(m2K)
(not stated yet)
g⊥ = 0.55
(hitherto 0.70)
0.48
(hitherto 0.62)
U = 2.70 W/(m2K)
(not stated yet)
g⊥ = 0.64
(hitherto 0.72)
0.59
(hitherto 0.73)
Total solar energy transmittance of the glazing
Degree of light transmittance of the glazing
Glass roofs
Rows of windows
Light domes
210 |
U = 1.90 W/(m2K)
(not stated yet)
g⊥ = 0.60
(hitherto 0.65 with 2-fold, 0.48 with 3-fold,
0.35 with solar control glazing (SSV)
0.78
and 0.62 with SSV)
U = 2.70 W/(m2K)
(not stated yet)
g⊥ = 0.63
and 0.35 SSV)
0.76
and 0.62 with SSV)
U = 2.40 W/(m2K)
(not stated yet)
g⊥ = 0.55
(hitherto 0.70)
0.48
(hitherto 0.62)
U = 2.70 W/(m2K)
(not stated yet)
g⊥ = 0.64
(hitherto 0.72)
0.59
(hitherto 0.73)
| 211
9
n
Non-residential buildings (continued)
Building component
Property
Reference design/value (unit)
Nominal room temperature when heated ≥ 19 °C Nominal room temperature when heated < 19 °C
Windows / French windows
U = 1.30 W/(m2K)
U = 1.90 W/(m2K)
(not stated yet)
(not stated yet)
g⊥ = 0.60
g⊥ = 0.60
(hitherto 0.65 with 2-fold, 0.48 with 3-fold (hitherto 0.65 with 2-fold, 0.48 with 3-fold
and 0.35 with SSV)
and 0.35 SSV)
0.78
0.78
and 0.62 with SSV)
and 0.62 with SSV)
U = 1.40 W/(m2K)
U = 1.90 W/(m2K)
(not stated yet)
(not stated yet)
g⊥ = 0.60
g⊥ = 0.60
and 0.35 with SSV)
and 0.35 SSV)
0.78
0.78
and 0.62 with SSV)
and 0.62 with SSV)
U = 1.80 W/(m2K)
U = 2.90 W/(m2K)
(not stated yet)
(not stated yet)
protection equipment (SSV) of the building to be constructed must be presumed
thermal protection during summer. If a solar control glazing is used herefor, the
Skylights
External doors
Solar protection equipment
As for the reference building, the actual solar
which may be derived from the requirements for
following parameters must be determined:
- instead of the values of the curtain wall
- Degree of light transmittance 0.58
- Total solar energy transmittance of the glazing 0.35
n
n
Maximum values
As for residential buildings, the
transmittance heat loss relative
to the heat-transmitting exterior
- Total solar energy transmittance of the glazing 0.35
- instead of the values of the windows and skylights
- Degree of light transmittance of the glazing 0.62
surface area may not exceed
the following maximum values:
Building type
Maximum value of the specific
transmittance heat loss
Detached residential building with AN ≤ 350m2
with AN > 350m2
Semi-detached residential building
All other residential buildings
Extensions of residential buildings
according to art. 9 paragraph 5
HT’ = 0.40 W/(m2K)
HT’ = 0.50 W/(m2K)
HT’ = 0.45 W/(m2K)
HT’ = 0.65 W/(m2K)
HT’ = 0.65 W/(m2K)
(This has so far been predetermined in the EnEV-2007 by the max. admissible
transmittance heat loss depending on the A/V relation)
Maximum values
As for non-residential buildings,
the heat transition coefficients
of the heat-transmitting exterior
Building component
Opaque external building components, if not included in building
components of the lines 3 and 4
Transparent external building
components, if not included in
building components of the
lines 3 and 4
Curtain wall
Glass roofs, rows of windows,
Light domes
surface area may not exceed
the following maximum values:
Maximum values of the heat transmittance coefficients,
related to the average value of the respective
building component
Zones with nominal room Zones with nominal room
temperature when heated temperature when heated
≥ 19 °C
from 12 °C to < 19 °C
U = 0.35 W / (m2K)
U = 0.50 W / (m2K)
U = 1.90 W / (m2K)
U = 2.80 W / (m2K)
9
U = 1.90 W / (m2K)
U = 3.10 W / (m2K)
U = 3.00 W / (m2K)
U = 3.10 W / (m2K)
(This has so far been predetermined in the EnEV-2007 by the max. admissible
transmittance heat loss depending on the A/V relation)
212 |
| 213
n
9.9 OIB Guideline No. 6
Alteration of components
The maximum values for firsttime installation, replacement
Building component
External windows,
French windows
Skylights
Glazings
Curtain walls
(complete building
component replaced)
Curtain walls
(glazing or panel replaced)
Glass roofs
External windows,
French doors, skylights
with special glazing
Special glazings
Curtain walls with
Special glazing
and renewal of components
include
Maximum values of the heat transmittance coefficients Umax
Residential buildings /
Zones of non-residential
zones of non-residential
buildings with inside
buildings with inside
temperatures
temperatures
≥ 19 °C
from 12 °C to < 19 °C
1.30 W/(m2K)
(hitherto 1.70 W/(m2K))
1.40 W/(m2K)
1.10 W/(m2K) *
1.40 W/(m2K)
2
1.90 W/(m2K)
1.90 W/(m2K)
no requirement
(no requirem. so far)
1.90 W/(m2K)
1.90 W/(m K)
(not stated yet)
2.00 W/(m2K)
(no stated yet)
2.00 W/(m2K)
no requirement
(not stated yet)
2.70 W/(m2K)
(not stated yet)
2.80 W/(m2K)
1.60 W/(m2K)
2.30 W/(m2K)
no requirement
(no requirem. so far)
3.00 W/(m2K)
* If the glass thickness is limited within the scope of this measure due to technical reasons, the requirements are deemed met provided that a glazing with a
heat transmittance coefficient of max. 1.30 W/(m2K) is installed.
The complete text of EnEV and
related information can be
downloaded free of charge
from the internet:
http://www.enev-online.de/
enev/enev_2009.htm
The Austrian counterpart to the
EnEV is the OIB guideline no. 6.
This regulation regulates:
requirements of the respective
federal states must be
observed.
1. Energy performance of buildings
Limit values for glass and windows according to the OIB
guideline as of 1 January 2010:
2. Minimum energy requirements for
n
new buildings
n
modernisations, conversions and extensions of
existing buildings, applicable to residential and nonresidential buildings. The
latter is sub-divided into 12
categories.
n
The Austrian federal states are
responsible for implementing
the OIB guideline with its building regulations.
The EU Energy Efficiency
Directive is implemented with
the Austrian Energy Certification Providing Act (EAVG).
According to the EU resolution
dated 3 August 2006, the EU
Building Directive should have
been implemented by the
member states by no later than
1 January 2008. The implementation by the federal states
has been performed gradually,
whereas the federal state
Vorarlberg has set the maximum limits for the heating
demand to a lower value compared to the regulation. As a
basic rule, therefore, the
n
Maximum U values: (no differentiation as of 1 January
2010):
n
Windows and facades in
residential buildings, relative to the standard verification value
Uw ≤ 1.40 W/m2K
n
Other buildings
Uw ≤ 1.70 W/m2K
n
Skylights
Uw ≤ 1.70 W/m2K
n
Other transparent building
components in inclines
Uw ≤ 2.00 W/m2K
n
With radiators in front of
the window
Ug ≤ 0.7 W/m2K
Thermal insulation during
summer:
n
Austrian standard B 81003 must be complied with
(no tightening intended)
The complete text of the OIB
guideline as well as the more
stringent provision of the federal state of Vorarlberg are available on the internet free of
charge: http://www.oib.or.at/
RL6_ 250407.pdf
9
214 |
| 215
9.10 Ü and CE Marks
Proof of compliance with the
BPR is done on a different level.
As for glass, two levels are of
importance.
As of 2007, new provisions
apply to the Ü mark for glass
products. The provisions are
summarised as follows:
n
Basic products according
to EN 572-9
Float glass, polished wired glass,
ornamental glass and wired
ornamental glass must be
declared with a declaration of
conformity of the manufacturer
(Ü mark). Within the scope of the
Ü marking, the short designation
‘BRL A part 1 annex 11.5’ must
be stated. In addition, the characteristic value of the tensile
bending strength must be stated.
n
Coated glass according to
EN 1096-4
The short designation ‘BRL A
part 1 annex 11.6’ and the short
designation of the basic products must be stated. In addition,
the characteristic value of the
tensile bending strength must be
stated.
n
Heat-strengthened singlepane safety glass according to EN 12150-2
Short designation ‘SSG according to BRL A part 1 annex 11.7’
In addition, the characteristic
value of the tensile bending
strength must be stated.
n
Heat-soak
single-pane
safety glass
Short designation ‘SSG-H
according to BRL A part 1 annex
11.11’
n
Laminated safety glass with
PVB film according to EN
14449
Short designation ‘Laminated
safety glass with PVB film
216 |
11.8’
n
Laminated glass according
to EN 14449
Short designation ‘Laminated
glass according to BRL A part 1
annex 11.9’
n
Multi-pane insulating glass
according to EN 1279
As for the production of multipane insulating glass, only glass
products according to the
Building Regulations List A part
1 may be used. Short designation ‘Multi-pane insulating glass
11.10’
The marks may still be affixed to
the product or – as usual – to the
accompanying documents and,
as a basic rule for Germany,
must always be attached in
addition to the CE mark.
CE mark
CE means Communautés Européennes
–
European
Communities. This abbreviation
is used to mark, among other
things, building products which
comply with the harmonised
European product standards.
The CE mark is neither an origin
nor a quality mark. It may only be
used if the product complies
with the Building Products
Directive (BPR). This is to ensure
that the product can be placed
on the EU market without any
limitations. The CE mark is the
manufacturer's declaration that
the product complies with the
underlying product standard.
n Level 3:
Manufacturer's declaration after
initial test with internal quality
control - corresponds approximately to the present ÜHP mark.
n
Level 1:
Initial test with internal and external quality control – corresponds
to the present ÜZ mark.
The requirements of the BPR are
set out in the following product
standards:
Product standard
As of
Basic soda lime silicate glass products
(e.g. float glass) EN 572
Multi-pane insulated glass EN 1279
Coated glass EN 1096
Thermally toughened single-pane
safety glass EN 12 150
Heat strengthened soda lime silicate glass EN 1863
Heat soaked thermally toughened soda lime
silicate safety glass EN 14 179
Laminated glass and laminated safety glass
EN 14449
With the introduction of the harmonised European standard
(EN) for glass products, the
corresponding national DIN
standards should be replaced.
Level
01.09.2006
01.09.2006
01.03.2007
3
3
3
01.09.2006
01.09.2006
3
3
01.03.2007
3
01.03.2007
3 or 1
n
a quality management system is required,
n
quality characteristics are
specified and
n
quality tests are stipulated.
In general, the new European
standards for glass have common characteristics:
9.11 Quality Testing by UNIGLAS®
GmbH & Co. KG and Quality Mark
In addition to the Ü/CE marks
which only regulate the marketing of building products and do
not at all relate to quality characteristics, the products of the
UNIGLAS® companies are manufactured according to strict
quality regulations of UNIGLAS®
GmbH & Co. KG that have been
established by technical committees of UNIGLAS®.
Depending on the delivery
region, some UNIGLAS® companies carry the RAL quality
mark or are tested according to
the requirements of KIWA (Dutch
quality mark), TGM (Austrian
quality mark) or CECAL (French
quality mark). The in-house production control without any quality mark is additionally checked
according to the test schedule
by an external quality control
performed by an independent
testing institute on behalf of
UNIGLAS GmbH & Co. KG.
UNIGLAS GmbH & Co. KG
additionally conducts at all companies tests going beyond the
| 217
9
various quality and testing regulations of the test mark institutes.
With external quality controls it is
ensured that each UNIGLAS®
company is checked regularly.
The additional material tests in
the in-house testing laboratory
or at an external institute guarantee the high quality standard of
all UNIGLAS insulating glasses.
Each quality-approved insulating
glass unit must comply with the
system description and requires
quality controls of
Non-regulated building products and designs
Significant levels are:
n
The system test of the manufactured insulating glasses
n
The organisational chart of the
in-house production control
n
Monitoring of the external
quality control by independent
inspectors
n
n
glass
n
spacer
n
sealant
n
desiccant
n
edge seal
n
gas filling
n
tolerances and
n
finished product itself
Requirements and additional quality-determining characteristics regarding insulated glass production
EN 1279
Quality and test provisions
System description
Product description
Initial test
Factory production control
External quality control
Test of pre-products
Type reference list
Compliance of test piece with system
description
Tolerances of gas fillings
Visual requirements for final product
Audits and inspections
Declaration of conformity
Declaration of the performance
characteristics
CE mark
Regulated building products
218 |
n
a general approval by a
(abZ),
n
a general building authority
inspection certificate, or
n
approval on a case-by-case
basis.
The first two possibilities for furnishing proof are as a rule verified by the manufacturer of the
building product - approval on
a case-by-case basis by contrast is obtained by the builder
or architect. The applicationrelated usability of non-regulated building products for a certain construction project is
determined with this case-bycase approval.
An abZ inspection certificate for
a specified period (e.g. 5 years)
from DIBt (German Institute for
Civil Engineering) in Berlin is
granted and an extension must
be re-applied for when it
expires.
A further possibility for verification of usability is a general
building authority inspection
certificate (abP) that can be
issued by a DIBt-accredited
test institute. With the abP, for
example, the residual loadbearing capacity of a defined
glazing can be verified. Unlike
case-by-case approval, the
holder of the abP certificate can
transfer the verification of suitability to other construction
projects. (cf. Section 9.7 with
the verification of usability for
insulating glass from 2 x LSG in
line with TRAV).
Approval on a case-by-case basis
9.12 Usability of Glass Products
So that building products or
designs can be used for erecting, altering and maintaining
building structures, they must
conform to the general requirements of Germany's state
building regulations (LBOs).
They must be permanently fit
for use and must not harbour
As for building products and
designs which deviate from
technical rules or which are not
subject to specific generally
accepted codes of practice,
the building regulations of the
federal states (LBO) stipulate
three possible verifications of
usability:
any hazards. For most building
products, the building rules list
(BRL) A and B regulates verification of their usability: it sets
forth technical rules for the
intended purpose of these
building products which the latter must conform to.
The supreme building inspection authorities of the respective
federal states are responsible for
issuing approvals on a case-bycase basis (see Þ page 221). In
order to obtain this, a formal
application must be made
which clearly describes the
building project and the type of
use for the building product
within the scope of the building
project and, as the case may
be, contains existing test
reports. The building inspection
authority grants its approval for
this use of the building product,
with secondary provisions and
additional conditions if required.
This approval is subject to fees
which may total up to several
thousand Euros, depending on
the effort required for the certificate. In addition, costs for the
expert opinion and, where applicable, for tests, calculations and
building component tests they
entail.
An approval is for example necessary for fall-preventing glazing
of which the structure does not
conform to TRAV and of which
the usability is not verified by an
abP certificate, or the glazing or
| 219
9
the substructure do not conform
to TRAV requirements. Further
examples are accessible, pointsupported or overhead glazing
with a span of over 1.20 m, and
supporting structures from the
field of structural use of glass.
Application for the approval
must contain:
Important addresses:
n
informal letter of application
n
information on the building
project: principal, author of
the draft, contractor, lowerlevel building inspection
authority, supporting structure planner, test engineer,
expert
BADEN-WÜRTTEMBERG
Wirtschaftsministerium
Theodor-Heuss-Strasse 4
70174 Stuttgart
Phone: 0711 / 123-0
It is recommended before submission of the application to
have the project evaluated and
optimised by experienced specialists in glass from the field of
support structure planning
(structural analysts):
n
advice and assessment of the
glass building component
n
evaluation of the hazard and
the hazard potential in case of
breakage of glass
n
determination of the support
concept of the planned glass
structure
n
constructive advice and proposals for improvement if
required
n
elaboration of the required
tests for assessing glass
strength / residual load-bearing capacity / quality control /
other requirements.
Depending on the structure and
type of application, building
component tests relating to
residual load-bearing capacity
may be required. The results of
the expert's assessment are
summarised in a report which is
taken as the basis for the decision of the supreme building
inspection authority. This expert
opinion does not in general
replace the activities of structural analysts and test engineers.
220 |
n
exact description of the glass
building component
n
description of the technical
solution as well as the deviation from the technical rules
or general approvals by a
n
information on the materials
used and their characteristics
n
information on the intended
use
n
general drawings and design
drawings of the glass building
component
n
expert reports / expert opinions from acknowledged test
institutes and authorities.
n
test report for structural calculation.
The current provisions are available on the websites of the
responsible authorities. The
authorities list acknowledged
experts and test institutes.
Supreme building inspection authorities of the federal states
BAVARIA
Bayerisches Staatsministerium des
Innern
Franz-Josef Strauss-Ring 4
80539 München
Phone: 089 / 2192-02
BERLIN
Senatsverwaltung für Bauen, Wohnen
und Verkehr
Dienstgebäude Berlin-Wilmersdorf
Württembergische Str. 6
10707 Berlin
Phone: 030 / 867-0
BRANDENBURG
Ministerium für Stadtentwicklung,
Wohnen und Verkehr
Dortusstrasse 30-33 | 14467 Potsdam
Phone: 0331 / 287-0
BREMEN
Der Senator für Bau und
Stadtentwicklung
Ansgaritorstrasse 2 | 28195 Bremen
Phone: 0421 / 361-0
HAMBURG
Amt für Bauordnung und Hochbau
Stadthausbrücke 8 | 20355 Hamburg
Phone: 040 / 34913-0
HESSE
Hessisches Ministerium für Wirtschaft,
Verkehr und Landesentwicklung
Friedrich-Ebert-Allee 12
65185 Wiesbaden
Phone: 0611 / 353-0
LOWER SAXONY
Niedersächsisches Sozialministerium
Hinrich-Wilhelm-Knopf-Platz 2
30159 Hannover
Phone: 0511 / 120-0
MECKLENBURG-POMMERANIA
Ministerium für Bau,
Landesentwicklung und Umwelt
Schlossstrasse 6-8
19053 Schwerin
Phone: 0385 / 588-0
NORTH RHINE-WESTPHALIA
Ministerium für Bauen und Wohnen
Elisabethstrasse 5-11
40217 Düsseldorf
Phone: 0211 / 3843-0
RHINELAND-PALATINATE
Ministerium der Finanzen
Kaiser-Friedrich-Strasse
55116 Mainz
Phone: 06131 / 16-0
SAARLAND
Ministerium für Umwelt, Energie und
Verkehr
Hardenbergstrasse 8
66119 Saarbrücken
Phone: 0681 / 501-00
SAXONY
Staatsministerium des Innern
Archivstrasse 1 | 01097 Dresden
Phone: 0351 / 564-0
SAXONY-ANHALT
Ministerium für Wohnungswesen,
Städtebau und Verkehr
Turmschanzenstrasse 30
39114 Magdeburg
Phone: 0391 / 567-01
SCHLESWIG-HOLSTEIN
Innenministerium des Landes
Schleswig-Holstein
Düsternbrooker Weg 92 | 24105 Kiel
Phone: 0431 / 988-0
THURINGIA
Ministerium für Wirtschaft und
Infrastruktur
Max-Reger-Strasse 4-6 | 99096 Erfurt
Phone: 0361 / 379-0
| 221
9
Float
Noise protection wall
n n n n n n TRLV, ZTV-Lsw 06
Detailed requirements for the
glass structure and the design
of the glasses are set out in the
respective rules and standards
and are therefore not stated in
All-glass door system
n n n n n n ’Points of sale’ rule of the
Occupational Health and Safety
Executive
(BGR 202), and/or Workplace
Directive (ArbStättV) with ASR 10/5
Cladding for external walls
n n n n n n DIN 18516-4
Application of LSG only with abZ or
ZiE
Sealant glass facade3
n n n n n n ETAG 002 ‘Structural Sealant glazing systems (SSGS)’
n n n n n n
n
detail. If there are additional
requirements, such as for fire
protection reasons or buildingspecific requirements, they
must be observed as well.
Key for the tables below
Colour Explanation
n
n
n
n
Single-pane glass
Multi-pane insulated glass
General approval by a construction supervising body
Approval on individual case basis
HSG
SSG2
Float
Note
Point-supported facade
EG
HSG
SSG2
LSG made of
Float
Application
SSG-H
Vertical glazings without fall protection
SSG1
n
LSG made of
Abbreviations used
SSG
MIG
abZ
ZiE
Float
n
Minimum required type of glass
Recommended type of glass
Alternative type of glass
Inadmissible type of glass
SSG-H
Application
VFF Verband der Fenster- und Fassadenhersteller e.V.,
leaflet V.05.2009-09 (excerpt)
SSG1
Recommendations of use for particular
applications - for the German market only
internal
external
Note
MIG
Window above parapet height n n n n n n
1
Shop/display window
Level glazing3
n n n n n n A minimum glass thickness of 10
mm float glass and/or 12 mm LSG
is recommended due to lack of a
corresponding regulation
n n n n n n According to abZ or ZiE
Important: according to TRPV only
LSG made of SSG or HSG!
n n n n n n
Important! According to TRLV: non
heat-soaked single-pane safety glass
only for an installation height above
public area < 4 m and no persons
standing directly under the glazing,
otherwise SSG-H must be used!
2
Important! LSG made of 2 x SSG
does not have residual load-bearing
capacity. The installation requirements must particularly be observed.
3
Glass used according to sec.
’Glazings in buildings used for special
purposes’ has priority.
n n n n n n e.g. French doors, front doors (for
burglar-resistant glazings see sec.
‘Specific safety glasses’)
9
222 |
| 223
Projecting glass roof
Glass slats
Accessible (walk-on) glass
Accessible (walk-on) glass
SSG2
Float
SSG1
(category A according to TRAV)
n n n n n n Other glasses possible provided
that falling of larger glass parts on
public areas is prevent by suitable
measures (z. B. nets with mesh
width ≤ 40 mm)
n n n n n n Linearly supported according to
TRLV
Point-supported according to TRPV:
only LSG made of SSG or HSG!
Clamps not allowed
n n n n n n Linearly supported according to
TRLV
Point-supported according to TRPV:
only LSG made of SSG or HSG!
Clamps not allowed
n n n n n n TRLV
Top pane of the 3 panes made of
SSG or HSG;
sufficient skid resistance must be
ensured;
deviating design: abZ or ZiE
n n n n n n ZiE generally required,
reduced requirements compared to
accessible (walk-on) glass
MIG
Note
n n n n n n Applies to pane on the attack side;
pane on non-attack side variable;
If LSG on non-attack
side then SSG on attack side;
n n n n n n TRAV
LSG made of float only with abZ or
ZiE
All-glass balustrade
with fitted rail
(category B according to TRAV)
Balustrade with glass bracing n n n n n n TRAV
linearly supported
If not linearly supported on all sides,
LSG must be used.
Free edges must be protected by
the balustrade structure or adjacent
panes from unintended shocks.
(category C1 according to TRAV)
Balustrade with glass bracing n n n n n n TRAV
point-supported
Edge protection is not necessary.
Balustrade with glass bracing n n n n n n According to abZ or ZiE
supported with clamp
Free edges must be protected by
the balustrade structure or adjacent
panes from unintended shocks;
SSG can be used if approved by
abZ.
(not regulated according to TRAV)
Glazing under cross bars
MIG
HSG
n n n n n n TRLV
EG
n n n n n n TRAV
HSG
Application
Float
SSG2
Float
SSG-H
LSG made of
Room-height glazing
Note
EG
top
bottom
Horizontal glazing
Fall protection glazings
LSG made of
n n n n n n Only for flats and rooms of similar
type of use (e.g. hotel and office
rooms) with a light surface (internal
frame dimension) < 1,6 m2, otherwise see horizontal glazing
SSG
Application
Skylights
2
n
Horizontal/Overhead glazings
Float
n
SSG-H
n n n n n n TRAV
LSG must be used.
LSG must be used.
224 |
| 225
9
MIG
Room-height glazing
with superior rail
(category C3, TRAV)
EG
n n n n n n Rail at the required height according
to building requirements.
If LSG on non-attack
side then SSG on attack side;
internal3
external
Lift shaft
French balcony3
n n n n n n Internal facade without fall protection, consultation with the local building control authority and principal
recommended
n n n n n n External facade as fall protection,
TRAV according to category A or C
HSG
SSG2
Float
SSG-H
SSG1
n n n n n n Rule of the Occupational Health and
Safety Executive (BGR 202) and/or
Workplace Directive (ArbStättV) with
ASR 10/5
School
n n n n n n GUV-V S 1; up to a height of 2.00
m safety glass or sufficient screening
Kindergarten
n n n n n n GUV-SR 2002; up to a height of
1.50 m safety glass or sufficient
screening
Hospital/care facility
n n n n n n According to the Ordinance governing Hospital Buildings (KhBauVO)
for particular areas (e.g. in stairwells)
and for special purposes (e.g. children’s ward) BGI/GUV-I 8681
Shopping centre
n n n n n n ‘Points of sale’ rule of the
Executive
(BGR 202)
2
3
Glass used according to sec.
‘Glazings in buildings used for special
purposes’ has priority.
Retail
n n n n n n Workplace Directive (ArbStättV)
’Points of sale’ rule of the
Executive (BGR 202) or sufficient
screening
Car park
annex 1.7 (4);
ASR 8/4 and ASR 10/5
Bus parking
annex 1.7 (4);
ASR 8/4 and ASR 10/5
SSG2
LSG made of
Float
SSG-H
SSG1
Glazings in buildings used for special purposes
Office, walls or doors
made of glass
GUV-I 8713 Administration
HSG
Application
226 |
Note
Entrance halls/foyers
n n n n n n Building component on impactopposite side of the glazing fully
acts as fall protection
Float
n
LSG made of
n n n n n n TRAV and EN 81
1
Application
Float
HSG
SSG2
Note
(category C3, according to TRAV)
Double facade
LSG made of
Float
SSG-H
Application
SSG1
Float
Note
| 227
9
Swimming pool
Gymnasium
Squash hall
n n n n n n Glass parts of the rear wall must be
made of min. 12 mm SSG
2
HSG
SSG2
LSG made of
Float
SSG-H
SSG1
Float
HSG
SSG2
Application
Note
All-glass door
n n n n n n Workplace Directive (ArbStättV) with
ASR 10/5, ‘Points of sale’ rule of
the Occupational Health and Safety
Executive (BGR 202), if required
Door opening
n n n n n n Workplace Directive (ArbStättV) with
ASR 10/5, ‘Points of sale’ rule of
the Occupational Health and Safety
Executive (BGR 202), if required
Door opening in
upper third
n n n n n n
Glass components
n n n n n n Are deemed unbreakable and
breakthrough-resistant
Office separating wall
n n n n n n ASR 8/4
Draft lobbies
n n n n n n ‘Points of sale’ rule of the
Executive
(BGR 202), and/or Workplace
Directive (ArbStättV) with ASR 10/5
n n n n n n DIN 18032-1; up to a height of 2 m
planar, closed and shatterproof;
safety against ball throwing according to DIN 18032-3
Accessible glass/glass stairs
Shower wall
228 |
HSG
SSG2
LSG made of
Float
SSG-H
Application
SSG1
Glazings for interior works without fall protection
Float
n
Note
n n n n n n GUV-R 1/111, DIN 18361;
up to a height of 2 m safety glass or
sufficient screening
In case of sports pool additionally
safety against ball throwing (water
polo) according to DIN 18032-3
1
LSG made of
Float
SSG-H
SSG1
Application
Float
Note
n n n n n n ZiE required
TRLV, list of technical building regulations; admissible tensions according to horizontal glazings pursuant
to TRLV;
LSG with PVB interlays of the minimum nominal thickness = 1.5 mm
n n n n n n EN 14428/A1
1
2
9
| 229
n
Structural glass construction
LSG made of
LSG made of
Shot resistance
Note
n n n n n n EN 356 and/or EH VdS regulation
n n n n n n EN 1063, EN 1522
2
Blast resistance
HSG
Special glass structures
SSG2
Float
All-glass structures
Application
SSG
n n n n n n EN 356
VdS regulation 2163
Note
Float
Fling resistance
HSG
Glass sword, supporting glass n n n n n n ZiE required
SSG
n n n n n n EN 1627
SSG
Application
Burglar resistance
Break resistance
Float
SSG-H
Special safety glasses
Float
n
SSG-H
n n n n n n EN 13541, EN 13123
9
230 |
| 231
10
10.1 Glass Edges in Accordance with DIN 1249,
Part 11 and EN 12150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
10.2 Tolerances for Standardised Requirements . . . 236
10.3 General Requirements for Storage
and Transport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
10.4 Rebates and Blocks for Insulated Glass. . . . . . 258
10.5 Glazing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
10.6 Special Glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
10.7 Rosenheim Table ‘Stress categories
for glazing of windows’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
10.8 Materials Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
10.10 Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
10.11 Special Structural Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
10.12 Notes on Product Liability and Warranty . . . . . 297
glass in buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
10.12.2 Regulation for Handling of
Multi-Pane Insulated Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
10.12.3 Guideline for Use of
Triple-Pane Insulated Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
of glass systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
10.12.5 Recommendations for integrating systems
into insulating glass units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
of thermally toughened glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
enamelled and screen-printed glass . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
laminated glass and laminated safety glass . . . . . . 346
10.12.9 Guaranteed characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
10.12.10 Glass breakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
10.12.11 Surface damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
10.12.12 Special glass combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
10.12.13 Maintenance | Pane Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
10
232 |
| 233
10. Industry-Specific Regulations and
Guidelines for Machining and
Processing
Beyond the statutory requirements and/or in addition to
such requirements, many insulating glass manufacturers and
glass refining companies in different combinations, in each
10.1.2 Edge finishing
Designation
Definition
Cut edge (KG)
The cut edge (cut edge) is an unprocessed glass edge
that is produced when flat glass is cut. The margins of
the cut edge are sharp-edged. The edge has slight
wave lines (so-called Wallner lines) which are running
transversely to its margins. Generally, the cut edge has
a clean break but there may also be irregular breakages caused at contact points of cutting tools which is
the case with thick glass panes and non-straight format glass panes. Other processing characteristics may
result, for example, from breaking the glass by means
of tongs. Projecting unevennesses may be levelled
(ground). A laminated safety glass comprising of glass
panes with cut edges normally has an edge mismatch
complying with the cutting tolerance. (see Þ page 254)
Arrissed edge (KGS)
The cut edges are trimmed. The glass edge can be
smooth ground in full or in part.
Ground edge (KMG)
The glass pane edge is trimmed over the entire glass
thickness to the final measurement by means of a
grinding wheel. Blank spots and shells are admissible.
case backed by the skills of
specialised companies, groups
and specialists in differing
fields, agreed upon further declarations concerning glass.
10.1 Glass Edges in Accordance with
DIN 1249, Part 11 and EN 12150
10.1.1 Edge types
n Straight edge (K)
The straight edge forms an
angle of 90° to the glass surface.
n Mitre edge (GK)
Due to design reasons, the
mitre edge forms an angle of
90° > d ≥ 45° to the glass surface. The edges can either be
smooth ground or polished.
made between flat and steep
facets. For manufacturing reasons, the faceted edge runs
towards a residual edge (chamfer) positioned vertically to the
glass surface. The residual
edge can be cut, smoothground or polished and has
either a straight, half-round or
flat-round shape.
n
n Facet edge (FK)
With most of the edge surface,
the facet edge forms an angle
deviating from 90° to the glass
surface. Depending on the
facet width, a distinction is
Round edge (RK)
The round edge has a more or
less round finish of the edge
surface. The edge types ‘halfround’ or ‘flat-round’ are at the
manufacturer's discretion or
subject to agreement.
Smooth ground edge (KGN) The edge surface is smooth ground by means of a fine
grinding wheel getting a frosted (satined) surface finish.
Blank spots and shells are not admissible.
Polished edge (KPO)
The polished edge is a smooth ground edge refined by
polishing. Frosted spots are not admissible. Visible and
noticeable polishing marks and scorings are admissible.
Due to manufacturing reasons, the edges of a glass
pane can be processed by different or several machines. This may result in a different appearance of
smooth ground and polished edges. This is not a reason for complaint.
10
234 |
| 235
10.2 Tolerances for Standardised
Requirements
Preface
This chapter regulates the tolerances for basic glass, processing and the resulting
refined products such as SSG,
SSG-H,
heat-strengthened
glass, laminated safety glass,
laminated safety glass made of
SSG/heat-strengthened glass
and insulating glass units.
The principles constitute the
currently applicable national
standards and/or EN standards. However, these standards are not always enough in
practise. This chapter therefore
describes the applications that
have either not been described
or are not described clearly.
n Special tolerances
Special tolerances can be
realised during production with
additional precautionary measures and must be agreed upon
on a case-by-case basis. The
additional expenses required
for these precautionary measures are given with the respective tolerances and can be
realised against extra costs
provided they have been stated
in the order.
Important information:
Changes to the tolerances will
be noted and included immediately. The currently valid version
is available on the Internet:
n Standard tolerances
Standard tolerances are tolerances that can be ensured
during the normal course of
production.
EN 572 Part 1
EN 572 Part 2
EN 572 Part 3
EN 572 Part 4
EN 572 Part 5
EN 572 Part 6
236 |
The deviation limits of the nominal thicknesses of various
glass products can be taken
from
the
aforementioned
standards. Furthermore, requirements for quality as well
as optical and visible flaws of
the basic glass products are
set out in these standards.
n
Tab. 1: Deviation limit of
glass thicknesses
Nominal thickness Deviation limit
[mm]
[mm]
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
15
19
An excerpt of the EN standard
572 Part 2 Float glass lists the
deviation limits of the nominal
thicknesses as follows.
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.5
1.0
Standard and special tolerances are not distinguished
between when considering the
deviation limits.
10.2.2 Cutting
Additionally valid: EN 572
General length deviations
± 0.2 mm/m edge length
10.2.2.1 General
The so-called angular break
must be considered! A break
such as this depends on the
respective glass thickness and
the quality of the basic glass
(brittleness etc.).
10.2.1 Basic glasses
The following standard principles and standards set out in
the Building Regulations List
apply to basic glasses:
Basic soda lime silicate glass products - Part 1:
Definitions and general physical and mechanical properties (partial substitution for DIN 1249 Part 10)
Glass in building
Basic soda lime silicate glass products - Part 2: Float
glass (substitution for DIN 1249 Part 3)
Part 3: Polished wire glass
Basic soda lime silicate glass products - Part 4: Drawn
flat glass (substitution for DIN 1249 Part 1)
Part 5 - Ornamental glass (together with EN 572 Part 6,
supplement for DIN 1249 Part 4)
Basic soda lime silicate glass products, Part 6 - Wired
ornamental glass (together with EN 572 Part 5, supplement for DIN 1249 Part 4)
Fig. 1: Upper break
Nominal dimension
Fig. 2: Lower break
Nominal dimension
n
Tab. 2: Diagonal break
values
Glass thickness
[mm]
2, 3, 4, 5, 6
8, 10
12
15
19
Maximum value
[mm]
±1
±2
±3
+5/-3
+6/-3
This must be considered when
giving information on tolerances i.e. glass dimensions
may change with an arrised
edge by twice the value of the
angular break.
As for non-rectangular elements, the following tolerances
can apply to the given angles
(similar to cutback). The geometry of the elements remains
the same.
10
| 237
10.2.2.1.1 Possible break-off of float glass
n
Tab. 2a: Cutback
Angle
As a standard: Direction of the
structure is parallel to the
height dimension. Exceptions
are only admissible if the direction of structure is stated on the
drawing and the information
‘DIRECTION OF STRUCTURE
acc. to drawing’ is given when
placing the order and on the
production sheet.
X
- 30 mm
- 18 mm
- 12 mm
- 8 mm
Angle
≤ 12.5°
≤ 20°
≤ 35°
≤ 45°
10.2.2.3 Direction of structure of ornamental glasses
Fig. 3: Cutback
X
10.2.2.1.2 Acute angle of SSG, laminated safety glass,
IGU – cutback – zone not to be assessed
Due to manufacturing reasons,
UNIGLAS® companies reserve
the right to perform a cutback
according to Table 2b. If such a
cutback is not performed, the
measurements listed in Table
2b are considered as zones not
to be assessed. In this case,
unevenness at the edges (e.g.
upper breaks) and on the surface may occur and is not a
reason for complaint.
n
n
Angle
X
≤ 12.5°
≤ 20°
1
- 65 mm
- 33 mm
If the angle is > 25°, the cutback equals the break-off.
The sides of the given rectangle
must be parallel to each other
and the rectangles must have a
common centre (see fig. 4).
These rectangles also describe
the limits of perpendicularity.
The deviation limits for the
nominal dimensions of length H
and width W are ± 5 mm.
5
Parameter
Designation/Unit
Aspect flaw;
maximum number of
flaws. Test criteria
according to EN 572
Part 5: Viewing
distance 1.5 m.
Vertical view to a
glass pane positioned
3 m in front of a mattgrey surface.
Centre line flaws
(inclusions)
Ball-shaped bubbles
6
7
Dimensions/
Weight
Oblong bubbles
Fine seeds (bubbles
smaller than 1 mm)
Flaw mark
Available thicknesses
10
11
Thickness deviation
Specific weight
12
13
Deviation width/length
Perpendicularity
14
15
Surface
Surface quality
Surface waviness
H+5
16
General distortion
(panelling)
17
19
Pattern distortion
crosswise (width)
Pattern distortion
lengthwise (length)
Deformation
20
Bending
B+5
B-5
Fig. 4: Angularity
H-5
238 |
3
8
9
10.2.2.2 Length, width and perpendicularity
Based on the nominal dimensions of the length H and the
width W, the glass pane must
fit into a rectangle that has
been enlarged in size by the
upper deviation limit where the
nominal dimensions are taken
as the basis. The glass pane
must circumscribe a rectangle
that has been reduced in size
by the lower deviation limit
where the nominal dimensions
are taken as the basis.
2
4
The tolerances set out in Point
2.4.3.1.4., Table 10, may not
be added to the tolerances
mentioned above in Tables 2a
and 2b.
The same also applies to ornamental glasses, e.g. sandblasted or printed glasses.
Tab. 3: MASTERGLASS
No.
Tab. 2b: Cutback
If the direction of structure in
the glazing is to be continued
over several units, then this
requirement must be referred to
specifically in the order.
18
Visible inclusions are not
admissible
Ø up to 2 mm admissible
without limitations
Ø > 2 mm are not
admissible
width > 2 mm not
admissible
length > 10 mm not
admissible
max. 10 per cm3
3.0 / 4.0 / 5.0 / 6.0 / 8.0 /
10 mm
± 0.5 mm
Weight calculation [kg]:
2.5 • surface [m2] • glass
thickness [mm]
Delivery dimensions ± 3
mm
Difference of the diagonals 4 mm
Structured one-/two-sided
Maximum 0.8 mm (measured with feeler gauge on
ideal plate)
Maximum 3 mm per m
total width (measured standing)
Maximal 4 mm within one
metre
metre
Maximum 10 % of the
nominal thickness
Maximum 2 mm
| 239
10
n
1
2
3
4
5
Parameter
Designation/Unit
Aspect flaw;
maximum number of
according to EN 572
Part 5: Viewing
distance 1.5 m.
Vertical view to a
Centre line flaws
(inclusions)
Ball-shaped bubbles
6
7
8
9
Dimensions/
Weight
10
11
14
15
Oblong bubbles
Fine seeds (bubbles
smaller than 1 mm)
Flaw mark
Thickness deviation
Specific weight
12
13
Perpendicularity
Surface
Surface quality
Surface waviness
16
General distortion
(panelling)
17
19
Pattern distortion
crosswise (width)
Pattern distortion
lengthwise (length)
Deformation
20
Bending
18
n
n
Tab. 4: Raw plate glass (SR)
No.
1
2
3
4
240 |
Parameter
Designation/Unit
Aspect flaw;
maximum number of
according to EN 572
Part 5: Viewing
distance 1.5 m.
Vertical view to a
Centre line flaws
(inclusions)
Ball-shaped bubbles
Oblong bubbles
Tab. 5: Ornamental glass (continued)
No.
admissible
without limitations
Ø > 2 mm are not
admissible
width > 2 mm not
admissible
length > 15 mm not
admissible
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
3.0 / 4.0 / 5.0 / 6.0 / 8.0 /
10 mm
± 0.5 mm
thickness [mm]
Delivery dimensions ± 3 mm
Difference of the diagonals
4 mm
ideal plate)
Maximum 3 mm per m
total width (measured
standing)
metre
metre
Maximum 10 % of the
nominal thickness
Maximum 2 mm
14
15
Dimensions/
Weight
Fine seeds (bubbles
smaller than 1 mm)
Flaw mark
Thickness deviation
Specific weight
Perpendicularity
Surface
Surface quality
Surface waviness
General distortion
(panelling)
17
19
Pattern distortion
crosswise (width)
Pattern distortion
lengthwise (length)
Deformation
20
Bending
18
n
Designation/Unit
16
length > 25 mm not
admissible
max. 10 per cm3
3.0 / 4.0 / 5.0 / 6.0 mm
± 0.5 mm
thickness [mm]
4 mm
ideal plate)
Maximum 3 mm per m
standing)
metre
metre
Maximum 10 % of the
nominal thickness
Maximum 2 mm
Tab. 6: Wire and wire plate glass
No.
1
2
3
4
5
admissible
without limitations
Ø > 5 mm are not
admissible
width > 2 mm not
admissible
Parameter
6
7
max. 10 per cm3
Tab. 5: Ornamental Glass
No.
6
7
8
Parameter
Designation/Unit
Aspect flaw;
maximum number of
according to EN 572
Part 5: Viewing
distance 1.5 m.
Vertical view to a
Centre line flaws
(inclusions)
Ball-shaped bubbles
Oblong bubbles
Fine seeds (bubbles
smaller than 1 mm)
Flaw mark
admissible
without limitations
Ø > 5 mm are not
admissible
width > 2 mm not
admissible
length > 25 mm not
admissible
not applicable
10
| 241
Tab. 6: Wire and wire plate glass (continued)
No.
9
10
11
Parameter
Designation/Unit
Dimensions/
Weight
Thickness deviation
Specific weight
12
13
14
15
Perpendicularity
Surface
16
17
Surface quality
Surface waviness
General distortion
(panelling)
19
Pattern distortion
crosswise (width)
Pattern distortion
lengthwise (length)
Deformation
20
Bending
18
7.0 / 9.0 mm
± 0.5 mm
thickness [mm]
4 mm
ideal plate)
Maximum 3 mm per m
standing)
metre
metre
Maximum 10 % of the
nominal thickness
Maximum 2 mm
The tolerance with angular
break given in the ‘cutting’
chapter applies to bordered
n
edges. The following table
applies to smooth ground / polished edges.
Tab. 7: Rectangle - standard deviations
d ≤ 12 mm [mm]
Edge length [mm]
≤ 1000
≤ 2000
≤ 3000
≤ 4000
≤ 5000
≤ 6000
+
+
+
+
± 1.5
± 2.0
2.0 / - 2.5
2.0 / - 3.0
2.0 / - 4.0
2.0 / - 5.0
Fig. 5: Edge processing
d = 15 + 19 mm [mm]
± 2.0
± 2.5
± 3.0
+ 3.0 / - 4.0
+ 3.0 / - 5.0
+ 3.0 / - 5.0
The deviation of the diagonal
results from (b² + h²)
1.5 Ö 45°
± 1 mm / ± 5°
Example:
glass pane b x h
= 1000 x 3000 mm
it follows:
plus dimension: (1.5² + 2.0²)
= +2.5 mm;
minus dimension: - (1.5² + 2.5²)
= -2.9 mm
it follows that:
diagonal deviation +2.5 / -3.0 mm
1.5 Ö 45°
n
10.2.3 Processing
The tolerances depend on the
respective type of edge pro-
cessing. Additionally valid:
EN 12150
Glass in building - Thermally toughened single-pane
safety glass
DIN 1249 T 11
Glass in building - Glass edges
BRL SSG-H, EN 14179 Heat-soaked single-pane safety glass
EN 1863
Glass in building - Heat strengthened glass
10.2.3.1 Edge processing qualities
The basis for edge processing
is DIN 1249, Part 11 Chap. 3.4
complete in Chap. 3.1.
Due to manufacturing reasons,
the manufacturer can deliver
the smooth ground edges as
polished versions (see Page Þ
235).
10.2.3.1.1 Standard tolerances
As for edge processing, it is
distinguished between bordered, ground, smooth ground
and polished. Therefore, there
are two tolerance categories:
242 |
10.2.3.1.2 Special tolerances
These tolerances are available
according to the following limits
subject to extra processing,
which is required because the
n
first glass pane must be measured exactly.
Unground glass panes must be
re-cut.
Tab. 8: Rectangular - special deviations
Edge length [mm]
d ≤ 12 mm [mm]
≤ 1000
≤ 2000
≤ 3000
≤ 4000
≤ 5000
≤ 6000
+
+
+
+
+
+
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
-
1.5
1.5
1,5
2.0
2.5
3.0
d = 15 + 19 mm [mm]
+
+
+
+
+
+
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
-
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
10.2.3.1.3 Special shapes
n
bordered (KGS)
n
ground (KMG)
n
smooth ground (KGN)
n
polished (KPO)
In this case, it is also distinguished between standard and
special versions. It must be
noted that special processing
of these special shapes is performed at the CNC processing
centre.
10
| 243
The following table applies to 15 and 19 mm glasses:
n
10.2.3.2.3.2 Standard deviation for CNC processing –
cut-out dimensions
Tab. 9: Special forms
Edge length d ≤ 12 mm
Standard [mm]
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
Important
Special (CNC) [mm]
± 2.0
± 3.0
± 4.0
± 5.0
- 8.0 / + 5.0
- 10.0 / + 5.0
-
≤ 3900
≤ 5000
≤ 6000
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
4.0
5.0
/
/
/
/
/
/
+
+
+
+
+
+
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
10.2.3.1.4 Edge processing
n
n
Minimum dimension
with internal radiuses:15 mm
Tab. 12: Edge cut-out deviation CNC processing centre,
arrissed
Cut-out length [mm]
Deviation [mm]
≤ 2000
≤ 3400
≤ 6000
±4
±4
±5
10.2.3.2.4 Edge cut-off, bordered
Tab. 10:
10.2.3.2.4.1 Standard
Angle
X
≤ 12.5°
≤ 20°
≤ 35°
≤ 45°
Deviation ± 2 mm
- 15 mm
- 9 mm
- 6 mm
- 4 mm
10.2.3.2 Processings
Processings can be corner cutouts, surface cut-outs and
edge cut-outs in a glass pane.
Positions and dimensions of
the processings must be
agreed upon individually and in
consideration of production.
As for corner and edge cutouts, the minimum radius of the
processing tool must be considered. The hole position
and/or position tolerances of
the processings equal the edge
processing tolerances.
(Edge cut-off < 100 x 100 mm,
otherwise special shape)
10.2.3.2.4.2 Special deviation
Special deviation ± 1.5 mm
Production performed in CNC
processing centre, i.e. CNC
processing (Master Edge) must
be calculated.
10.2.3.2.5 Edge cut-off, polished – CNC processing centre
10.2.3.2.5.1 Standard
Deviation ± 2 mm
(Edge cut-off < 100 x 100 mm,
otherwise special shape)
Fig. 6: Special shape
10.2.3.2.1 Corner cut-off, bordered < 100 x 100 mm
± 1,5 mm
10.2.3.2.1.1 Standard
10.2.3.2.6 Corner cut-out, bordered
Deviation ± 4 mm
10.2.3.2.6.1 Standard
10.2.3.2.2 Edge cut-out, bordered
Depending on the glass thickness, minimum distance with
internal radiuses:
10.2.3.2.2.1 Standard
Deviation ± 4 mm to position/deviations
10.2.3.2.3 Edge cut-out, bordered
10.2.3.2.3.1 Standard deviation for manual processing –
cut-out dimensions
n
Tab. 11: Edge cut-out deviation HB, arrissed
Cut-out length [mm]
≤ 500
≤1000
244 |
≤ 10 mm: R 10
≤ 12 mm: R 15
Deviation of size ± 2 mm,
Deviation of position ± 3 mm.
Deviation [mm]
Minimum dimension with internal radiuses: 17.5 mm
Deviation 1.5 mm
Special processing is performed in the CNC processing
centre.
10.2.3.2.7 Corner cut-out, polished – CNC processing centre
±5
±6
Important
Minimum dimension with
internal radiuses: 17.5 mm
10
| 245
10.2.3.2.7.1 Standard
Fig. 8: Position of adjacent holes
Fig. 9: Position of hole relative to
corner
Deviation ± 2 mm
2d
b
Deviation ± 1,5 mm
10.2.3.2.8 Edge cut-out, smooth ground or polished – CNC
processing centre
10.2.3.2.8.1 Standard deviation
Important
n
internal radiuses: 17.5 mm
Tab. 13: Edge cut-out deviation CNC processing centre,
smooth ground or polished
Cut-out length [mm]
The distance between holes should
not be smaller than 2 x t
c ≥ 6t
The distance from the edge of a hole
to the glass edge may not be smaller
than 6 x t
Note: if one of the distances
from the edge of a hole to the
glass edge is less than 35 mm,
then it could be necessary to
set the drill holes asymmetrically from the glass edge. Please
enquire separately about this
with the manufacturer.
Deviation [mm]
≤ 500
≤ 1000
≤ 2000
≤ 3400
±
±
±
±
2
3
3
4
n
internal radiuses: 17.5 mm, deviation ± 1.5 mm
10.2.3.3 Drilled holes
The hole position and/or position tolerances of the process-
ings equal the edge processing
tolerances.
10.2.3.3.1 Diameters of drilled holes
The diameters of drilled holes Ø
should not be smaller than the
glass thickness. Please enquire
separately from the manufacturer regarding small diameters
of drilled holes.
10.2.3.3.2 Limitation and position of the drilled hole
Fig. 7: Position of hole relative to
edge
a
The position of the drilled hole
(edge of the hole) relative to the
glass edge, glass corner and
next hole depends on:
n
glass thickness (t)
n
diameter of the drill hole (Ø)
n
form of the glass pane
n
number of drill holes
a ≥ 2t
The distance to the edge of the hole
should not be smaller than 2 x t
Tab. 14: Drill hole deviations
Nominal diameter d [mm]
4 < d < 20
20 < d < 100
100 < d
10.2.3.2.8.2 special deviation
Important
2d
c
b ≥ 2t
Deviation [mm]
± 1.0
± 2.0
Enquire with manufacturer
10.2.3.3.3 Deviations in drill hole positions
Deviations in the position of
individual drill holes equal those
of width (W) and length (H) from
this table.
The position of the holes is
measured in perpendicular
coordinates (X & Y-axis) from
the reference point to the centre of the hole. The reference
point is generally an existing
n
corner or an assumed fixed
point.
The position of the holes (X, Y)
is (x ± t, y ± t), where x & y are
the required distances and t is
the deviation.
Note: please enquire separately with the manufacturer for
tighter tolerances.
Tab. 15:
Nominal dimensions of side Deviation t [mm]
W or H [mm]
Nominal thickness, t ≤ 12
≤ 2000 ± 2.5 (horizontal manufacturing processes)
± 3.0 (vertical manufacturing processes)
2000 < B or H ≤ 3000
± 3.0
> 3000
± 4.0
Nominal thickness,
t > 12
± 3.0
± 4.0
± 5.0
10
246 |
| 247
Fig. 10: Hole position
10.2.3.3.5 Drilled sinkhole diameters
Diameter:
≤ 30 mm ± 1 mm,
> 30 mm ± 2 mm.
x
Fig. 12: Drilled hole
90° ± 2°
y
y
X = (sinkhole Ø - core Ø) / 2
min. glass thickness = X + 2 mm
x
x
10.2.3.3.4 Drilled hole positions
Fig. 11: Drilled hole positions
> 4500
± 4 mm
≤ 4500
± 3 mm
≤ 1000
± 1 mm
≤ 3000
± 2 mm
≤ 1000
± 1 mm
Fig. 13: Drilled sinkhole in LSG
90°
external
X
X
Drilled sinkholes in laminated
safety glass
The cylindrical drilled hole of
the opposite glass pane must
have a 4 mm larger diameter
compared to the core diameter
of the drilled sinkhole.
2 mm
min. 2 mm
y
x
> 1000
± 2 mm
+ 1.5 mm
- 1.0 mm
y
Ø
X
core Ø
2 mm
10.2.4 SSG – single-pane (toughened) safety glass, SSG-H,
heat-soaked SSG and heat-strengthened glass
Single-pane safety glass, additionally valid: EN 12150-1/-2 for
SSG. EN 14179 for heatsoaked SSG and General
Building
Inspection
Test
Certificate of the manufacturer
for SSG-H as well as the
Building Regulation list or EN
1863 for heat-strengthened
glass.
10.2.4.1 General distortion – valid for float glass units
Standard 0.3 % of the measured length.
(To be measured at the edges
and diagonal, where none of
the measured values may
exceed 0.3 % of the measured
length.)
With square formats with side
ratios between 1:1 and 1:1.3
and with glass thicknesses ≤ 6
mm, the deviation from the
straightness is larger compared
to narrow rectangular formats
due to the toughening process.
10.2.4.2 Local distortion – valid for float glass units
Standard 0.3 mm over 300 mm
of the measured length. The
measurement must be per-
formed with a min. distance of
25 mm to the edge.
10
248 |
| 249
10.2.4.2.1 Recommended minimum glass thicknesses
depending on the external glass pane dimension
n
Tab. 18: Minimum glass thicknesses
Min. glass thickness d
4
5
6
8
10
19 ≥ d ≥ 12
Max. external glass pane dimension
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Manufacturing glass thicknesses: Due to the thermal toughening process, we recommend
the following size-dependent
1000
1500
2100
2500
2800
3000
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
x
x
x
x
x
x
2000
3000
3500
4500
5000
7000
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
minimum glass thicknesses. In
this
context,
application
requirements are not considered.
10.2.5 Insulating glass units (IGU)
Additionally valid:
EN 1279-1 to -6, EN 1096-1
Guideline for the application
and further processing of laminated safety glass.
10.2.5.1 Edge seal
The structure of the edge seal
corresponds to the system
specifications of UNIGLAS®
GmbH & Co. KG.
10.2.5.2 Thickness tolerances in the edge area of the unit
The actual thickness must be
measured at each corner and
near the midpoints of the edges
between the outer glass surfaces. The measured values
must be determined to an
accuracy of 0.1 mm. The
measured thickness values
may not deviate from the nominal thickness specified by the
manufacturer of the insulating
glass units by more than the
deviations specified in Table 17.
n
The thickness tolerances of
insulating glass units with multiple pane cavities are ensured
by adhering to the following
rules:
a) Determine the tolerances of
every single glass/cavity/
glass formation according to
Table 19
b) Calculate the squares of
these values
c) Sum the square values
OENORM B 3738
Guideline to assess the visible
quality of glass in buildings,
issued by BIV and BF - edition
of 2009.
The maximum deviation of the
edge seal width is ± 2.5 mm.
d) Take the square root of this
sum
This guideline exclusively
defines the tolerances of the
outer structure of insulating
glass.
Tab. 17: Thickness tolerances of IGU when using float glass
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
*
**
First pane*
Second pane*
annealed glass
annealed glass
annealed glass, toughened glass or
heat-strengthened glass
thickness ≤ 6 mm
other cases
annealed glass
toughened or heat-strengthened glass
glass/plastic composite
annealed glass
toughened or heat-strengthened glass**
laminated glass with interlays***
Pane thicknesses given as nominal values.
Thermally toughened safety glass, heat-strengthened glass or chemically
toughened glass.
*** Laminated glass or laminated safety glass, consisting of two annealed float
glass panes (maximum thickness 12 mm each) and one plastic interlay. For
laminated glass or laminated safety glass of varying composition, see EN
250 |
IGU thickness deviation
± 1.0 mm
± 1.5 mm
± 1.5 mm
total thickness ≤ 12 mm
ornamental glass
glass/plastic composite****
ornamental glass
ornamental glass
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
ISO 12543-5 and the calculation rule according to 2.4.5.2 should be applied
subsequently.
**** Glass/plastic composites are a type of composite glass that contains at
least one pane of a plastic glazing material; see EN ISO 12543-1.
10
| 251
n
Example
10.2.5.5 SSG with coating in fixed dimensions
Triple insulating glass structure:
Laminated safety glass 6.4* – 12 – 4 – 12 – 4
Step a)
Deviations for ‘Formation 1’
Deviations for ‘Formation 2’
(6.4 – 12 – 4) = ± 1.5 mm
(4 – 12 – 4) = ± 1.0 mm
Step b)
Calculate the squares
of these values:
1.5 • 1.5 mm = 2.25 mm2
1.0 • 1.0 mm = 1.00 mm2
Step c)
Sum the square values:
2.25 + 1.0 = 3.25 mm2
Step d)
Take the square root of
the sum of c):
For the chosen formation in the
example, this results in a thickness deviation of ± 1.8 mm.
3.25 mm2
= 1.80 mm
* For the glass thicknesses, the nominal thickness is always rounded to
one decimal place. For 2 x 3 mm
laminated safety glass made with
PVB interlay = 0.38 mm, the nominal thickness is 6.4 mm
For combinations of SSG or
SSG-H with subsequent coating, coating residues on the
external side of the insulating
glass may be present. These
residues occur due to technical
processes and cannot be
avoided, or rather they comply
with the state of the art. The
residues will corrode and after
time they will be removed by
weather influences.
10.2.5.6 Spacer elements
Plugged and bent corner elements are used that may be
different in structure and layout
depending on the production
process and material properties. Depending on the manufacturing process, gas-filling
holes may be visible in the
spacer element. Colouring the
spacer element influences the
reflection properties in the edge
area.
According to EN 1279-5, insulating glass should be identified
in the spacer element. Colour,
size, type and positioning may
differ according to production
methods. The tolerances for
the position of spacer elements
and the offset dimension for
three-pane insulating glass is
based on the guideline to
assess the visible quality of
glass in buildings or on
OENORM B 3738 depending
on the area of application.
10.2.5.3 Dimension tolerance / offset
The dimension tolerances as
described in Chapter 2 are calculated from the tolerances of
the primary products used in
n
insulating glass units plus the
possible offset dimensions from
insulating glass unit assembly.
Tab. 18: Maximum offset dimension – rectangles
2000 mm ≥ Edge length
3500 mm ≥ Edge length > 2000 mm
Edge length > 3500 mm
n
2.0 mm
2.5 mm
3.0 mm
Tab. 19: Maximum offset dimension – special shapes
2000 mm ≥ Edge length
3500 mm ≥ Edge length > 2000 mm
Edge length > 3500 mm
2.0 mm
3.0 mm
4.0 mm
10.2.5.4 Removal of edge coating
Depending on the coating system in the edge seal area, the
coating is generally removed by
grinding. This may leave
machining marks so that these
glass surfaces differ from the
surfaces that are still coated.
The same applies to the projecting glass in stepped edge
insulating glass units.
10.2.6 Laminated safety glass units
Laminated safety glass units
consist of two or more glass
panes which are connected to
an inseparable unit by means of
one or several polyvinyl butyral
(PVB) interlays. A distinction is
made between glass with a PVB
interlay thickness of 0.38 mm
and glass with a PVB interlay
thickness of at least 0.76 mm.
10.2.6.1 Dimension tolerances
(Following the laminated safety
glass product specification of
UNIGLAS®)
Laminated safety glass is distinguished according to its
structure: Laminated safety
glass 0.38 PVB, laminated
safety glass from 0.76 PVB,
laminated safety glass with
sound protection interlay
(sound control laminated safety
glass) and laminated safety
glass with colour interlay
(coloured PVB interlays).
The tolerances generally comply with EN ISO 12543.
The respective dimension tolerances of the semi-finished
products used in the laminated
safety glass element apply, and
additionally the permissible displacement
tolerances
as
shown in Tables 20 and 21.
10
252 |
| 253
Fig. 14: Limit sizes for dimensions of rectangular panes
n
Tab. 21: Permissible maximum dimensions for offset:
special shapes
Edge length l
H-t
H+t
[mm]
l ≤ 2000
2000 < l ≤ 4000
l > 4000
1.5
3.0
4.5
With laminated safety glass
units, consisting of SSG glass
with a width below 20 cm and
a height of more than 50 cm,
there might be distortions at
the long edges of the glass. In
this case, the laminated safety
B-t
B+t
Example:
Laminated safety glass made of 6 mm SSG / 0.76 PVB / 6 mm
heat-strengthened glass; polished edges
Deviation of the single pane:
± 1.5 mm
Additional offset tolerance:
± 2.0 mm
The permissible offset tolerance adds up to ± 3.5 mm
10.2.6.2 Displacement tolerance (offset)
The individual panes might be
displaced during the laminating
Permissible maximum dimensions for offset per laminated
safety glass nominal thickness
≤ 8 mm
≤ 20 mm
> 20 mm
process for manufacturing reasons.
Fig. 15: Offset
B, H ± t
3.0
4.0
5.0
4.5
5.5
6.0
glass unit is not rectangular any
more, but can show a slight
curve (corrugated). This condition is due to production and
does not represent grounds for
complaint.
10.2.6.3 Thickness tolerance
The thickness deviation of laminated safety glass must not
exceed the sum of the individual glass panes, which is specified in the standards for basic
glass (EN 572). The tolerance
limit of the intermediate layer
must not be taken into account
if the thickness of the intermediate layer is < 2 mm. For intermediate layers ≥ 2 mm a deviation of ≤ 0.2 mm is taken into
account.
Example:
Laminated glass, made of 2 x
float glass, with a nominal
thickness of 3 mm and an intermediate layer of 0.5 mm.
According to EN 572-2, the tolerance limits of float glass with
a nominal thickness of 3 mm
are ± 0.2 mm. Therefore, the
nominal thickness is 6.5 mm
and the tolerance limits
± 0.4 mm.
10.2.6.4 Processing
d
d
With laminated safety glass
consisting of two or more glass
panes, every single pane is
processed according to DIN
1249, Part 11 as standard. The
n
cutting tolerances are added to
the displacement tolerances.
The longest edge of the element is used in Tables 20
and 21.
Tab. 20: Permissible maximum dimensions for
displacement: rectangles
Edge length l
[mm]
l ≤ 2000
2000 < l ≤ 4000
l > 4000
254 |
Permissible maximum dimensions for displacement per
laminated safety glass nominal thickness
≤ 8 mm
≤ 20 mm
> 20 mm
1.0
2.0
3.0
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
4.0
For laminated safety glass elements made of two or more
glass panes, the edges of the
individual panes can be made
as KG, KGS, KMG, KGN or
KPO according to DIN 1249,
Part 11. Also, the entire package can be processed on the
glass edge.
In the case of SSG or heatstrengthened glass, the offset
of the edges cannot be levelled
subsequently. For combinations of non-toughened glass,
subsequent processing is permissible.
10.3 General Requirements for Storage and
Transport
10.3.1 General
UNIGLAS® insulating glass
units may only be transported
and stored upright.
Underlays
and
supports
against tipping may not cause
any damage to the glass or
| 255
10
edge seal and must be
arranged at right angles to the
pane surface.
The individual glazing units
must be kept separate by intermediate layers (paper, stacking
plates or similar). The thickness
of the individual glass piles may
not exceed 50 cm.
Insulating glass units must be
stored in a dry place, even
packed units. On construction
sites, panes must be covered.
Caution when handling packed
units: improper placement of
insulating glass packages can
cause enough distortion to the
packages that the glass panes
inside also become distorted.
Insulating glass units may never
be placed directly on their corners or edges. Also, the panes
must never be stored on hard
ground such as concrete or
stone, since damage to the
edges can lead to breakage of
the glass later on.
Special glass transporting
mechanisms, for example
racks, must be used for transporting glass.
When manipulating and inserting the glazing unit using suction lifters, it is permissible to
briefly lift the insulating glass by
a single pane.
Insulating glass units with various glass thicknesses must be
gripped by the thicker, heavier
pane.
Insulating glass units stored on
racks must always be covered
to shield them against direct
sunlight. This applies especially
to coated, body-tinted, ornamental, cast and wired glasses,
since these are prone to more
serious heat cracks.
Generally, no warranty claims
can be made relating to glass
breakage. The covering is also
necessary to prevent overexposure of the edge seal to sunlight.
When installing the glass, the
glass edges of the insulating
glass unit and the rebate must
be dry.
UNIGLAS® insulating glass
units must be generally protected against alkaline substances
such as cement and lime, as
well as against strong alkalis
used for paint stripping etc.
We recommend our glass protective interlay ‘UNIGLAS® |
SAFE’.
When working with angle
grinders, sand blasters, welding torches etc., the pane surfaces must be specially protected against any possible
damage.
10.3.2 Transport and installation of insulating glass units in
areas of high and low pressure
In the unit cavity, the barometric
pressure is equal to that of the
location of manufacture. Since
the unit cavity is a hermetically
sealed space, the enclosed air
pressure remains constant. If
256 |
insulating glass manufactured in
this way is transported to an
area of lower air pressure, then
the panes will ‘bulge out’ on
both sides. If the panes are
transported to areas of higher air
pressure, then they will ‘bulge in’
on both sides. This would result
in permanent, extreme stress on
the edge seal and the entire
glazing system. Moreover, a distortion-free view through the
pane could not be guaranteed.
In such cases, the geodetic data
of the place of installation must
be known and indicated with the
order for the above-stated reasons. If the place of installation
differs from the place of production by more than 800 metres in
altitude, then special manufacturing processes must be used
for production of such insulating
glass.
If glass with an increased
absorption rate, small-format
insulating glass units with a side
ratio > 1:2, or asymmetrical
designs for sound reduction
purposes are required, then the
limit for the maximum altitude
difference is approx. 400
metres. In general, there are two
methods available for manufacturing such insulating glass.
One method involves installing a
pressure equalisation valve into
the edge seal of the glass,
which will only be closed once
the glass has acclimatised to
the site of installation. In view of
the very clear definition for production of insulating glass, this
procedure is rather sensitive,
since the unit cavity remains
open for a specific period during
transport and thus does not
comply with the requirements
for tightness with regard to
vapour pressure and gas diffusion. However, until recently
there was no other possibility of
managing large differences in
altitude.
But lately, a technical device has
been established that simulates
the air pressure at the site of
installation during hermetic sealing of the unit cavity and controls the gas filling press accordingly. In this way, ‘deformed’
insulating glass is manufactured
at the production site which only
obtains its correct, plane-parallel
form at the site of installation.
Insulating glass manufactured
according to this method complies fully with the requirements
and guidelines for production.
The temporary ‘bulging in/out’
of the glass in the time between
manufacture and installation
does not have any effects on the
service life of the insulating glass
since the stress will be permanently relieved after installation.
10.3.3 Transport of large-surface panes
During the transport of largesurface insulating glass units,
individual panes of the insulating glass units may begin to
vibrate due to transport
impacts.
Consequently, in unit cavities
between 8 and 12 mm, contact
of the inner pane surfaces is
possible for physical and transport reasons.
With smaller unit cavities, visible marks may be left in the
coating on the inner glass surface.
Such defects are not considered. For this reason, the unit
cavity should be a minimum of
16 mm.
10
| 257
10.4 Rebates and Blocks for
Insulating Glass
n
Tab. 22: Glazing rebate heights, minimum dimensions in mm
Longest side of the
glazing unit
Glazing rebate height h for
single-pane glass
Insulating glass*
10.4.1 Glass rebate dimensions
Glazing of a window includes
the support of the glazing unit
in the window frame and the
application of a seal between
the glazing unit and the frame.
The glazing unit support must
be realised through correct setting by means of blocks. The
sealing (sealing compound or
gaskets) between the frame
and the glazing unit must be
rainproof and draught-proof.
The clearance between the
edge of the pane and the bottom of the rebate must be a
minimum of 5 mm.
Rebate dimensions
e
a2
S
g
a1
c
d
h
t
b
a1 Thickness of the sealant on the
outside
inside
b Glazing rebate width
c Contact width of the glazing bead
d Width of the glazing bead
e Thickness of the glazing unit
g Glazing depth
(acc. to DIN 18545, Part 1, as a
general rule the glass penetrates
into the glazing rebate by 2/3 of
the glazing rebate upstand, yet
20 mm should not be exceeded)
h Glazing rebate upstand
s Clearance between pane and
glazing rebate base
t Total rebate width
10.4.2 Requirements for the glazing rebate
The requirements for the glazing rebate are defined in DIN
18545, Part 1. For glazing of
insulating glass, glazing beads
are required. In general these
glazing beads are installed on
the room side. However, for
indoor swimming pools or shop
windows, the glass-retaining
strips should be installed on the
outside.
For glazing with sealing-free
rebate, appropriate openings
for vapour pressure equalisation must be fitted.
258 |
Before commencing the glazing work, the glass rebate must
be in dust- and grease-free
condition, regardless of the
frame material.
For timber windows, the glazing rebate and the glazing bead
must be primed and the first
intermediate coat of paint
applied and dried.
up to 1000
10
18
from 1000 to 3500
12
18
more than 3500
15
22
* With edge lengths under 500 mm, the glazing rebate height may be reduced
to 14 mm and the glazing depth to 11 mm, under consideration of a narrow
sash bar design.
For very heavy pane formats, please contact the manufacturer.
Note
Triple insulating glass units may
have a higher edge seal due to
static and construction-related
reasons. Due to permissible
deviations according to the
n
guideline to assess the visible
quality of glass in buildings,
larger glazing rebate height values than those required by DIN
18 545 may have to be used.
Tab 23: Minimum thicknesses of the seal a1 and a2 in mm
for flat glazing units
Longest side of
the glazing unit
Material of the frame
Wood
Plastic, surface
bright
dark
a1 and a2 * [mm]
[mm]
from
from
from
from
from
up
1500
2000
2500
2750
3000
to
to
to
to
to
to
1500
2000
2500
2750
3000
4000
3
3
4
4
4
5
4
5
5
-
Metal, surface
bright
dark
4
5
6
-
3
4
4
5
5
-
3
4
5
5
-
* The inner thickness of the sealing a2 may be up to 1 mm smaller. Values
that are not stated must be agreed for individual cases.
10.4.3 Block setting
The installation of setting
blocks in insulating glass has
the following purpose:
n
Distributing and/or balancing
the weight of the glass pane
in the frame so that the
frame supports the glass
pane.
n
Permanently keeping the
frame in its correct position.
n
Ensuring uninhibited functionality of wings.
n
Ensuring that the edges of
the glass pane are not in
contact with the frame at any
point.
Therefore, the frames must be
dimensioned such that they
properly support the glass
panes. Glass panes must not
assume any load-bearing or
bracing function. Distribution of
loads is performed via the support blocks. Spacer blocks
ensure the distance between
| 259
10
glass edges and the glazing
rebate base.
Setting blocks and/or bridge
blocks should be between 80
and 100 mm in length. In addition, they must be 2 mm wider
than the thickness of the insulating glass. The glazing unit
must be supported along the
entire pane thickness.
The blocks must be secured
against displacement within the
frame. The block setting must
not stress the edge of the
glass. For panes weighing
more than 170 kg, UNIGLAS®
therefore recommends using
suitable heavy-duty blocks or
appropriately elongating the
blocks and the bridge blocks.
The distance between the
blocks and the pane corners
must be approximately the
length of the block. In individual
cases, the distance to the glass
edge may be reduced to 20
mm, provided the risk of glass
breakage is not increased by
the frame construction and the
position of the block. For largesurface freestanding panes, a
distance of approx. 250 mm
must be maintained regardless
of the frame material. If the
blocks prevent vapour pressure
equalisation at the rebate base,
then suitable bridge blocks with
a passage section of minimum
8 x 4 mm must be used. Any
uneven support surfaces,
joints, etc. must be bridged to
form a stable support.
The material of the blocks, their
colour and their impregnation
must be such that they are
compatible with the materials
of the edge seals in insulating
glass, the sealing and the interlays of laminated safety glass in
accordance with DIN 52460.
For combinations with laminated safety glass, cast-in-place
glass (CIP) and safety glass of
type A, B, C, and D acc. to DIN
52290 or of type P1A, P2A,
P3A, P4A, P5A, P6A, P7A, P8A
in accordance with EN 356,
UNIGLAS® recommends 60° to
80° Shore A hardness elastomer blocks ; for example
Gluske universal or wood
blocks. Wood blocks, however,
should only ever be used in timber windows.
Suggestions for setting block installation, excerpt from the ‘Technical
Guidelines of the Glazing Trade No. 3, 1997 edition’
Casement wing
Bottom-hung
Top-hung wing
casement wing
Swing wing
Centre pivot wing
Lifting casement wing Fix glazing
Horizontal slide window
Bottom-hung tilt
wing
n 1 = Support block
n 2 = Spacer block
n 3 = Spacer block made of elastomeric plastic (60° to 80° Shore)
1*in glazing units with widths larger 1 m
2 support blocks of minimum 10 cm
length must be positioned above the
swivel point.
2*must be support blocks for swing
wings that can be tilted by more than
90°.
Insulating glass with in-cavity
systems, such as UNIGLAS® |
SHADE, must be set such that
the upright edge of the glazing
is perfectly vertical.
Setting block installation possibilities
Note: Setting blocks must be
installed according to Technical
Guideline No. 3 ‘Installation of
setting blocks in glazing units’
issued by the Institut des
260 |
Glaserhandwerks für Verglasungstechnik und Fensterbau,
(Institute of the Glazing Trade for
Glazing Technology and Window
Manufacture), Hadamar.
10
| 261
10.5 Glazing Systems
Note
According to DIN 18545-3,
glazing with completely filled
rebate is possible. The insulat-
ing glass manufacturer's glazing guidelines generally provide
for versions with rebates that
are free from sealant.
Glazing Systems
Vf3
Vf4
For glazing with so-called dry
glazing gaskets, the following
performance aspects must be
taken into particular consideration:
n
The gasket must be flush
with the upper edge of the
glazing rebate or the glazing
bead.
n
The joint of the outer gasket
must also provide a perfect
seal in the corner areas.
n
The choice of material properties, type of corner formation and provisions for fixing
the glazing beads must comply with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Vf5
10.5.1 General
The materials used for all glazing systems (gaskets, glazing
tapes, sealants and blocks)
must ensure elastic support
and proper sealing of insulating
glass for any temperature
ranges occurring over the
entire period of use. They must
be weatherproof and resistant
to age.
Harmful interaction with the
substances used in the edge
seal of insulating glass must
not occur. In addition, the
materials must be compatible
with regards to humidity, as
stated in DIN 52460.
For timber windows with gaskets, a system inspection
according to the test recommendations of the Institut für
Fenstertechnik e.V. (ift – Institute
for
Window
Technology),
Rosenheim is required.
n
10.5.2 Glazing Systems with sealant-free rebate
n
Glazing with sealing on
both sides
Sealing using permanently elastic sealant on glazing tape on
both sides must be adjusted to
the shape of the rebate and
must guarantee the minimum
sealing tape according to DIN
18545. The width of the glazing
tape must be selected such that
n
n
a minimum adhesion surface
of 5 mm of the permanently
elastic sealant on the frame
and on the glass is ensured.
the upper end of the glazing
tape is minimum 5 mm
above glazing rebate base
so as to allow vapour pressure equalisation.
262 |
n Glazing with gaskets
The gaskets must be adapted
to the window system. They
must be permanently and
properly airtight at the corners
and joints and must accommodate the thickness tolerances
of the insulating glass without
any losses with regards the
sealing force. The section corners and joints must be permanently sealed on the side
exposed to elements - in indoor
pools and damp rooms on the
room side as well - by means of
suitable measures (curing,
welding, gluing). For pressure
glazing, contact pressures up
to max. 50 N/cm edge length
are permitted.
Openings for vapour pressure equalisation
All glazing systems with sealantfree rebate bases require openings in the glazing rebate for the
purpose of vapour pressure
equalisation. These openings
must be constructed such that
any condensation that could
form within the rebate can be
reliably discharged to the outside, that equalisation between
vapour pressure and the outside
air is carried out and that equalisation of different levels of relative humidity is ensured.
n
The following minimum
requirements must be
complied with
For narrow windows with glass
widths up to 1200 mm, installation of two openings is sufficient.
However, a circumferential connection to the lowest base of the
rebate must be ensured in such
a case, particularly in the area of
the blocks. The openings must
be installed in the shape of slots
or long holes with minimum
dimensions of 5 x 20 mm, or as
boreholes with a minimum diameter of 8 mm.
The openings must be installed
in the lowest point of the glazing
rebate. Undercuts and strips of
the gaskets must be drilled in the
area of the openings. The installation of setting blocks must not
impair vapour pressure equalisation. Joints in the rebate base
must be stably bridged by
means of blocks. If the rebate
base is smooth, bridge blocks
are required. For plastic and
metal windows, the openings for
vapour pressure equalisation
must not lead directly from the
glazing rebate to the outside.
The installation of so-called
channel heads is required so
that no rainwater may be forced
in through wind pressure.
Therefore, it is recommended to
install the perforation in the gasket chambers with an offset of
approx. 5 cm in relation to each
other.
Should it not be possible to
install offset openings for vapour
pressure equalisation in specific
gaskets, the openings must be
protected by means of suitable
cover plates. The covers must
prevent the return of water into
the rebate. Particularly in rooms
with high humidity, suitable
measures must be installed to
ensure that vapour pressure
equalisation is not carried out in
the direction of the interior. This
may be the case with loose glazing beads or with openings
| 263
10
behind the middle gasket. In
such a case, increased condensation occurs. For faster vapour
pressure equalisation, additional
openings must be present in the
areas of the upper corners of the
glazing rebates. These are
mandatory for indoor pools and
damp rooms.
In addition to achieving vapour
pressure equalisation, the rebate
must be adequately drained. In
mullion/transom constructions,
for example, water condensing
on the transom must be drained
in a cascade into the mullions
and, from there, to the outside.
Suggested system for vapour pressure equalisation
Alternatively
10.5.4.1 Compass For Bonded Windows
This leaflet was authored by: Bundesinnungsverband des
Glaserhandwerkes | Bundesverband Flachglas e.V., |
Gütegemeinschaft Kunststoff-Fenstersysteme | Institut für
Fenstertechnik e. V. | Verband Fenster- und Fassadenhersteller |
BÜFA-Glas GmbH & Co. KG | Deutsche Hutchinson GmbH | Dow
Corning GmbH | Fenzi SpA (I) | Glas Trösch GmbH | Gluske-BKV
GmbH | H.B. Fuller Window GmbH | Isolar Glas Beratung GmbH |
Kömmerling Chemische Fabrik GmbH | Pilkington Deutschland AG |
Rolltech A/S (Dk) | Saint Gobain Glass Deutschland GmbH
At the initiative of: © Bundesverband Flachglas e. V. | Mülheimer
Strasse 1 | D-53840 Troisdorf | Telephone: 0 22 41 / 87 27-0 |
Telefax: 0 22 41 / 87 27-10 | E-mail: www.bundesverband-flachglas.de | Internet: www.bundesverband-flachglas.de
Date: 10/2010
10.5.4.1.1 Introduction
Alternatively
10.5.3 Two-side glazing systems without glazing tape in timber windows
Experience in recent years has
revealed that this system is very
difficult to implement in practice
(increased risk of glass breakage, sealant coming unstuck,
resulting in increased humidity
levels in the rebate).
For these reasons, UNIGLAS®
does not recommend this type
of glazing system.
10.5.4 Gluing or bonding of insulating glass
This is a relatively new glazing
system which has not yet been
tried and tested. General
approval cannot be issued for
this system.
With this system, approval will
be issued on a case-by-case
264 |
basis for individually defined
systems according to the present inspection results.
The Kompass für geklebte
Fenster (code of practice for
glued or bonded windows),
issued by BF Flachglas, can be
of help in this situation.
This leaflet has been written in
cooperation and consultation
with relevant industries and
associations, and hence provides a wide-ranging overview of
the requirements placed on the
‘bonded window’ as a complete
system.
In facade construction and in the
automotive or aerospace industries, bonding techniques have
been familiar for many years and
are today indispensable.
In window construction too,
bonding methods are attracting
more and more attention. The
basic principle here is exploiting
the stiffness of the glass and
using a structurally effective
bond between the casement
frame and the glass or insulating
glass (MIG) to stiffen the window
as a laminated element and to
design it to be non-settling.
In addition to the possible
advantages offered by the bonding technique, the window structures and the individual function
parts must be considered holistically. Insulating glass is one of
the crucial components that in
bonded glazing systems may be
subjected to additional stresses
resulting from the window system in question.
The definition of bonded window
systems here is that the insulating glass pane is linearly mounted on at least two sides in the
closed state of the window, thus
preventing dropping out of the
pane.
This leaflet deals with bonded
glazing in window construction
from the viewpoint of long-term
function and utility of the ‘window’ as a complete system, with
a particular focus on its insulating glass. Mechanical, static or
dynamic stresses on the edge
connection,
compatibility
aspects, edge connection structure, adhesiveness of the adhesives, joint dimension, effects of
moisture in the rebate, glass surface protection with outer coatings etc. – these are just a few of
the factors that might affect the
durability and hence the longterm function of the window
structure.
This leaflet does not absolve the
window manufacturer of responsibility for designing the bonded
| 265
10
window structure holistically and
in close consultation particularly
with the manufacturers of insulating glass, adhesives, frame
materials and fittings, taking into
account existing standards and
guidelines. It is by contrast
intended to highlight important
aspects that need to be taken
into account within the framework of a holistic design process
of this type.
10.5.4.2 System Description
10.5.4.2.1 System provider
The term ‘system’ means in
this context that only a coordinated and tested system may
be used. For this, the system
provider supplies an appropriate system description which
must be complied with in
respect of the following points:
n
Fittings
n
Connections
n
Opening types
n
Manufacturing information
n
Transport and storage
n
Assembly
n
System drawing
n
Care and repair instructions
n
Sections
n
n
Reinforcements
Traceability of components
(identification)
n
System modifications
n
Seals
n
Glazing Systems
n
Block settings
A check on reusability (recycling) is recommended.
10.5.4.2.2 Insulating glass structure
10.5.4.2.2.1 Glass
The glass can in this case
absorb frame loads. To do so, it
must be suitably dimensioned,
depending on the design in
question.
Loads such as dead, wind and
live loads are dissipated via the
building structure.
The regulations of the DIBt and
relevant standards for the window must be complied with
(see also item 9.0).
With reference to this particular
system, the following points
must be noted in connection
with the glass/laminates:
n
UV load
n
Moisture load
n
Material compatibility
n
Additional
stresses
n
Edge finishing / free glass
edge
n
Shear load
10.5.4.2.2.2 Spacers
The suitability of the spacer
system for this application must
be documented. Its function
must be verified accordingly.
10.5.4.2.2.3 Primary and secondary sealant
The long-term functioning of
the primary and secondary
sealing must be assured.
Particular influences from possible UV radiation, moisture
load and/or additionally occurring shear forces, as well as the
compatibility (see list of literature) of all components coming
into contact must be taken into
account.
In the case of mechanically
unsecured systems (e.g. without glass retaining strips), the
edge connection, which in
these systems is subjected to
higher stresses from wind pressure and wind suction, must be
dimensioned according to the
state of the art. This might for
example affect the height of the
spacer bar coverage and the
selection of materials.
10.5.4.2.2.4 Adhesive system
The adhesive system selection
depends on the window system and on the resultant
stresses (see also 2.0). The
boundary conditions in the
adhesive variant in terms of
temperature, UV and moisture
loads can have a lasting effect
on durability. The adhesive system selection must take this
into account (see also 2.0). The
permanent adhesive bond
must be verified according to
the state of the art.
The adhesive joint must be
dimensioned to suit the window system, the stresses
occurring and the frame materials.
mechanical
10
266 |
| 267
10.5.4.3 Systems
10.5.4.3.1 Representation of systems
n
Permissible bonding positions and glazing systems
Group K
With conventional mechanical
load distribution using blocks
Group L
Without conventional mechanical load distribution
Bonding systems and sealant
assume load distribution in full
Bonding position
Position 1
outside
inside
outside
inside
outside
inside
outside
inside
outside
inside
outside
inside
outside
inside
outside
inside
outside
inside
outside
inside
Position 2
Position 4
Rebate bottom
Examples for
solutions with
triple thermal
insulating glass
Combinations
outside
inside
10
268 |
| 269
Load-carrying bond /
MIG edge connection
with load distribution
MIG edge connection
without load distribution
Glazing block
and show the basic options for
use of a bonded connection.
Based on the principles shown,
the resultant loads introduced
in each instance can be dissipated. With combined solutions, the resultant additional
tensioned state must be considered in addition if required.
The pictures shown on in
5.4.1.3.1 illustrate the principle
10.5.4.3.2 Vapour pressure equalisation / draining
All-round vapour pressure
equalisation must be permanently assured. The apertures
provided for drainage and
vapour pressure equalization
must conform to the usual
dimensions and perform those
functions
n
n
Possible creepage of adhesives in glass without
mechanical load distribution
n
Point-based load introduction via the fittings and shear
forces on the edge connection
n
Stresses from use
n
Load dissipation of wind/
suction loads in the closed
state using linear mounting
provided on at least two
sides
Furthermore, the identity of the
components used must be verified.
The additional requirements,
depending on the intended
10.5.4.4.1 Climatic conditions
n
Shear forces occurring due
to different temperaturerelated expansion of the
materials used
n
n
n
Possibly higher temperature
and UV load on the edge
connection and the bond
10.5.4.4.4 Other conditions
Possible change in isotherm
line – hence possible buildup of condensate at unusual
places (e.g. edge connection, bond)
10.5.4.5 Compatibility
Possible change in rebate
design, hindering vapour
pressure equalisation
10.5.4.4.2 Mechanical stress
The load assumptions in accordance with the known standards and regulations must be
noted. In addition, additional
n
Incorrect use
The particular loads acting on
the glazing, the edge connection and the bond must be
assessed depending on the
system (see also 2.0).
The edge connections of insulating glass units put into use
according to EN 1279 must not
be used for load distribution of
the dead weight via individual
panes (e.g. block setting). If the
insulating glass edge connection is used for bonding (e.g.
bonding at bottom of rebate),
the edge connection will be
subjected to additional stress.
These stresses must be taken
into consideration.
10.5.4.4.3 Heat / sound insulation / solar control / safety /
fire resistance
10.5.4.4 General conditions
Besides the usual and wellknown climatic strains and
mechanical stresses on the
insulating glass and on the
bond inside the frame, the following points must be noted in
particular:
Warping in the glass plane
depending on the design
and size
n
10.5.4.3.3 Suitability test of components
The quality of the individual
components must be assured
by verification of their suitability.
Dissipation of the dead
weight via both the edge
connection of the insulating
glass and the bond between
the glass and the frame
stresses from static and
dynamic loads are possible and
must be taken into account
accordingly, such as:
The edge finishing or edge protection must be taken into
The compatibility of materials
must be verified for the respective application (see item 9.0),
meaning that the components
used must permanently perform their function within the
overall system, for example:
n
Frame material
n
Primary and secondary
sealant of insulating glass
n
Spacers for insulating glass
application, must if necessary be
verified separately.
account depending on the system.
n
Material of glazing blocks
n
Sealing sections / filler sections
n
Glazing sealants
n
Adhesive
n
Adhesive strips
n
Glass laminates
n
Coatings or films on glass
10
270 |
| 271
n
Examples for contact between the various materials
Bonding Cleaning Primer
system
agent
Adhesive PVC-U
Glass
Seconlaminates dary
sealant
Primay
sealant
Spacer
Sealing
lip a
Sealing
lip i
Section Blocks
coatings
Bonding system
Cleaning agent
Primer
Adhesive
PVC-U
Glass laminates
Secondary sealant
Primary sealant
Spacer
Sealing lip a
Sealing lip i
Section coatings
Blocks
Key: d = direct contact, i = indirect contact, 0 = no contact
In the event of changes to the systems, the compatibility must be re-verified.
10
272 |
| 273
DIN EN 12412
10.5.6 Adhesion behaviour
The adhesion between the
casement frame and the bond
must be permanent (see 1.0).
With bonding on glass, particular attention must be paid to
adhesion when the bonding is
on coated and/or enamelled
surfaces. In this connection,
the glass manufacturer must be
consulted.
10.5.7 Quality assurance
To assure a continuous quality
standard, it is recommended
that inspection plans be
10.5.8
devised for incoming materials,
manufacturing processes and
final production inspections.
DIN EN 12488
DIN EN ISO 12543
DIN EN 12758
DIN EN 13022
DIN EN 13501
DIN EN ISO 13788
Repairability
The possibilities for repair must
be covered in the system
description. In the event of
repair, the functioning of all
components and their compatibility must be assured.
10.5.9
To do so, an appropriate identification system must assure
traceability of the components
used.
DIN EN 15434
DIN 18361
Warranty
The supplier of the bonded
window structure, as a rule the
window maker, provides a war-
DIN EN 14179
DIN 18545
ranty for his product as mandated by law.
10.5.10 Standards and rules
The following standards and
bodies of rules apply in full and
as currently amended.
DIN EN 356
GlDIN EN 356 Glass in building – Security glazing –
Testing and classification of resistance against manual
attack
DIN EN 572
Glass in building – Basic soda lime silicate glass products
DIN 1055
DIN EN 1096
Glass in building – Coated glass
DIN EN 1279
Glass in building – Insulating glass units
DIN EN 1627 – 1630 Windows, doors, shutters – Burglar resistance
DIN EN 1863-2
Glass in building – Heat strengthened soda lime silicate
glass
DIN 4102
Fire behaviour of building materials and building components
DIN 4108
Thermal insulation and energy economy in buildings
DIN 4109
Sound insulation in buildings
DIN 5034
Daylight in interiors
DIN EN ISO 10077 Thermal performance of windows, doors and shutters
DIN EN 12150
Glass in building – Thermally toughened soda-lime silicate safety glass
274 |
GUV – SI 8027
VdS 2163
VdS 2270
VDI 2719
RAL – GZ 520
EnEV
Thermal performance of windows, doors and shutters.
Determination of thermal transmittance by hot box
method
Glass in building – Glazing guidelines – Glazing Systems
and requirements for glazing
Glass in building – Laminated glass and laminated safety
glass
Glass in building – Glazing and airborne sound insulation
Glass in building – Structural sealant glazing
Fire classification of construction products and building
elements
Hygrothermal performance of building components and
building elements – Internal surface temperature to avoid
critical surface humidity and interstitial condensation –
Calculation methods (ISO 13788:2001)
Glass in building – Heat-soaked thermally-toughened
soda lime silicate safety glass
Glass in building – Product standard for structural and/or
ultra-violet resistant sealant
German construction contract procedures (VOB) – Part
C: General technical specifications in construction contracts (ATV); Glazing work
Glazing with sealants; rebates; requirements
Technical guideline of glazing 3 ‘Blocking of glazing
units’
Technical guideline of glazing 17 ‘Glazing with insulating
glass’
Bundesverband Flachglas (Federal Sheet Glass
Association) Code of Practice ‘Material compatibility for
all concerns of insulating glass’
Quality and inspection regulations, RAL – GZ 716/1,
Section III, Annex A: ‘Bonded glazing units in PVC frame
structures’
Ift Rosenheim, VE-08 / 1 Assessment basis for bonded
glazing systems
Greater safety in case of breakage of glass
Burglar-resistant glazing
Alarm glazing
Sound insulation of windows
Insulating glass units; quality assurance
Energy saving regulation
All DIN EN standards can be
requested from:
Beuth-Verlag GmbH
(exclusive selling rights)
10772 Berlin
Telephone: (030) 2601-2260
Fax. (030) 2601-1260
Internet: www.beuth.de
E-mail: [email protected]
VDI =
Verein Deutscher Ingenieure,
Düsseldorf
GUV = Gemeinde Unfall-Versicherung/Bundesverband der
Unfallkassen, Munich
VdS = VdS Schadenverhütung
GmbH, Cologne
DIBt = Deutsches Institut für
Bautechnik, Berlin
| 275
10
10.6 Special Glazing
Special glazing must always be
carefully
planned
and
designed. A whole series of
important aspects must be
observed to maintain functionality
and
load
transfer.
UNIGLAS® therefore recommends involving the glazing
manufacturer from as early as
the planning stage.
water greater than the small
amounts referred to in the
sense of the standard condense on structural glass joints
or glass corners, UNIGLAS®
cannot be held responsible and
must again draw attention to
the physical nature of the construction and the possible consequences.
One example of special glazing
is structural frameless glazing
and structural corner glazing
made of insulating glass.
When calculating the Uw values, equation (1) in DIN ISO EN
10077-1 must be expanded
accordingly with a Ψglass-glass
multiplied by the length of the
frameless joint.
Structural glass joints and glass
corners have unfavourable
thermal properties. Each outer
corner presents a geometric
thermal bridge that is especially predestined to have lower
room-side surface temperatures than the straight surfaces.
Due to the nature of the system, even when using a technically superior thermal edge seal
system (warm edge), the edge
seal area will always have less
favourable insulating properties
(higher U values) than the uninterrupted area within the glass
surface for which the nominal
Ug value is specified. One must
therefore always expect condensation to form on the inner
surfaces of structural glass
joints and glass corners at
higher outer temperatures and
lower room humidity than with
framed glazing.
Even with framed glazing, condensation cannot always be
ruled out. According to DIN
4108-2, temporary condensation of small quantities of water
on the window is permissible
and is therefore no grounds for
complaint. Should amounts of
276 |
In the structural analysis, the
glass must be calculated and
measured at the structural joint
as a free-moving element.
Alternatively, the glass can be
used for mutual bracing and
the ‘weather joint’ made a static load-bearing joint. In this
case, adhesion must be calculated according to ETAG 002. It
must be ensured that the joint
is not subjected to loads until
the adhesive is fully cured. The
dead weight of the insulating
glass must be diverted in full to
the supporting structure.
National requirements, building
regulations of German Federal
States, standards listed in the
technical building regulations,
building rules lists and fire safety requirements etc. must be
observed. In Germany, individual case approval may only be
dispensed with if the upper
edge of the glass is no higher
than 4 m above the public area
and the glazing is being used
for the purposes of a safety
barrier.
The non-load-bearing weather
joint should be at least w x d =
8 mm x 0.5 • w (≥ 6 mm), otherwise according to the structural analysis. 1 K silicon can
only be reliably cross-linked to
a certain joint depth. The adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations must therefore be
strictly observed. For joint
depths greater than 12 mm,
UNIGLAS® recommends using
2 K silicone.
To ensure long-term functional
glazing, special care must be
taken to avoid damage due to
the following influences:
n
Permanent humidity or water
on the edge seal,
n
UV radiation on the edge
seal,
n
Unplanned loads on the
insulating glass and joint,
n
Incompatible materials (see
Chapter 6)
Wherever the butt joint cannot
be completely filled with silicone and the joint depth is limited, the edging can be done
using round, closed-cell PE
foam cord, silicone strips etc.
Again, for these materials,
compatibility must be certified
as described in Chapter 6. To
prevent permanent moisture
exposure on the insulating
glass edge seal, care must be
taken to build this design variant with permanently functioning drainage and ‘rebate aeration‘ for vapour pressure equalisation.
If a sheet metal cover is to be
added for UV protection of the
edge seal, then the adhesive or
weather strip must be fully
cured before the metal cover is
glued on. The curing time
depends on the outdoor temperature and can be requested
from the adhesive manufacturer. To avoid condensation and
thus loss of adhesion, the metal
cover must be glued on voidfree using a suitable adhesive
compatible with the system.
Instead of using a sheet metal
cover, UNIGLAS® recommends
screen-printing the edges or
designing the insulating glass
edge seal with special UVresistant silicone to ensure UV
protection.
The easiest way to do this is to
blacken the step of the outer
glass pane with silicone. This
can produce a small degree of
visible streaks or smears. Butyl
cord is a different shade of
black than the secondary
sealant and stands out. It must
be considered that butyl cord
cannot
be
pressed
on
absolutely evenly, for production reasons. Accordingly, neither a perfectly vertical line nor
the avoidance of small cavities
between primary and secondary sealant can be guaranteed.
For coatings on level 2 or 5 in
the case of three-pane insulated glass or solar control glass,
grinding marks are also often
visible as spectral colours.
None of these markings are
grounds for complaint. As a formal and technically best solution, UNIGLAS® therefore recommends partially covering or
enamelling the panes 2 mm
beyond the edge seal in conjunction with use of a black
spacer with improved thermal
properties.
10
| 277
10.7 Rosenheim Table ‘Stress categories for
glazing of windows’
In the table for determination of
the stress categories for glazing
of window the applicable stress
category 1 to 5 and consequently the required glazing system
Va5 or Vf3 – Vf5 must be defined.
According to DIN 18545, Part 2,
the types of sealant material are
classified into five requirement
groups and given the letters A to
E, and in Part 3 of the standard
they are allocated to the corresponding glazing system of the
‘Rosenheim
Table’.
Categorisation of the sealing systems
is carried out by the sealant
manufacturers. They are solely
responsible for their data and
information.
A copy of the Rosenheim Table
is provided in our glazing regulations that you can download
from our website (only available
in German language):
http://www.uniglas.net/vergla
sungsrichtlinie_6116.html
10.8.2 Basic Information
Compatibility of substances is
defined according to their concepts in DIN 52460, ‘Sealings for
groves and glass - concepts’:
‘Materials are compatible with
each other if no harmful interaction takes place among them.’
This definition does not generally
rule out interaction; however, it is
important that any interactions
taking place must not be harmful. Consequently the definition
of ‘compatibility’ is based on the
requirement that ‘harmful interactions’ must be ruled out.
n
10.8 Materials Compatibility
Bundesverband Flachglas e.V. [Federal Association for Flat Glass];
As of: 6/2004
10.4.1 Introduction
Nowadays multi-pane insulated
glass is increasingly used for
more and more complex applications. Due to this situation, the
sealing materials used for edge
connections come into contact
with a large number of other
materials so that harmful interactions impairing the integrity and
functionality of the entire system
(comprising multi-pane insulated
glass and the supporting con-
struction) cannot be ruled out.
The following information will
explain the basics, causes,
remedies and inspection options
for such incompatibilities.
In addition, the explanations
emphasise the responsibilities
for construction and the obligation for information as well as
any technical and legal consequences resulting from that.
What are interactions?
Interactions are regarded as all
physical and physical-chemical
or chemical processes that may
occur e.g. in case of contact of
two different substances/materials or mixtures of substances/
materials and lead to changes in
structure, colour and texture, etc.
The most important interactions
in connection with this topic are
the physical-chemical reactions,
for example movement of substances or components, also
referred to as migration.
n
What are harmful interactions?
Harmful interactions in this context are any interactions between substances/materials or
mixtures of substances/materials that may have a negative
effect on functionality or service
life of the respective system such as insulated glass assembled in a frame.
n
Basic principles of migration
For triggering of a migration process at least two different substances/materials are required,
278 |
e.g. ‘substance A’ and ‘substance B’. And a least one of
these two substances must
contain more than one component, e.g. ‘substance A’. In ‘substance A’ in turn, at least one of
the components must be ‘able
to migrate’. Due to its molecular
structure within the mixture/substance this component must be
mobile. This is to comply with a
mandatory prerequisite for the
process of migration. Finally,
‘substance B’ must fulfil the
structural prerequisites for
migration processes, that means
it must be able to accommodate
and/or transport the migrating
component.
A typical and simultaneously the
most important case of physicalchemical interaction is the so called
‘plasticiser
migration’:
‘Substance A’ contains a ‘plasticiser’ that is transferred from ‘A’ to
‘B’ due to contact and is accommodated by ‘substance B’.
The driving force in such a physical-chemical process is the different content level of plasticiser
in ‘substance A’ and ‘substance
B’. That means there is a concentration gradient (i.e. a difference in concentration levels)
between the two substances or
the two phases (phases is the
correct technical term). If there is
no concentration gradient, no
migration will take place.
For the speed of the migration
process, the gradient value is a
decisive factor, among others. If
the gradient value is large, the
process takes place rather fast; if
the gradient value is small, the
process takes place rather
slowly.
| 279
10
Another influence factor for the
speed of migration is the temperature. High temperatures will
speed up the process, low temperatures will slow it down.
n
Plasticiser and plasticiser
migration
For reasons of completeness we
would like to provide a short
explanation for the term ‘plasticiser’. ‘Plasticiser’ is a term referring to any substances that are
added to plastic materials in
order to design and modify their
mechanical properties. As is
implied by the name, plasticisers
may have the effect of a solvent,
causing a plastic material to
swell up and transfer the material into a gelatinous condition.
‘Plasticiser migration’ is an
example for a harmful interaction, provides essential properties
of the substances are modified
such that the function of the
system is sustainably changed
and impaired:
n
n
A very dramatic example of this
type of interactions is when the
interactions result in complete
loss of structure of the accommodating substance, i.e. the
accommodating substance is
completely decomposed.
Weather sealing in an insulated
glass joint
Pane
cavity
1st sealing level
2nd sealing level
Plasticiser migration with the
consequence of complete
decomposition of one of the
involved components may occur
in case of direct contact of the
edge connection of a multi-pane
insulated glass with another
unsuitable sealing substance, for
example weather sealing in an
insulated glass joint or for fixing a
glazing block in the glass rebate
with the help of an unsuitable
sealing material.
280 |
Decomposition of the butyl sealing
through migration
back-filling foam
weather sealing
2nd sealing level
Pane
cavity
1st sealing level
Faulty eaves sealing
Organic spacer 2nd sealing level
element
(silicone)
Pane cavity
EPDM contact layer
Weather sealing
Eaves sheet
The substance accommodating the plasticiser will
become softer, more elastic
and will swell up.
n
Butt joint sealing and block
fixing
Here, the typical damaging consequences of harmful plasticiser
migration can be observed.
sealing will first swell and then a
mixture of butyl components
and the migrating substance or
substance mixture will flow out
of the sealing.
The substance releasing
the plasticiser will become
harder, more rigid and will
shrink.
10.8.3 Harmful interactions in practice
In the following we would like to
illustrate some harmful interactions that have previously occurred in connection with installated
of insulated glass.
Eventually, this results in total
damage of the insulated glass
since the consequence of
decomposition of the butyl
sealing is that its sealing effect
against penetration of water
vapour and diffusion of gas is
eliminated. In addition, distribution of the mixture consisting of
components from the butyl
sealing and the migration substance from the inner surfaces
(Pos. 2 + 3) of the insulated
glass causes optical impairment. Proper function of the
insulated glass is impossible
under these conditions and
exchange of substances is
inevitable.
Due to contact with the insulated glass sealing materials substances ‘able to migrate’ are
released from the eaves sealing. These substances then
penetrate the second sealing
level of the insulated glass until
they are in contact with the
spacer profile. These substances then penetrate the border
area between glass surface
and spacer profile and eliminate adhesion of the profile to
the glass. As a consequence of
differences in temperature and
air pressure (‘pumping movement’) the profile will slip into
the pane cavity sliding on a
‘lubrication film’ of oil, plasticisers and/or extenders. Due to
its appearance, this type of
damage is referred to as ‘garland effect’.
Garland effect
n
From the sealing material that is
unsuitable for the respective
application components will
migrate (plasticisers, but also oils
and/or extender substances)
through the second sealing level
of the insulated glass. They will
enter the first sealing level of the
insulated glass (‘butyl sealing’)
and in the final phase of this process they will dissolve the sealing. During this process the butyl
Displacement of profiles
with organic spacer
elements
Another typical example for
harmful migration processes
from an unsuitable glazing sealant in contact with the insulated
glass edge connection. Let us
for example have a look at an
insulated glass system with
organic spacer element at the
eaves edge of a roof glazing
construction.
10
| 281
pushed out of the rebate and
becomes visible.
Block after harmful interactions
n
Selection of the glazing
blocks
Harmful interaction may also
take place due to contact between the sealing materials in
the edge connection of the
insulated glass and the glazing
blocks if the block material is
not compatible.
Interactions between edge connection and block
Unsuitable block material will
accommodate components
from the second sealing level, it
becomes sticky and plastic.
The block will loose its mechanical stability so that its loadbearing and load-distribution
functions are no longer possible according to system design
As a consequence of this
effect, the wings of a window
may distort such that opening
and closing is considerably
inhibited or not possible, at all.
During the final phase of the
migration process, i.e. after the
block has considerably decomposed, the insulated glazing
may shift within the window
frame by several millimetres so
that the edge connection is
282 |
Another possible consequence
is that the insulated glass units
are no longer properly fixed.
The glass products are subjected to extraordinary, unconsidered tensions with the consequence of various damage in
the glass. If essential components are extracted from the
second sealing level, this may
lead to impairment of the integrity and functionality of the
edge connection of the insulating glass. In order to prevent
any such severe failure it is
absolutely essential and mandatory to first test the compatibility of blocking materials.
Specific attention is required for
example for block materials
that contain styrene compounds.
n
Dimensioning of groves
For the design of groves, either
between insulated glass panes
or for installated in walls or
corners, the required technical
demands with regard to grove
design, layout and dimensioning and with regard to the properties of the sealant must be
considered.
The width of the grove joint
depends on the dimensions of
the construction elements to be
joined, for example insulated
glass and frame. The corresponding rules of engineering
are stated in the ‘Technical
regulation of the glaziers trade’,
No. 1. These rules can accordingly be adapted to the joint
grooves between insulated
glass panes or between glass
and wall.
The groove depth is based on
the dimensions of the construction elements to be joined
with each other and sealed. For
single-component
sealing
materials the depth of the joint
groove must not exceed a
maximum value.
In this context it must be noted
that single-component sealing
materials require sufficient supply of water in the form of air
humidity in order to be able to
cure. Moreover, this type of
sealing material cures ‘from the
inside to the outside’. That
means that humidity must overcome a growing barrier on its
way to the yet uncured parts of
the joint. Consequently, if the
joint groove is too deep curing
will take too much time. This
aspect may lead to conditions
in which generally compatible
sealing materials contain disproportionally long, unpolymerised components that are in
contact with each other and
may lead to harmful interactions.
A typical construction with a
considerably exceeded groove
depth for single-component
sealing material is illustrated in
the figure opposite. Due to the
long diffusion path for humidity
that is required for curing and
polymerisation of the product in
point ‘A’, i.e. in the middle of
the joint unpolymerised sealing
material is present over a very
long time; in addition this point
is in very close proximity of the
horizontal pane. Incompatibility
reactions are nearly inevitable
due to the impermissibly long
polymerisation time - even with
‘generally compatible’ sealing
materials. In addition, detachment may take place due to
polymerisation-dependent
shrinkage of the joint.
n
Please note
It cannot be the purpose of this
code of practice to only illustrate constructive solutions that
always ‘work out’. On the one
hand, there are no such solutions that always work. On the
other hand, it must remain a
matter of knowledge and experience of the respective engineer to find the optimum solution for the respective, individual construction case.
Incorrect joint depth with singlecomponent sealant
Weather
sealing
A
29 mm
In design and layout of eaves
sealing another grave mistake
is sometimes made in addition
to incorrect selection of the
glazing sealant; this is shown in
the figure. In this case, the
depth of the groove was incorrectly dimensioned - the groove
is too deep.
5 mm
24 mm
44 mm
Critical point A!
10
| 283
10.8.4 Compatibility testing
Currently, no standardised
testing process for verification of
compatibility for all application
conditions is in force. It may be
required to develop an adequate
testing process for every combination of materials and every
individual construction. In this
context, systems with very complex structures require testing
and verification of both individual
components and the entire
system. This is illustrated by the
following figure:
Triple-substance system
A
B
C
If for example a system consisting of three different substances
(triple-substance
system), for example of the first
sealing level (A) (‘butyl’), the
second sealing level (B) of an
insulated glass, and the weather sealing coat (C) cannot be
avoided, it is essential to test all
possible combinations of the
substances for compatibility.
For this purpose, the following
individual tests must be carried
out:
Compatibility testing
A
B
A
A
C
B
B
C
C
The test for A  B for example
can be left out when both sealing substances for the insulated
glass are provided by the same
manufacturer or their compatibility is guaranteed accordingly.
This testing method reveals why
284 |
glazing systems that are as ‘simple’ as possible are better.
In addition, the compatibility
tests do not provide any
assessment criteria with regard
to generally binding specifications; i.e. to what extend a test
result is relevant for the behaviour in practice of the system.
If required, various other test
methods should be used.
Consequently, it becomes
obvious that for compatibility
testing considerable experience and comprehensive
knowledge is required in order
to minimise the risk of harmful
interactions.
n
Compatibility testing in
practice
In practice, the different components of a glazing system are
rarely supplied by the same
manufacturer. However, only in
such a case the manufacturer
will be able to provide binding
information and guarantees
with regard to compatibility of
the components. In case of
modifications in the combination of substances, the manufacturer has the possibility to
test the compatibility behaviour
of their products again and is
thus able to ensure that their
customers do not run the risk
of changed compatibility behaviour.
If the components are supplied
by different manufacturers, the
test results may only refer to
the tested product batches and
therefore are not generally
applicable and binding. The
test result cannot necessarily
be applied to other product
batches since a possible
change in material combination
may not be communicated in
time and can therefore not be
considered. As a consequence, there will never be a
list of compatible material combinations without underlying
contractual agreements.
A generally obliging guarantee
for compatibility of products by
different manufacturers requires a corresponding bilateral
agreement between the suppliers involved and the purchaser of the products. As long
as no standardised requirements are established for the
components this is the only
way to ensure compatibility.
The responsibility for compatibility in combinations with different materials shall generally be
borne by the entity combining
the materials to form a
‘system’. The suppliers of the
‘semi-finished products’ are
not responsible for this.
However, this aspect does not
preclude the suppliers from
providing advice and/or technical support (testing) to their
customers. Practical implementation of information in
constructions and analysis of
the test results will still remain
the responsibility of the entity
creating a system.
In this context we would like to
point out the importance of
joint dimensions, what effects
the curing behaviour of the
sealing material has and what
harmful interactions may occur
due to that. Therefore it is
important to ensure compatibility of the involved components
for every specific case of application for the purpose of prevention of harmful interactions.
10.8.5 For prevention of faults in practice
n
General Information
The basic requirement for combination of several materials to form
one ‘system’ is the so-named
‘system test’ that serves for verification of compatibility of all components that are combined with
each other with regard to functionality and suitability for use.
Rebuttable presumptions of
compatibility are not sufficient for
this purpose. The entity that is
ultimately responsible for this verification of functionality of the
system is the ‘manufacturer of
the system’. The term ‘manufacturer of the system’ refers to the
entity that join all the components, e.g. installation of insulated
glass into a frame construction.
For construction of a ‘system’ a
‘simple’ design is preferred since
with increasing numbers of com-
ponents the risk of potential
incompatibility is increased correspondingly.
The risk of harmful interactions
can be ruled out in conditions
where the contact of substances
is prevented. An adequately
designed air gap, for example,
may inhibit the transfer of substances. If an air gap is not possible due to technical aspects,
appropriate ‘migration inhibitors’
such as metal foils or suitable
back-filling materials may be
integrated to block the path of
material transport and ensure
compatibility. It goes without
saying that with such constructive measures it must be ensured that they do not have an
other negative effects.
| 285
10
The frequently tried and tested
method of fixing the glazing
blocks by means of sealing
materials may represent a risk
in regard that such products
are often not selected by the
criterion of product compatibili-
ty. In this context, the question
arises whether other solutions
may be found for fixing of glazing blocks so that the use of a
critical component in a system
can be ruled out.
10.8.6 Summary
Complicated combinations of
materials require detailed planning and careful execution. All
parties involved in this process
(suppliers, ‘planners and manufacturers of systems’) must
synchronise with each other. If
all products are not provided by
the same supplier, the measures described above must be
undertaken. Due to the complexity of these systems it
seems reasonable to implement a method that is already
mandatory under building regulations as is the case in other
areas of glass construction, for
example for fire protection glazing. In this field it is common
to exactly define in the ‘system
specification’ what components are going to be used an
in what way they are allowed to
be installed and used. Every
supplier must undertake to
supply their component(s) in
accordance with the ‘system
test’ and the specifications
defined therein. Any change of
a component must only be carried out if it is ensured that the
change does not jeopardise the
validity of the ‘system test’.
10.8.7 Literature (Only available in German language)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
DIN 52 460, ‘Fugen- und Glasabdichtungen – Begriffe’ [Sealings for
joints and glass - concepts], Edition 2002-2, Beuth-Verlag, Berlin
H. Brook, ‘Wechselwirkungen von Dichtstoffen’ [Interactions of sealing
materials], ‘Glas-Fenster-Fassade’, (1998), Issue 6, Page 329 ff
Technische Richtlinien des Glaserhandwerks, Schrift Nr. 1, [Technical
regulations of the glaziers trade, script no. 1] ‘Dichtstoffe für Verglasungen und Anschlussfugen’ [Sealing materials for glazing and joints]
regulations of the glaziers trade, script no. 3]
‘Klotzung von Verglasungseinheiten’ [Block setting of glazing units]
‘Verglasen mit Dichtprofilen’ [Glazing with sealing profiles]
‘Verglasen mit Isolierglas’ [Glazing with insulating glass]
ift regulation VE-05/01 ‘Nachweis der Verträglichkeit von
Verglasungsklötzen’ [Verification of compatibility of glazing blocks]
R. Oberacker, ‘Die Verträglichkeit von Dichtstoffen:
Ein neues Problem?’ [Compatibility of sealing materials: A new problem?], ‘Glaswelt’ (2002), Issue 12, Page 28 ff
Dimensioning
10.9.1 Frame deflection
The frame construction must
be dimensioned such as not to
exceed the deflection limits
defined in the ‘Technical rules
for glazing with linear support’
(TRLV), issue August 2006, of
the Deutsches Institut für
Bautechnik (DIBt, Berlin).
The glass-carrying construction
must be executed such that it
is free of warp and guarantees
a flat, level support.
10.9.2 Glass thickness dimensioning
Insulating glass must be
dimensioned according to the
‘Technical rules for glazing with
linear support’ (TRLV), in the
prevailing version, of the
Deutsches
Institut
für
Bautechnik (DIBt, Berlin). If a fall
height of more than one metre
exists for the glazing, then the
‘Technical rules for safety barrier glazing’ (TRAV), January
2003, must also be observed. If
the choice of glass type, given
loads and/or support types do
not comply with the technical
rules, then individual case
approval must be granted from
the
competent
authority.
Alongside the structural analyses, this individual case
approval normally also involves
proof by calculation and even
dynamic component tests, if
necessary. Details on the
requirements are to be clarified
with the competent building
authority or other competent
authorities.
The client is responsible for the
correct glass thickness dimensioning.
10
286 |
| 287
10.10 Special Applications
10.10.1 Inclined glass installation, overhead glazing
Overhead glazing, glazing of
shed roofs and similar applications are subject to greater
thermal and mechanical stresses (wind, snow and ice loads as
well as dead weight) than vertical insulating glazing.
The designer decides upon the
use of special glasses and the
glass structure. Overhead, roof
or tilted glazing must satisfy
special safety regulations. The
glass structure must be agreed
upon in an individual case basis
between the designer and local
building authorities.
For tilted insulating glazing,
there is a series of proven
designs with system-specific,
sealant-free glazing systems
available.
Full, gapless filling of the rebate
is not permitted. The criteria
described must be observed
precisely.
from a building authority in
each individual case.
An exposed edge seal must be
protected against UV radiation
by suitable measures (e.g.
cover strips, enamelling or similar). If such protective measures are omitted, then the
edge seal of the insulating glass
unit must be built out of UVresistant sealant.
Gas-filled insulating glass units
with a UV-resistant edge seal
are possible with a UNIGLAS®
test certificate.
The glazing depth of the insulating glass unit into the construction should not exceed 15
mm, so as to keep the thermal
stresses in the marginal zone of
the pane to a minimum.
Setting blocks should be
installed in overhead glazing as
a matter of principle.
The support structure for the
glazing must be suitable for the
special application area of overhead glazing. It must have a
Shore-A hardness of 60° – 70°
in order to create a permanently elastic support. A strip of
glazing tape is not a support
gasket. Contact with metal in
the rebate is not permitted (e.g.
with bolts, brackets etc.).
We recommend using silicone gasket lips (exception:
UNIGLAS® | CLEAN and UNIGLAS® | ECONTROL). This
allows problem points to be
sealed with silicone. No permanent seal is possible on EPDM
gaskets.
If a continuous insulating glass
unit is not possible due to the
dimensions, then we recommend designing a structural
joint. The edge seal must be
made of UV-resistant material
(silicone).
One design is recommended:
n
All overhead glazing must be
executed according to the
‘Technical rules for glazing with
linear support ’ (TRLV), issue
August 2006. These rules also
list permissible glass types.
If these technical rules shall not
or cannot be adhered to, then
approval must be obtained
Care must be taken to attach
the cover sections with an even
contact pressure of 20 N/cm
edge length. To adhere to this
requirement, we recommend
using spacer strips or sleeves
according to the glass thickness and gaskets. The glazing
beads must be arranged on the
outside as a rule.
Special silicone gasket covering the joint
The materials must be tested
for compatibility with one
another.
Exposed glass edges, especially in the case of insulating
glass with stepped edges,
should be arrised. If the outer
pane of the insulating glass unit
is used as an eaves edge, then
this is only possible when executed as insulating glass with
stepped edge, in which case it
is recommended that the outer
pane is made of single-pane
safety glass (SSG).
Experience has shown that
deep shadows lead to an
increased risk of glass breakage. Accordingly, this must be
considered when choosing the
type of glass. In such cases,
we recommend using toughened glass, both inside and
outside.
Indoor and outdoor shades
must be attached such that
sufficient air circulation can take
place on the glass surfaces.
The roof angle should be at
least 15°, in order to avoid
standing water on the sealing
system.
The free pane surface of the
glazing unit should be evenly
exposed to the indoor climate
in order to avoid temperature
differences. Insulating glass
may not be installed beyond
the design parameters.
n
Ug value
When insulating glass is tilted
off the vertical, the Ug value can
increase, especially with large
cavities.
The values given in the type
lists always refer to vertical
installation of the glazing, that is
at 90° to the horizontal.
Always ask the manufacturer
for the Ug value of the tilted
glazing for the specific tilt angle.
10
288 |
| 289
10.10.2 Glass barriers
A valid version of the ‘Technical
rules for the use of safety barrier glazing’ (TRAV) has existed
for safety barrier glazing since
2003. These rules define
requirements for safety barrier
glazing for three different fall
categories A, B and C. If the
described general conditions of
the glazing and the support
structure and substructure are
fulfilled, then there is no obligation for individual case
approval. Furthermore, these
technical rules also describe
various constructions that – if
the minimum and maximum
dimensions are adhered to –
require no testing of load-bearing capacity under impact
stress (pendulum tests).
General technical approvals
(allgemeine bauaufsichtliche
Zulassung, abZ) exist for partic-
ular constructions such as
UNIGLAS® | OVERHEAD.
For designing point-fixed glazing without individual case
approval or general technical
approval, there are the
‘Technical rules for the design
and detailing of glazing systems with point support’
(TRPV) of the Deutsches Institut
für Bautechnik (DIBt, Berlin) as
of: August 2006.
10.10.4 Ball impact-proof glazing
Glazing must satisfy increased
requirements to be ball impact
resistant. The planner must
bottom. This ensures that
absolute tightness is obtained
towards the inside of the room.
For this reason the glass retaining strips are installed from
the outside in these systems. In
any case it must be ensured
that a well-functioning vapour
pressure equalisation in the
glass rebate is obtained
towards the outside. In individual cases it may be required
to integrate an additional opening in the corners of the
glass rebate. For more detailed
information, please see the
appropriate technical regulations.
10.10.5.2 Thermal stresses
10.10.3 Point-fixed glazing
Point-fixed constructions must
be statically analysed according to the finite elements
method (FE) and the residual
load-bearing capacity tested.
As a rule, point-fixed constructions require individual case
approval.
therefore consider special
design features; see DIN
18032.
10.10.5 Glazing under Exceptional Climatic
and Thermal Loads and
Through-Tinted Glasses
Outside glazing is capable of
bearing a large amount of heat
from solar radiation, provided the
entire pane is equally heated up
and there is enough time for
thermal expansion. Problems
may occur, however, if only part
of the pane is heated up. This is
the case when, for example,
there are trees in front of a window or the blinds/shutters are
partially closed. In such situations the sun will heat up the
exposed part of the pane - particularly when it is standing low
during transition periods - and
the other part of the pane will
remain cooler due to the present
shadow - particularly after cold
nights.
With normal float glass the temperature difference between
heated and shaded parts of the
pane must be maximum 40
degrees C. If, for example, we
assume chilly morning tempera-
tures slightly above freezing temperature, solar energy will quickly heat up a pane to 40 - 50°C.
In shaded areas of the pane the
temperature will remain slightly
above 0°C. This easily results in
a temperature difference of 40
degrees C.
This phenomenon will manifest
even more extremely with
through tinted glass. According
to colour and intensity the pane
additionally absorbs a large proportion of solar energy. Which
results in the pane quickly heating up to 60°C and more. For
this reason the glass to be used
for through-tinted solar control
glazing must generally be singlepane safety glass. The thermal
properties of this type of glass
are improved and allow for Δt of
up to 200 degrees C (see Þ
page 34). This ensures protection of the glazing from the risk of
thermal breakage.
10.10.5.1 Climatic stresses
Glazing of rooms with extremely high humidity levels is subject
to specific requirements. Such
rooms include indoor pools,
breweries, dairy factories, but
also butcher’s shops, bakeries
and flower shops - to name just
a few. With such applications
there are increased requirements for tightness of the gla-
290 |
zing, the frame and the other
materials in their periphery. In
accordance with the technical
regulations of the institute of
the glaziers trade, Hadamar,
‘No. 13 - Glazing with sealing
profiles’ and ‘No. 16 - Windows
and glazed walls for indoor
pools’ such applications are
generally only permitted with
glazing with sealing free rebate
10
| 291
10.10.6 UNIGLAS® | CLEAN and UNIGLAS® | ECONTROL
There are a number of points to
observe
when
installing
UNIGLAS® | CLEAN SelfCleaning Glass with hydrophilic,
burnt-in titanium dioxide layer
and UNIGLAS® | ECONTROL
Switchable Insulating Glass.
Functional layers or cables are
to be undertaken in specific
glazing positions, for example.
The special glazing guidelines
and the manufacturer’s instructions on the pane labels must
be observed with particular
care and the installation position adhered to precisely.
It is therefore recommended
that clean protective gloves are
worn that have not come into
contact with silicone materials.
Also, no silicone spray may be
used to treat the fittings.
To clean this glass, the usual
cleaning methods and materials for glass apply. Abrasive
cleaning agents are unsuitable.
Pollution during the building
phase must be removed immediately with plenty of clean
water.
Direct contact between silicone/silicone oil and the glazing must be avoided.
50 N/cm.
The minimum free rebate height
is 6 mm. The following must be
observed when laying the control cables in the frame construction:
1. All cable bushings within and
towards the frame construction must exist before the
frame is installed and must
be free of burring and/or
equipped with appropriate
protective insulation.
2. All casements must have a
protected cable transition to
the frame (see the illustrations on the side).
The following is to be avoided:
n
Point stresses
n
Contact
between
the
UNIGLAS® | ECONTROL
pane and thermally conductive materials (e.g. metal)
n
UV exposure to the edge
seal
10.10.6.1 Correct use of self-cleaning glass
Even products using the
UNIGLAS® | CLEAN self-cleaning glass require care and
maintenance by the user.
In addition to regular cleaning
of the frame, this also includes
cleaning the glass, although at
longer intervals than for conventional glass.
The glass must never come
into contact with materials containing silicone during its entire
service life. This applies, for
example, to spray mist from
sprays containing silicone or
subsequent sealing work.
Cable bushing frame – sash
Cable bushing
10.10.6.2.1 Frame dimensions
10.10.6.2 General structural requirements for electrochromic glass
The frames of the UNIGLAS® |
ECONTROL pane must offer a
flat support for the glass.
Usually, this requires glazing
beads running all the way
around, either on the room side
or on the outside. The maximum value for the calculated
deflection of the frame parts,
mullions or transoms perpendicular to the window wall
plane is 1/200 of the decisive
292 |
span of the pane length to be
supported, but no more than
15 mm. The least favourable
stress conditions must be
assumed (wind, snow, traffic
loads or deadweight). In the
main area of a pane (middle of
the pane), the maximum deflection is limited to 8 mm. The maximum contact pressure on the
edge of UNIGLAS® | ECONTROL panes must not exceed
Individual dimensions for the
minimum requirements placed
on the frame cross section.
Short designation Dimension [mm]
a1
a2
g
s
h
4
4
≥ 16 to ≤ 20
≥5
≥ 21
10
| 293
Short designations according to DIN 18454 Part 1
e
a2
s
g
a1
c
h
t
b
d
outside
inside
b Glazing rebate width
c Contact width of the glazing
bead
d Width of the glazing bead
e Thickness of the glazing unit
g Glazing depth
(acc. to DIN 18545, Part 1, as a
general rule the glass penetrates
into the glazing rebate by 2/3 of
the glazing rebate upstand, yet
20 mm should not be exceeded)
h Glazing rebate upstand
s Clearance between pane and
glazing rebate base
t Total rebate width
10.10.6.2.2 Production-related characteristics
According to the current state
of the art in the production of
electrochromic architectural
glass,
non-electrochromic
points of up to 3 mm diameter
and at a surface density of 3
points per m2 cannot be ruled
out. These are not grounds for
complaint.
10.10.6.3 UNIGLAS® | CLEAN and UNIGLAS® | ECONTROL
in different systems/constructions
10.10.6.3.1 Wet glazing
Instead of the commonly used
silicones, alternative sealants
that have been approved by
the manufacturer must be used
for wet glazing. Corresponding
information for the processor
must be obtained from the
glass manufacturers.
10.10.6.3.2 Dry glazing
In dry glazing, gaskets are often
treated with silicone oils to
improve processing. This is not
permitted in the case of photocatalytic, hydrophilic or electrochromic products, since
such silicone oils have high
creep properties and will annul
the glazing function. Most gasket manufacturers offer dry or
alternatively lubricated gaskets
(with talcum, glycerine, lubricating polymers or lubricating
294 |
coatings) that are compatible
with such glass types.
Should gaskets without lubricant be used, then the processor can make them slipperier
using soapsuds, glycerine or
similar. No installation spray (silicone oil) may be used.
10.10.6.3.3 Overhead glazing gasket
Normal silicone gaskets are
unsuitable. Silicone gaskets
that have been specially treated
may be used in conjunction
with
self-cleaning
glass.
Nevertheless, care must be
taken to ensure the adhesion is
silicone-free. These systems
are also approved by the glass
manufacturer.
10.10.6.3.4 Facade systems
The above rules for use of selfcleaning glass also generally
apply to facade construction.
However, facades usually have
more stringent requirements in
terms of seal tightness and
durability of seals than windows.
When replacing silicones with
alternative materials, it must be
checked in each case whether
the necessary performance is
achieved for the respective
application. It must be particularly noted that larger movements at joints and possibly
greater stresses from direct
weathering (UV exposure, temperature and humidity) can
occur in the case of facades
than as would be expected
with windows.
If no silicone-free alternatives
are possible, then the use of silicone must first be discussed
with the glass manufacturer if
contact with the glass coating
is a possibility. Such applications can lead to significant
impairment of function in the
contact area. In order to minimise impairments of function,
there are two points to observe
in particular:
n
Strict care must be taken
that no dirt is transferred
from the hands onto the surfaces of the self-cleaning
glass.
n
It must be ensured that rainwater cannot come into contact with silicone-containing
joints and bonds.
This applies in particular to a
special case of facade construction known as ‘structural
sealant glazing’, where the
connecting joint between glass
and frame is load-bearing and
often also an expanding sealing
joint.
Accordingly, as a rule when
constructing facades, the
design must be coordinated
with all parties involved in the
system.
10.10.6.3.5 Butt joints
The ‘butt joint’ between selfcleaning glass panes should
also never be made with silicone under any circumstances. Typical solutions are
alternative sealants. In any
case, the sealant manufacturer
must be consulted in order to
clarify compatibility and functionality issues.
10
| 295
10.10.7 Ornamental and wired glass
Ornamental and wired glass
must be installed according to
the applicable building regulations.
10.11 Special Structural Conditions
When it comes to glazing,
installed glazing units can suffer
damage that is not covered by
our warranty.
The processor should therefore
observe the following notes,
recommendations and regulations:
10.11.1 Radiators
A distance of 30 cm should be
maintained between radiators
and insulating glass as a rule. If
this distance cannot be maintained, then a pane of single
safety glass (SSG) should be
placed in between for safety
reasons.
This can be installed without a
frame and must be at least the
same size of the radiator.
If the pane of the insulating
glass facing the radiator is
already made of single safety
glass, then the distance can be
reduced to 15 cm.
10.11.2 Mastic asphalt
When pouring mastic asphalt in
rooms with glazed windows,
the insulating glass units must
be protected against the resulting high temperature stresses.
If strong sunlight is also expect-
ed, then a weather-side cover
must also be added.
This applies in particular to
thermal insulating glass.
10.11.3 Paints, interlays, posters
Applying paints, interlays or
posters can lead to heat cracks
under sunlight. The risk of
breakage is reduced by using
single safety glass.
10.11.4 Interior shading systems, furniture
Interior shading systems and
furniture must be placed at a
sufficient distance from the
glazing in order to prevent heat
build-up.
10.11.5 Sliding doors and windows with thermal insulating
glass and solar control glass
With these types of glazing, care
must be taken to ensure sufficient air circulation between the
pane elements if the sashes slide
in front of each other. Under
strong sunlight, the panes can
296 |
heat up greatly. This can lead to
thermally-induced breakage.
10.12 Notes on Product Liability and
Warranty
10.12.1 Guideline to assess the visible quality of glass in
buildings
Bundesinnungsverband des Glaserhandwerks (Federal Association of
German Glazing Guilds), Hadamar | Bundesverband der Jungglaser und
Fensterbauer e.V. (Federal Association of Young Glaziers and
Windowmakers) | Bundesverband Flachglas e.V. (Federal Association of Flat
Glass), Troisdorf | Bundesverband Glasindustrie und Mineralfaserindustrie e.V.
(Federal Association of the German Glass Industry), Düsseldorf | Verband der
Fenster- und Fassadenhersteller e.V. (Association of Window and Facade
Manufacturers), Frankfurt.
This guideline was developed by the technical consultative committee of the
Institut des Glaserhandwerks für Verglasungstechnik und Fensterbau
(Institute of the Glazing Trade for Glazing Technology and Window
Manufacture), Hadamar and the technical committee of the Bundesverband
Flachglas (Federal Association of Flat Glass), Troisdorf. As of: May 2009.
10.12.1.1 Scope
This guideline applies to
assessment of the visible quality of glass in buildings (used in
building shells and in finishing
of buildings / structures). The
assessment is made according
to the following testing principles with the help of the permitted discrepancies listed in the
table in Section 10.12.1.3.
filled cavity or in the laminate,
glass products using ornamental glass, wired glass, special
safety glazing , fire-resistant
glazing and non-transparent
glass products. These glass
products are to be assessed
depending on the materials
used, the production processes and the relevant information
from the manufacturer.
Glass surfaces which remain
visible after installation are subject to assessment. Glass
products constructed with
coated glass panes, tinted
glass, laminated glass or
toughened glass (single safety
glass, heat-strengthened glass)
can also be assessed with the
help of the table in Section
10.2.9.7.3.
The assessment of the visible
quality of the edges of glass
products is not the subject of
this guideline. The rebate zone
does not apply as an assessment criterion to edges without
frames in constructions that are
not framed on all sides. The
intended use must be indicated
in the order.
The guideline does not apply
for specially-constructed glass
units, such as glass units with
elements installed in the gas-
Special conditions should be
agreed upon for inspecting the
outward appearance of glass in
facades.
This risk of breakage can be
reduced by using single safety
glass.
10
| 297
10.12.1.2 Testing
In testing, visibility through the
pane, i.e. the view of the background, is the generally applicable criterion, not the appearance in reflection. The discrepancies may not be specially
marked.
The glazing units are to be tested according to the table in
section 10.12.1.3 from a distance of minimum 1 metre from
the inside to the outside at an
angle which corresponds to the
normal usage of the room. The
test is carried out under diffused daylight conditions (e.g.
overcast sky), without direct
sunlight or artificial illumination.
Glazing units in rooms (indoor
glazing) are to be inspected
with normal (diffused) illumination intended for the use of the
rooms at a viewing angle that is
preferably vertical to the surface.
If glazing is assessed from the
outside, they must be examined in installed condition, taking into consideration the usual
viewing distance. Inspection
conditions and viewing distances taken from requirements in product standards for
the viewed glazing may differ
from these and are not taken
into consideration by this
guideline. The inspection conditions described in these product standards often cannot
adhered to at the building.
10.12.1.3 Permitted discrepancies for the visible quality of
glass in buildings
n
Table prepared for coated or uncoated float glass, singlepane safety glass, heat-strengthened glass, laminated
glass, laminated safety glass
Zone
R
E
M
E+M
The following are permitted per unit:
External shallow damage to the edge or conchoidal fractures which do
not affect the glass strength and which do not project beyond the with
of the edge seal.
Internal conchoidal fractures without loose shards, which are filled by the
sealant.
Unlimited spots or patches of residue or scratches.
Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains, etc.:
Pane area ≤ 1 m2:
max. 4 cases, each < 3 mm Ø
Pane area > 1 m2:
per metre of perimeter
Residues (spots) in the gas-filled cavity:
Pane area ≤ 1 m2:
Pane area > 1 m2:
per metre of perimeter
Residues (patches) in the gas-filled cavity:
max. 1 case ≤ 3 cm2
Scratches:
Total of individual lengths:
max. 90 mm – individual length: max. 30 mm
Hair-line scratches: not allowed in higher concentration
Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains etc.:
Pane area ≤ 1 m2:
1 m2 < Pane area ≤ 2 m2:
Pane area > 2 m2:
Scratches:
Total of individual lengths:
max. 45 mm – individual length: max. 15 mm
Maximum number of permitted discrepancies as in zone E
Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains etc. of 0.5 to 1.0 mm are permitted
without any area-related limitation, except when they appear in higher
concentration. ‘Higher concentration’ means at least 4 inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains, etc. are located within a diameter of ≤ 20 cm.
Comments:
Discrepancies ≤ 0.5 mm will not be
taken into account. The optically distorted fields they cause may not be
more than 3 mm in diameter.
Allowances for triple-layer thermal
insulating glass, laminated glass
and laminated safety glass:
The permitted frequency of discrepancies in the zones E and M increases
by 25 % of the aforementioned values
298 |
per additional glass unit and per laminated glass pane. The results are
always rounded up.
Single-pane safety glass, heatstrengthened glass, laminated
glass and laminated safety glass
made from single-pane safety
glass and/or heat-strengthened
glass:
1.Local roller wave distortion on the
glass surface (except for ornamental single safety glass and ornamen-
| 299
10
tal heat-strengthened glass) may
not exceed 0.3 mm in relation to a
length of 300 mm.
2.The warp relative to the total glass
edge length (except for ornamental
single-pane safety glass and orna-
mental heat-strengthened glass)
may not be greater than 3 mm per
1000 mm glass edge length.
Greater warps may occur for square
or near square formats (up to 1:1.5)
and for single panes with a nominal
thickness < 6 mm.
Fig. 1: Zones in glass
E
M
E
Pane height
main zone M
Clear height dimension h
E
main zone M
10.12.1.4.1.1 Intrinsic colour
R
R
width between sight lines w
E
safety glazing, the particular
specifications are to be
assessed on the basis of the
function and the installation situation. In assessing certain
properties, the product-specific
characteristics are to be
observed.
10.12.1.4.1 Visible properties of glazing products
pane width
R
The multitude of diverse glazing
products means that the table
in section 10.1.3 cannot be
applied without restrictions. In
some
circumstances,
an
assessment referring to the
specific product is necessary.
In such cases, e.g. for special
All materials used in glazing
products have an intrinsic
colour. This is determined by
the raw materials and becomes
increasingly
evident
with
increasing thickness. Coated
glass is used for functional reasons. Coated glass also has its
own intrinsic colour. This intrinsic colour can differ for transmittance and/or reflectance.
Fluctuations in the colour
impression are possible due to
the iron oxide content of the
glass, the coating process, the
coat itself, variation in the glass
thickness and the unit construction, and cannot be avoided.
E
10.12.1.4.1.2 Differences in colour for coatings
R = Rebate zone:
the visually concealed area in the
installed state (no limits on discrepancies, with the exception of mechanical
damage to the edges)
R
F
E = Edge zone:
Area making up 10% of the respective clear width and height dimensions
(less strict assessment)
M = Main zone:
(Strictest assessment)
10.12.1.4 General comments
The guideline is a measure for
assessing the visible quality of
glass in building. In assessing
an installed glazing product, it
is assumed that, in addition to
the visible quality, the characteristics required for the glazing
product to fulfil its function will
also be taken account.
The characteristic values of
glazing products such as
300 |
sound insulation, thermal conductivity and light transmission
values which are documented
for the corresponding function,
refer to test panes as specified
by the applicable testing standard. Other pane dimensions
and combinations, installation
types and external influences
can result in differences to the
specified values and optical
impressions.
An objective assessment of the
differences in colour with coatings requires the difference in
colour to be measured or
examined under conditions that
have been exactly defined previously (glass type, colour, illuminant). Such an assessment
cannot be the subject of this
guideline. (For further information see the ‘Farbgleichheit
transpatenter
Gläser
im
Bauwesen’ code of practice
published by the Verband der
Fensterund
Fassadenhersteller e.V. (Association of
Window and Facade Manufacturers).
10.12.1.4.1.3 Assessment of the visible section of the edge
seal of the insulating glass unit
Features on the glass and
spacer resulting from production processes can be recognisable in insulating glass units
in the visible section of the
edge seal. By definition, this
section is not included in the
area between the sight lines
that is subject to assessment. If
the edge seal of the insulating
glass unit is exposed on one or
more sides due to the design
requirements, features resulting
from production processes
may be visible in the area of
edge seal.
The permissible deviation of the
spacer (s) in relation to the parallel straight glass edge or to
other spacers (e.g. in triple
insulating glass) is 4 mm up to
an edge length of 2.5 m. For
longer edge lengths the permissible deviation is 6 mm. For
double insulating glass, the tolerance of the spacer is 4 mm
up to an edge length of 3.5 m
| 301
10
and 6 mm for longer edge
lengths. If the edge seal of the
insulating glass unit is exposed
due to design requirements,
typical features of the edge seal
may become visible that are
not covered by this guideline. In
such cases individual arrangements must be agreed on.
10.12.1.5 In Austria, OENORM B 3738 applies instead of the
guideline to assess the visible quality of glass in
buildings.
n
Permitted discrepancies for insulating glass units made of float glass
Zone
10.12.1.4.1.4 Insulating glass units with internal muntins
Due to climatic influences (e.g.
insulated glass effect), shocks
or manually-created vibrations,
temporary clapping noise may
occur in the muntins.
within the glazing zones, the
manufacturing and installation
tolerances and the overall
impression are to be taken into
account.
Visible saw cuts and the slight
removal of paint near the saw
cuts are caused by the production process.
Effects of temperature-related
changes in the lengths of
muntins in the gas-filled cavity
are fundamentally unavoidable.
Misalignment
of
muntins
caused by production cannot
be ruled out.
In assessing deviations from
right angles and misalignment
10.12.1.4.1.5 Damage to external surfaces
The cause of mechanical or
chemical damage to the external
surfaces recognised after installation must be determined.
These discrepancies can be
assessed according to the criteria of section 10.1.3.
In addition, the following standards and guidelines also apply:
n
Technical guidelines of the
glazing trade
n
VOB/C ATV DIN 18 361
‘Glazing work’
n
Product standards that apply
n
Interference effects
302 |
R
to the viewed glazing products
n
Code of practice for cleaning
of glass, issued by the
Bundesverband Flachglas
e.V. (Federal Sheet Glass
Association) amongst others
n
Guidelines on handling insulating glass, issued by the
Bundesverband Flachglas
e.V. (Federal Sheet Glass
Association), amongst others.
as well as the relevant technical
information and valid manufacturers’ instructions for installation.
10.12.1.4.1.6 Physical properties
Some inevitable physical phenomena that occur in the visible
glass surface may not be taken
into account when assessing
the visible quality. These phenomena are:
F
n
Effects specific to insulating
glass
n
Anisotropy
n
Condensation on the external surfaces of the panes
n
Wettability of glass surfaces.
H
The following are permitted per unit (double insulating glass)
See figure 1
External shallow damage to the edge or conchoidal fractures which do not
affect the glass strength and which do not project beyond the with of the edge
seal.
Internal conchoidal fractures without loose shards, which are filled by the
sealant.
Unlimited spots or patches of residue or scratches.
Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains and similar:
Pane area
Number
Diameter
≤ 1 m2
max. 4 defects
≤ 3 mm
> 1 m2
max. 1 defect with Ø ≤ 3 mm per circ. metre
Residues (spot) in the gas-filled cavity:
≤ 1 m2
max. 4 defects
≤ 3 mm
> 1 m2
max. 1 defect with Ø ≤ 3 mm per circ. metre
Residues (patches) in the gas-filled cavity (whitish grey or transparent):
up to 5 m2
max. 1 defect
≤ 3 mm
for every additional 5 m2
1 defect
≤ 3 mm
Scratches:
Area of the pane
Individual length
Sum of individual lengths
up to 5 m2
max. 30 mm
max. 90 mm
> 5 m2
max. 30 mm
prop. extrapolation
Note:
‘Proportional extrapolation’ refers to the ‘sum of all individual lengths’ and not to
their size or individual length.
Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains and similar:
Area of the pane
Number
Diameter
≤ 1 m2
max. 2 defects
≤ 2 mm
> 1 m2 ≤ 2 m2
max. 3 defects
≤ 2 mm
> 2 m2 ≤ 5 m2
max. 5 defects
≤ 2 mm
> 5 m2
prop. extrapolation
≤ 2 mm
Note: ‘Proportional extrapolation’ refers to the ‘number of individual defects’ for
pane areas of > 2 m2 to ≤ 5 m2 and not to the maximum size.
Scratches:
Area of the pane
Individual length
Diameter
up to 5 m2
max. 15 mm
max. 40 mm
> 5 m2
max. 15 mm
prop. extrapolation
Note: ‘Proportional extrapolation’ refers to the ‘sum of all individual lengths’ of
the defects and not to their size or individual length.
Discrepancies ≤ 0.5 mm will not be
taken into account. The optically distorted fields they cause may not be
more than 3 mm in diameter.
The permitted frequency of discrepancies for triple insulating glass is
increased by 50% and for quadruple
insulating glass by 100%.
| 303
10
Laminated glass and laminated
safety glass:
1. The permitted frequency of discrepancies for zone F and zone M
increases by 50% for every additional laminated glass unit.
2. In cast-in-place glass, productionrelated formation of waves may occur.
Single-pane safety glass (SSG) and
heat-strengthened glass:
1. Local distortion on the glass surface must not exceed 0.5 mm in
relation to a measured length of
300 mm.
2. In SSG with a nominal thickness
between 3 and 19 mm and in
heat-strengthened glass made of
float glass with a nominal thickness
between 3 and 12 mm, general
distortion in relation to the length
of the edges or the diagonal must
not exceed 3 mm per 1000 mm.
3. If laminated glass or laminated
safety glass is manufactured from
toughened units or heat-strengthened units, the distortion values
stated above must be increased
by 50%.
10.12.2 Guideline for handling insulating glass
Focus: Transport, storage and installation
Bundesverband Flachglas e.V. (Federal Sheet Glass Association), Troisdorf
with contributions from: Bundesinnungsverband des Glaserhandwerks
(Federal Association of German Glazing Guilds), Hadamar | Fachverband
Glas Fenster Fassade Baden-Württemberg (Baden-Württemberg Professional
Glass, Window and Facade Association), Karlsruhe | Verband der Fensterund Fassadenhersteller (Association of Window and Facade Manufacturers)
Frankfurt | FlachglasMarkenkreis GmbH, Gelsenkirchen | Gluske-BKV GmbH,
Wuppertal | Interpane Glasindustrie AG, Lauenförde | Isolar-Glas-Beratung
GmbH, Kirchberg | Pilkington Deutschland AG, Gladbeck | Schollglas,
Barsinghausen | Glas Trösch GmbH, Nördlingen
As of: 2008
10.12.2.2 Scope
This guideline applies to:
n
Transport
n
Storage
n
Installation
for the use of insulating glass
units according to EN 1279.
This guideline describes the
required measures for permanently maintaining tightness
and functionality of the edge
seal. Physical functionality within the construction, mechanical
properties, elements installed in
the unit cavity, optical features,
and glass breakage are not
subject of this guideline. This
guideline is legally binding
when the manufacturer of the
insulating glass or the contracting partner mention it in their
GTC or if the contracting partners agree on the guideline for
specific cases. It does not
replace any standards, technical directives, or legal provisions for the use of insulating
glass. Some pieces of vital
technical information are listed
at the end of this guideline.
Edge seal in insulating glass
b
a
10.12.2.1 Introduction
An insulating glass unit consists
of minimum two glass panes
that are joined with each other
by means of an edge seal that
hermetically seals the enclosed
unit cavity against the atmosphere.
An insulating glass unit is a
completely assembled component for use in the construction
industry with circumferential linear support on at least two
sides [1]; [2].
The manufacturer of the window or the facade is generally
responsible for the functionality
of their product with correct
use.
This guideline takes as prerequisite that transport, storage
and installation is only carried
out by qualified persons.
Area ‘a’ (glass end cover on the weather side) is the height between the glass
edge and the look-through area of the insulating glass.
Regardless of requirements in standards for the penetration area of the glass, it
must be avoided that natural daylight impacts on the areas ‘a’ or ‘b’. If required,
the insulating glass unit must be ordered with a UV-resistant edge seal or the
edge seal must be protected from UV radiation.
10
304 |
| 305
10.12.2.3 General requirements
The edge seal must not be
damaged. Protection of the
edge seal is a mandatory prerequisite for maintenance of
functionality. Any damaging
influences must be avoided.
This applies for storage, transport, and installation from the
date of delivery.
Damaging influences may be:
n
Permanent formation
water on the edge seal
n
UV radiation
n
Unintended
stresses
n
Incompatible materials
n
Extreme temperatures
e.g. point-supported or glued
systems, are not included in
this guideline. These systems
must comply with further
requirements with regard to
edge seal constructions.
of
10.12.2.6 Setting blocks
mechanical
The setting block is the interface between glass and frame.
Setting block methods are
explained in [3].
etting block technology
10.12.2.4 Transport, storage and handling
Panes are generally transported on racks or in boxes.
10.12.2.4.1 Transport on racks
The panes must be secured on
the racks for transport.
However, no impermissible
pressure from the securing
device must act on the glass
pane.
10.12.2.4.2 Transport in boxes
With regards to boxes as lightweight packaging that is not
designed for impact by static or
dynamic loads, it must be tested on an individual case basis
how the boxes can be handled
or if the use of transport ropes
is required or possible, for
example.
Temporary or permanent storage may only be in a vertical
position on suitable racks or
equipment. If several panes are
stored together, intermediate
layers (e.g. intermediate paper,
intermediate buffer, stacking
layers) are required.
Generally, insulating glass units
must be protected from damaging chemical or physical
impacts on the construction
site.
For outdoor storage, insulating
glass must be protected from
long-lasting humidity impacts
or from solar radiation by
means of suitable full covers.
Glazing block
The purpose of setting blocks
is to ensure a free glazing
rebate space for maintenance
of vapour pressure equalisation
(long-term condensation), for
aeration and possibly also for
water drainage. For the installation of insulating glass, suitable
glazing blocks and/or bridge
blocks should always be used.
All panes of an insulating glass
unit must be set in glazing
blocks according to the recognised rules of engineering [3].
The design, materials, size and
shape are defined in guidelines
[3] or determined by information from the setting block
manufacturer.
Setting blocks may be produced from suitable wood,
plastic or any other suitable
material; they must have
appropriate permanent compression strength and must not
cause breakage or chipping of
the glass edges.
Setting blocks must not
change their properties or the
properties of the insulating
glass during the period of use
due to any sealing and adhesion substances that is used or
through humidity, extreme temperatures or other influences so
that their function is impaired.
10.12.2.5 Installation
Every glass element must be
inspected for damage after
delivery and before installation.
Damaged elements must not
be used. Normally, insulating
glass is used as infilling elements, i.e. they have no load306 |
bearing function. It must be
provided for that the panes can
distribute their natural weight
and any external loads acting
on them to the frame or the
glass support construction.
Any deviating glazing systems,
10
| 307
10.12.2.7 Mechanical stresses
In an installed condition, the
insulating glass is affected by
dynamic and permanent loads
such as wind, snow, jostling
crowds, etc. These loads are
distributed to the support
structures
(frame),
which
results in bending of the support structures and the edge of
the glass.
This bending movement causes shearing forces in the edge
seal of the insulating glass. In
order for the permanent tight-
ness of the edge seal not to be
endangered, the following limits
must be considered:
Bending edge seal of the insulating glass perpendicular to
the plate level in the area of an
edge must not be more than
1/200 of the glass edge length,
but max. 15 mm with maximum
stress. The frames must be
appropriately designed for this
purpose.
10.12.2.8 Glazing rebate, sealing and vapour equalisation
Glazing Systems that separate
the glazing rebate space from
the indoor climate have proved
successful.
For
central
European conditions, aeration
of the glazing rebate space is
carried out towards the weather side. Exchange of air
between the indoor side and
the glazing rebate space
should be prevented as far as
possible.
10.12.2.9 Standards, rules and regulations
(in their currently applicable version – applicable to German market only)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Technical rules for the use of safety barrier glazing, DIBt Berlin
Technical rules for glazing systems with linear support, DIBt Berlin
Technical Guideline No. 3 issued by the Institute of the Glaziers’ Trade,
Hadamar
Technical Guideline No. 17 by the Institute of the Glaziers’ Trade,
Hadamar
EN 1279-5, Glass in building, Insulating glass units, Evaluation of conformity
DIN 18454-1, Sealing glazing with sealants; rebate requirements; glazing
with sealants
DIN 18454-3, Sealing glazing with sealants, glazing systems
Stress categories for glazing of windows, ift guideline VE 06/01
10.12.3 Guideline for use of triple thermal insulating glass
units
Bundesverband Flachglas e. V. (Federal Sheet Glass Association), Troisdorf |
Deutsche Hutchinson GmbH, Eschborn | E C I European Chemical Industries
Ltd., Essen | Fenzi S.p.A., I-Tribiano | Flachglas MarkenKreis GmbH,
Gelsenkirchen | Glas-Fandel GmbH & Co. KG, Bitburg | Glas Trösch GmbH
Sanco Beratung, Nördlingen | Gretsch-Unitas Baubeschläge GmbH, Ditzingen |
Guardian Flachglas GmbH, Thalheim | Gütegemeinschaft MehrscheibenIsolierglas e. V., Troisdorf | H. B. Fuller Window GmbH, Lüneburg | IGK
Isolierglasklebstoffe GmbH, Hasselroth | Interpane Glasindustrie AG, Lauenförde
| Isolar-Glas-Beratung GmbH, Kirchberg | Kömmerling GmbH, Pirmasens | mkt
GmbH, Alsdorf | Pilkington Deutschland AG, Gladbeck | Saint-Gobain Glass
Deutschland GmbH, Aachen | Semcoglas Holding GmbH, Westerstede
With contributions from:
Bundesinnungsverband des Glaserhandwerks (Federal Association of German
Glazing Guilds), Hadamar | Fachverband Glas Fenster Fassade BadenWürttemberg (Baden-Württemberg Professional Glass, Window and Facade
Association), Karlsruhe | Institut für Fenstertechnik (Institute for Window
Technology), Rosenheim | Verband der Fenster- und Fassadenherstellre
(Association of Window and Facade Manufacturers), Frankfurt. As of: May 2009
10.12.3.1 Introduction
The Energieeinsparverordnung
(EnEV – German Energy Saving
Directive) is the most important
regulation with regard to an efficient use of energy in new and
existing buildings in the Federal
Republic of Germany. The
Energieeinsparverordnung
Directive) of 2007 was made in
order to implement the
European Union’s Energy
Efficiency Directive.
improvement of thermal properties of windows and facades
than ever before.
The amendment of this
Energieeinsparverordnung
Directive) adopted in 2009
tightens the required level of
energy demand by 30 %.
Triple thermal insulating glass is
a well-proven product that has
been introduced to the market
more than 10 years ago, but
has only been used in very limited applications to date.
Complying with these future
requirements will demand
many innovative products –
including in the glass, window
and facade industry. The use of
triple glazing will be a more
important contribution for the
The much larger scope of production of triple thermal insulating glass has enormous effects
on the production technology
and the quality standards that
have to be observed.
Guideline for use of triple thermal insulating glass. The
Bundesverband Flachglas e.V.
(Federal
Sheet
Glass
Association) and its members
insistently support the Federal
government’s effort for a more
efficient use of energy coming
from restricted resources.
10
308 |
| 309
The strongly extended use of
triple thermal insulating glass in
windows and facades requires
that many aspects are recognised and observed. This
guideline’s objective is to men-
tion important issues that manufacturers and fitters of triple
thermal insulating glass should
absolutely observe.
n
Improvement of the thermal
properties of the frame gaskets
n
Use of thermal insulating
glass with a thermally
improved edge seal (socalled ‘warm edge’)
10.12.3.2 Triple thermal insulating glass
n
Thermal improvement of the
glazing system e.g. by an
enlarged penetration area of
the glass.
10.12.3.2.1 Structure of triple thermal insulating glass
With triple thermal insulating
glass, Ug values that are significantly lower than 1.0 W/m2K
can be achieved. Therefore, the
structure of such a triple thermal insulating glass must contain two highly efficient heat
insulating coatings, one of
which pointing towards the
cavity.
Furthermore, both cavities
must be filled with gas.
As a standard structure, a triple
thermal insulating glass with a
glass structure 4/12/4/12/4,
with two highly efficient heat
insulating coatings (low e) on
levels 2 and 5 as well as an
argon filling in both cavities is
recommended.
In the end, the balance of heat
losses (specified by the U
value) and solar heat gains
(specified by the g value) is
decisive for saving energy by
means of insulating glass units
or the window respectively. The
balance U values for a window
are calculated as follows:
UW.eq = UW – S · g
10.12.3.2.3 Achievable U values
Triple thermal insulating glass
with the structure 4/12/4/12/4,
with two highly efficient heat
insulating coatings (low e) of
emissivity εn ~ 0.03 (state of
the art) and with an argon filling
(degree of gas filling 90%) in
both cavities achieves a Ug
value of 0.7 W/m2K if calculated according to EN 673.
Without further measures for
improvement of the thermal
properties, the following Uw
With the described standard
product for triple thermal insulating glass, a total solar energy
transition (g value) of approx.
50 % or approx. 0.50 is
achieved which might vary
slightly depending on the basic
and coated glass used in each
individual case.
10.12.3.2.5 Balance U values
10.12.3.2.2 Standard products
For standard products, the
required raw materials and
semi-finished products must be
available in large quantities.
Krypton or even xenon as filling
gases for achieving low Ug values are not available in quantities that would be sufficient for
use in triple thermal insulating
glass as a standard product.
So normally, argon will be
used.
10.12.3.2.4 Achievable g values
values result for windows with
different frame constructions
according to EN 10077-1:
2006, Table F.1:
2
n
Uf = 1.8 W/m K:
Uw = 1.2 W/m2K
n
Uf = 1.4 W/m2K:
Uw = 1.1 W/m2K
Possible measures for further
improvement of the thermal
properties of a window construction are, for example:
The coefficients S for the solar
heat gains depend on the
direction to which an insulating
glass unit or rather a window is
installed.
According to DIN-V 4108-6,
the following numerical values
are used:
n
S = 2.1 W/m2K –
orientation to the south
n
S = 1.2 W/m2K –
orientation to the east/west
n
S = 0.8 W/m2K –
orientation to the north
With these numerical values,
the following balance Uw values
are achieved for the described
standard product of a triple
thermal insulating glass with a
U value of the window frame Uf
= 1.4 W/m2K and a U value of
the window Uw = 1.1 W/m2K
(see section Þ 10.12.3.2.3).
These might vary slightly, however, depending on the basic
and coated glass used in each
individual case:
n
UW,eq = 0.05 W/m2K –
orientation to the south
n
UW,eq = 0.5 W/m2K –
orientation to the east/west
n
UW,eq = 0.7 W/m2K –
orientation to the north
10
310 |
| 311
10.12.3.2.6 Special coatings
With the help of coatings which
are particularly optimised for
use in triple thermal insulating
glass, a Ug value of 0.7 – 0.8
W/m2K and a g value of
approx. 60% or approx. 0.60
respectively is achieved in the
10.12.3.3.4 Levels of coating
described
structure.
standard
glass
The window values named
before (see Points 10.3.2.3 and
10.3.2.5) are then modified
accordingly.
It is recommended that the
coatings are placed on the two
outer panes on the side of the
cavities (layer sides 2 and 5). In
this case, it is normally not necessary to toughen the uncoated middle pane to single safety
glass (SSG).
If there is a coating on the middle pane (layer sides 3 and 5 or
2 and 4 respectively), e.g. for
influencing the g value of the
triple thermal insulating glass,
the middle pane normally has
to be toughened.
10.12.3.3 Influence factors for durability
10.12.3.3.1 Cavity width and dimensions of the pane (area,
aspect ratio)
The stress for the system
increases with the size of the
pane. The effects of double
cavities in triple thermal insulating glass at least add up in a
way that they have to be considered as one continuous cavity width. Which stresses result
from this for the glass and for
the edge seal depends on the
dimensions. Small, narrow
panes (aspect ratio 1:3) show
the highest stress for the glass
and the edge seal.
For standard applications of
triple thermal insulating glass in
a window, cavity widths of 2 x
12 mm have to be considered
as a technically suitable dimension. Smaller cavity widths lead
to higher Ug values (if argon is
used as filling gas); larger cavity
widths lead to stronger stresses for the glass and for the
edge seal.
10.12.3.3.2 Spacer bar coverage
The mechanical stresses for the
edge seal are higher with triple
thermal insulating glass. For
this reason, the spacer bar cov-
erage should be increased,
especially with narrow dimensions.
10.12.3.3.3 Dimensioning of glass
In general, all standards and
guidelines which apply to double insulating glass also apply
here. Due to the aforementioned higher stress, some special issues regarding the dimensioning of glass should be clarified by means of structural
analysis software, such as the
GLASTIK solution published by
the Bundesverband Flachglas
e.V (Federal Sheet Glass
Association). Factors that
increase the stress are, for
example, asymmetric glass
constructions or the use of
special glass, laminated glass
and laminated safety glass and
highly
absorbing
glass.
Furthermore, ornamental or
wired glass features a lower
mechanical strength than float
glass. If ornamental glass and
highly absorbing glass is used
as a middle pane, it should be
toughened.
10.12.3.3.5 Special functions
The experiences made with
double thermal insulating glass
cannot simply be transferred to
triple thermal insulating glass.
Combinations with special
functions such as safety (over-
head glazing, safety barrier
glazing), sound protection,
solar protection etc. have special requirements.
10.12.3.3.5.1 Safety (overhead glazing, safety barrier glazing)
The technical rules for the use
of safety barrier glazing and for
glazing systems with linear
support, TRLV and TRAV, do
not mention triple thermal insulating glass explicitly. According
to the Bundesverband Flachglas e.V. (Federal Sheet Glass
Association), the requirements
generally formulated for ‘multipane thermal insulating glass ’
apply to both. double and triple
thermal
insulating
glass.
Attack-resistant glazing (antivandal, anti-bandit and bulletresistant glazing) and fire-resistant glazing has to be approved
on an case-by-case basis.
10.12.3.3.5.2 Sound reduction
Sound reduction properties can
be combined with the heat
insulating properties of triple
thermal insulating glass. With
the asymmetric constructions
typical for sound insulating
glass, the stress on the thinner,
outer glass pane is increased
significantly. Therefore, it is recommended to toughen the
glass to single-pane safety
glass (SSG) for edge lengths of
up to approx. 70 cm.
10.12.3.3.5.3 Solar control
Solar control properties can be
combined with the heat insulating properties of triple thermal
insulating glass. In comparison
to double solar protection insulating glass, the luminous and
solar characteristics change.
10
312 |
| 313
10.12.3.4 Glazing provisions
As with double thermal insulating glass, the basic requirements which can be found e.g.
in the ‘Guidelines for the handling of multi-pane insulating
glass units’ of the Bundesverband Flachglas e.V. (Federal
Sheet Glass Association) apply:
Protection from continuous
moisture (vapour pressure
equalisation), protection from
direct UV radiation (alternatively: UV-resistant edge seal),
material compatibility, application with common building tem-
10.12.3.5 Further characteristics
peratures and zero-stress
installation. Frame constructions must be suitable for holding the triple thermal insulating
glass.
The manufacturer of the insulating glass is not responsible
for defects that appear due to
non-observance of these basic
requirements. The Technical
Guideline of the Glaziers’ Trade
No. 17, ‘Glazing with insulating
glass units’ has to be
observed.
10.12.3.4.1 Setting block installation
The functional properties of
setting blocks must be maintained during the entire period
of use. In order to ensure this,
they have to be continuously
resistant to pressure, resistant
to ageing and sufficiently compatible.
When installing the setting
blocks, care must be taken that
the support and spacer blocks
are placed in a position that is
even and parallel with the edge
of the glazing unit. The block
must hold the entire thickness
of the glazing unit and thereby
carry off the permanent weight
of all three panes. In the case of
systems with free rebate area,
the block must not affect
vapour pressure equalisation.
The block must not cause any
chipping at the glass edges.
Shear stresses of the edge seal
must be minimised.
The Technical Guideline of the
Glaziers’
Trade
No.
3,
‘Installation of setting blocks in
glazing units’ has to be
observed.
10.12.3.4.2 Increased penetration area of the glass
An increased penetration area
of the glass for triple thermal
insulating glass is to be considered acceptable with regard to
the breaking risk of the glass
caused by thermally induced
stresses with heat insulating
frame systems (research pro-
ject HIWIN, subproject B:
Investigations on the breaking
risk of glass due to an
increased penetration area of
the glass, final report April
2003, ift Rosenheim and
Passivhaus Institut Darmstadt).
10.12.3.5.1 Outside condensation
The following applies to every
insulating glass unit: The lower
the heat transmittance – and
the smaller the Ug value –, the
warmer the room-side pane
and the colder the outer pane.
Of course, this also applies to
Furthermore the outer pane has
a direct ‘radiation exchange’
with the sky. Depending on the
individual installation situation,
this radiation exchange leads to
a strong additional cooling of
the outer pane - especially on
clear nights. If the temperature
of the outer pane’s surface falls
below the temperature of the
adjacent outside air, the result
is formation of condensation on
the surface of the outer pane.
In nature, this process is generally known as dew formation. If
the outer pane is heated
together with the outside air,
e.g. through the morning sun,
the condensation disappears.
This phenomenon is not a malfunction, but a sign for the
excellent thermal insulating
value of triple thermal insulating
glass. Due to the enhanced
thermal insulated of triple
thermal insulating glass, condensation on the outer pane’s
surface will appear more often
than with double thermal insulating glass. In order to avoid
the disappointment of or claims
by customers and consumers,
this phenomenon should be
pointed out in advance.
10.12.3.5.2 Insulating glass effect
The ‘Guideline to assess the
visible quality of glass in buildings’, which is published
amongst others by the
Bundesverband Flachglas e.V.
(Federal
Sheet
Glass
Association), describes in section 4.2.2 the so-called ‘insulating glass effect’. Due to this
effect, concave or convex
vaulting of the single panes
occurs and thereby optical distortions are caused in the case
of temperature changes and
fluctuations of the barometric
air pressure. Given the higher
gas volume enclosed within
double cavities, this effect
might be stronger with triple
thermal insulating glass.
10.12.3.5.3 Optical quality
10.12.3.5.3.1 Intrinsic colour
The ‘Guideline to assess the
visible quality of glass in buildings ’ describes in section 4.1.1
the natural colour of all glass
products, also of coated glass.
Due to the existence of a third
glass pane and a second coating, the intrinsic colour of triple
thermal insulating glass might
be more notable than the natural colour of double thermal
insulating glass.
10
314 |
| 315
10.12.3.5.3.2 Edge seal and sash bars
10.12.4.2.1 Slat systems
It is possible to use sash bars in
However, it is recommended to
limit the design to a single cavity.
Most important when testing
slat systems are the visible surfaces of the slats, the headrail
and the bottom rail, and the
position of the slats at upper
and lower stop position (no
partial surfaces or half-lowered
Optical impairments according
to the ‘Guideline to assess the
visible quality of glass in buildings’, such as minor displacement of the spacers or the sash
bars if placed in both pane cavities, do not influence the functionality of triple thermal insulating glass and cannot be
excluded completely.
blinds).
For
horizontallyarranged systems (e.g. held by
drawstrings), the slat profiles
are to be assessed with
respect to their surface and the
side brackets.
10.12.4.2.2 Foil systems – pleated blind systems
10.12.4 Guideline to assess the visible quality of glass
systems
This code of practice was developed by: Arbeitskreis ‘Systeme im
SZR’ (‘cavity systems’ working group) at the Bundesverband
Flachglas e.V. (Federal Sheet Glass Association), Mülheimer Straße 1
D-53840 Troisdorf
With contributions from: ift Rosenheim
10.12.4.1 Scope
10.4.1.1 This guideline applies
to the assessment of the visible
quality of moving and rigid systems installed into glazing cavities such as slats, interlays,
light-deflection gaskets, pleated blinds etc. with all visible
parts. Multi-pane insulating
glass is to be assessed according to the applicable guidelines
and standards.
10.4.1.2 The visible quality of
installed systems is assessed
according to the following
inspection principles and criteria such as angle of view,
viewed surfaces, allowances
and special features of the
respective individual systems.
The visible room-side surface
of the integrated systems is
assessed in permanently
installed condition.
10.4.1.3 Further guidelines and
standards
n
DIN 18073 ‘Roller shutters,
awnings, rolling doors and
other blinds and shutters in
buildings’
n
EN 13120 ‘Internal blinds Performance requirements
including safety’
n
Assessment criteria apply to
horizontally- and verticallyaligned systems only
n
Noises created by opening
or tilting windows and by
motion
are
technically
unavoidable and are not
defects
n
The area in the space
between slats and spacer is
not a visual criterion
n
Signs of wear are not criteria
for visible quality.
formation in their upper and
lower stop position as well as
the individual parts.
10.12.4.2.3 Inspection criteria
10.4.2.3.1 Generally, the
inspection must be made from
indoors at an angle of view corresponding to the normal use
of the room, in keeping with
Table 27 below. From outside, it
must be viewed at a distance
greater than 2.0 m. The defects
may not be marked and no
direct sunlight or artificial light is
allowed to act upon the slats or
foils. The inspection must be
performed under diffused daylight (e.g. overcast sky) without
direct sunlight or artificial lighting. The glazing inside the
premises (indoor glazing)
should be inspected under the
normal
(diffused)
lighting
intended for use of the rooms
at an angle of view preferably
n
10.12.4.2 Testing principles
Preliminary remarks
In foil and pleated blind systems, the surfaces and their
appearance must be assessed
with respect to wave and fold
perpendicular to the surface.
The inspection prerequisites
apply for the upper and lower
stop positions. A partiallyclosed system cannot be
assessed since in such a position it does not perform its
function in the sense of sun/privacy/glare protection.
10.4.2.3.2 Inspection conditions and viewing distances as
regulated in product standards
for the inspected glazing may
deviate from this and are not
considered in this guideline.
Often, it is impossible to comply with the inspection conditions described in these product standards at the inspected
building.
Tab. 1:
Product
Angle of view
JalouBlind system
90°
Foil system*
90°
Light deflection system*
90°
Horizontally arranged slat
system
90°
* Table applies to systems with diffused reflection only
Distance to inspected
surface
1.5 m
2.0 m
2.0 m
1.5 m
10
316 |
| 317
10.12.4.4 Viewed surfaces
The surface to be inspected is
divided into:
n
n
Fig. 1: Viewed surfaces
accumulation permitted, if the
sum of individual lengths does
not exceed 30 mm.
n
Marginal zone = 10 % of the
edge area from the respective width and height dimension (less strict assessment)
Main zone = remaining visible surface area from the
centre of the surface to the
marginal zone (strict assessment)
Main zone
The maximum individual length
of scratches is 15 mm.
Tab. 2:
Assessment criterion
Assessment
Discolouration of the slat ends due to wear
Signs of wear in the cavity permitted to an extent
Residues: permitted to an extent e.g. butyl on the slats
Acc. to Table 3
Acc. to Table 3
Acc. to Table 3
© ift Rosenheim
Marginal zone
n
Tab. 3: Examples
t ≤ 25 mm
t ≤ 5 mm
Fig. 2:
t ≤ 15 mm
No direct sunlight
t ≤ 35 mm
No artificial light
© ift Rosenheim
n
Distance min.
2000 mm
outdoors
Distance acc. to
list
90°
Contrast
0 - 20 %
20 - 40 %
40 - 60 %
60 - 80 %
80 - 100 %
© ift Rosenheim
indoors
n
10.12.4.3 Permitted discrepancies for slat systems
10.4.3.1.2 Spots, inclusions,
stains, coating defects etc. are
assessed as follows:
Permitted per m2 area are
Marginal zone:
max. 4 defects Ø ≤ 3 mm
Main zone:
max. 2 defects Ø ≤ 2 mm
Tab. 5:
Depth of
discolouration
10.12.4.3.1 Discernible surface deviations
10.4.3.1.1 Due to the motion of
the slats upon turning and
upon raising and lowering,
technically-related wear in the
area of the guide rails, tension
cords, lift cords and tapes etc.
cannot be ruled out. Such
residues or discolouration are
assessed according to Tables
2,3,4 and 5.
Tab. 4:
Colour of the slat
Colour of the pollution
t
t
t
t
t
≤ 5 mm
≤ 15 mm
≤ 25 mm
≤ 35 mm
> 35 mm
Contrast
0 - 20 %
OK
OK
OK
OK
no
20 - 40 %
40 - 60 %
60 - 80 %
OK
OK
OK
OK
no
OK
OK
OK
no
no
OK
OK
no
no
no
100 %
OK
no
no
no
no
© ift Rosenheim
10.4.3.1.3 Scratches in the
main and marginal zones, hairline scratches hardly visible, no
318 |
10
| 319
10.12.4.3.2 Permitted slat offset
n
n
Slat offset is assessed from
the two most offset slats of a
pane
The slat offset is only
assessed for one-piece
blinds; this regulation is not
valid for split blinds (two
blinds in one pane).
10.12.4.3.4 Permissible shape deviations
n
Tab. 6:
10.12.4.3.4.1 Permissible twist/ distortion
Pane width
from
to
0
1001
2001
Maximum slat
offset
1000
2000
Tab. 7:
Twist/distortion (EN 13120):
2 mm/m
6
8
10
V
Angular deflection V between one
end of the slat and the other
Local distortion
Dimensions in mm
Fig. 3: Slat offset
Slat offset
n
Slats
Permitted in the punched area
10.12.4.3.4.2 Permissible deflection
Deflection of slats is assessed
on the closed blind.
n
Tab. 8:
Deflection D (EN 13120):
D
10.12.4.3.3 Deviation from perpendicularity/skew blind
The maximum permissible
deviation A from perpendicularity in the upper and lower stop
position is 6 mm per metre of
slat length L, but no more than
15 mm.
Bottom rail: 4 mm
Slat (measured as closed blind)
Length of
the slats
in m
Highest value of
deflection of slats
in mm
L ≤ 1.5
1.5 < L ≤ 2.5
2.5 < L ≤ 3.5
L > 3.5
5
10
15
20
Warping of slats C (EN 13120):
Fig. 4:
Lower stop position
Upper stop position
A
L = Length of the slat
C = ½ L2
C
10.12.4.3.5 Permissible deviation upon incomplete turning
of the slats
When lowered, 2 % of the total
number of slats are allowed to
remain caught such that they
fall into the intended position
A
Slat length L
only when turned. Permanent
catching of the slats is not permitted.
10.12.4.3.6 Minimum closing angle
Slat length L
The closing angle of the slat
system must comply with the
System Description.
Unless otherwise specified, the
minimum closing angle should
be 45°.
10.12.4.3.7 Irregular light passage
Irregular light passage between
the slats is allowed, provided
320 |
n
it is a result of the above stated tolerances for the individual structural components,
n
the other tolerances for
blinds are adhered to.
| 321
10
Among other things, irregular
light passage can result from:
n
irregular deflection of individual slats
10.12.4.3.10 Tilt of two-directionally closing slat systems
with centred pivot
n
closing angle tolerances.
The slats tilt follows DIN 18 073
and must be at least 90°
Fig. 5:
around the longitudinal axis.
Fig. 7:
45°
45°
Shade systems
45°
Light deflection systems
10.12.4.3.8 Closing angle tolerances in the surface
Assessed are:
n
the average value of 3 successive slats
n
for blind heights 90 %, 50 %
(middle), 10 %
n
45°
The maximum angle deviation
in relation to the middle of the
blind may be that given in
Table 9.
10.12.4.3.11 Tilt of one-directionally closing slat systems
with centred pivot
The slat tilt is only assessed on
the closing side and must
be at least 45° around the
longitudinal axis.
Fig. 8:
Tab. 9:
45°
Systems
up to a height of
Shade systems
from a height of
1000 mm
1001 mm
Light-deflection
systems
1000 mm
1001 mm
Tolerance
± 8°
± 12°
± 10°
± 12°
10.12.4.3.12 Slat coverage
10.12.4.3.9 Precision of the opening angle of slat systems
that close only on one side
The individual slats must cover
one another at maximum clos-
Fig. 6:
Fig. 9:
45°
45°
When the slat system is fully
opened, the slats in the vertical
middle third of a vertical pane
may deviate from the horizontal
according to the following
table:
Tolerance
n
ing angle by minimum 1 mm.
min. 1 mm
Tab. 10:
Pane height
from
to
1001
2001
3000
1000
2000
3000
10.12.4.3.13 Slat closure
Tolerance
± 7°
± 8°
± 9°
± 10°
With a closed blind viewed horizontally (90° to the blind), no
direct view through the blind
should be possible.
10
322 |
| 323
10.12.4.4 Roller blind systems and pleated blind systems
10.12.4.4.4 Light transmission
10.12.4.4.1 Discernible surface defects
n
(The blind surface
assessed
follows
10.12.4.2.3)
Tab. 11:
Marginal
zone
Main zone
Direct light transmission (light
passes through the blind
unimpeded etc.) is not permitted.
n
Indirect light transmission
(e.g. through reflections) is
permissible.
Fig. 11:
1. Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains, stamping errors, residues,
coating defects etc.
Area of the pane ≤ 1 m2, max. 4 defects of ≤ 3 mm
Area of the pane ≤ 1 m2, max. 4 defects/m2 of ≤ 3 mm
2 . Scratches
Total of individual lengths max. 90 mm
Individual length max. 30 mm
1. Inclusions, bubbles, spots, stains, stamping errors, residues,
coating defects etc.
Area of the pane < 1 m2, max. 2 defects of 2 mm
Area of the pane > 1 m2, max. 3 defects of 2 mm
Area of the pane > 2 m2, max. 5 defects of 2 mm
2. Scratches
Total of individual lengths max. 45 mm
Individual length max. 15 mm not accumulated.
10.12.4.4.2 Deviation from perpendicularity
Deviations from perpendicularity are assessed in the following
positions:
Permissible
Not permitted
Guide rail
Guide rail
Blind
Blind
Indirect light transmission
Direct light transmission
10.12.4.4.5 In-folding of free blind edges
Free blind edges refer to edges
that are not fastened to any
other components (bottom rail,
winding tube, etc.).
n
Upper stop position (roller
blind / pleated blind open)
In-folding of free blind edges is
allowed if:
n
Lower end position (roller
blind / pleated blind closed)
Fig. 12:
Fig. 10:
Winding tube
Bottom rail
10.12.4.4.3 Wave and fold formation
Waves and folds are not
defects, provided they do not
it results in no direct light
transmittance when viewed
at right angles.
n
it does not impair the function of the roller blind.
Permissible
Guide rail
The maximum permissible deviation A from perpendicularity in the
upper and lower stop
positions is 15 mm.
In-folding
Blind
free blind edge
Deviation
winding tube
n
Fig. 13:
Blind
impair the function of the system.
free blind edge
n
to be
Point
Not permitted
Guide rail
In-folding
Blind
Bottom rail
Direct light transmission
10
324 |
| 325
10.12.4.4.6 Blind changes in the area of guides
10.12.4.6 Special advice
Blind changes such as wear in
the area of guides are permissible if the view through the blind
10.4.6.1 With all systems, a
visible gap can exist to the left
and/or right of the headrail for
technical reasons.
does not change by more than
20 %.
Fig. 14:
Blind
Guide rail
15
10.12.4.4.7 Pleated blind systems
Fig. 15:
10.12.5 Recommendations for integrating systems into insulating glass units
P
This code of practice was developed by: Arbeitskreis ‘Systeme im
SZR’ (‘cavity systems’ working group) at the Bundesverband
Flachglas e.V. (Federal Sheet Glass Association), Mülheimer Straße 1
D-53840 Troisdorf
Introduction
P1
P > P1
The first folds naturally tend to
flatten slightly, also due to the
influence of heat, although the
folding is maintained. The
material must guarantee proper
merging of the folds every time
the blind is lifted.
10.12.4.5 General advice
This guideline is a measure for
assessing the visible quality of
slat, roller blind and pleated
blind systems in multi-pane
insulating glass units. During
the assessment, it must be
generally assumed that, in
326 |
10.4.6.3 With all systems, covers can be added to the glass
surfaces. These covers could
be made of enamel or interlays
on glass, for example. They are
not part of an assessment
according to this guideline and
must be dealt with separately.
10.4.6.2 The individual slats are
fixed in their position by socalled ladder braids. These ladder braids can change length
as a result of the system.
Assessed area
Due to the dead weight of the
material, the course of the fold
width changes between the
first and last folds. This phenomenon is more noticeable on
blinds greater than 1 m in
height than on smaller blinds.
The difference in the course is
not grounds for complaint since
it is due to the nature of the
material.
Effects of temperature-related
elongation and contraction
cannot be ruled out as a principle and are not grounds for
complaint.
Furthermore, these ladder
braids do not unfold evenly.
addition to the visible quality,
the essential features of the
product for fulfilling its function
must also be considered.
Synchronisation of multiple elements cannot be guaranteed.
There are no generally applicable bodies of rules for the products ‘systems integrated into
insulating glass units’ (SiIGU).
This code of practice describes
installation into suitable constructions and is supplementary to the BF Guides 005 and
007.
10.12.5.1 Scope
10.5.1.1 The instructions and
guidelines presented here do
not generally replace the guidelines for glazing of insulating
glass valid at the time of execution, nor those of the system
manufacturer. This guide presents supplementary information
for the special case of systems
in the cavity. These installation
and glazing guidelines apply
only to systems integrated into
insulating glass units (SiIGU)
used for lining insulating glass
used in buildings to create
appropriate products for window, facade and partition wall
systems made from tried and
tested and typical materials
that represents the current
state of the art. Adherence to
this guideline is mandatory for
such installation and is a prerequisite for any warranty.
Adhering to this guideline
allows the production of technically and physically correct
glazing using SiIGU. This
guideline is the prerequisite for
achieving and maintaining the
specific functions of SiIGU.
10.5.1.2 For any general building-related conditions that
must be clarified in detail before
production and installation but
| 327
10
are not covered by this regulation, the system manufacturer’s
approval must be obtained for
the installation case. In such
cases, the system manufacturer can grant case-by-case
approval for the specific building and system.
10.5.1.3 This guideline applies
to rooms at normal room temperature and air humidity only.
It does not apply to indoor
swimming pools, special damp
rooms and rooms with prevailing stresses and requirements
beyond a normal extent. For
such cases, the special regulations for indoor swimming
pools and damp rooms apply.
The generally applicable regulations and rules, the Bauregelliste (German Building
Regulations List, Deutsches
Institut für Bautechnik), issued
by the Verbände für fachgerechte Verglasung (Professional Glazing Associations) in
their latest versions apply. The
following apply in particular:
n
VOB/C ATV DIN 18 361;
‘Glazing work’
n
DIN/ÖN/EN
‘Glazing work’
n
Guidelines of the insulating
glass manufacturers
n
The recognised rules of the
trade
n
Relevant parts of DIN V 18
073
‘Roller
shutters,
awnings, rolling doors and
other blinds and shutters in
buildings - Terms and
requirements’
n
standards
The System Descriptions of
the frame manufactures
10.12.5.2 Glazing of systems integrated into insulating glass
units
10.12.5.2.1 Requirements
A glazing system is based on
the basic requirements for a:
n
tight glazing system
n
sealant-free and
n
outwards-opening (vapour
pressure equalisation) rebate
and the
n
compatibility of all materials
used
These and deviating glazing
systems, e.g. structural glazing,
glued or bonded window systems, structural glazing corners
and structural glazing joints etc.
must be agreed upon with the
system manufacturer. The decision as to the effectiveness and
suitability of the chosen construction can only be assessed
by the executing company,
since it must ensure the functionality of the overall glass system (SiIGU) and construction.
10.12.5.2.2 Rebate design
When dimensioning the rebate,
it must be considered that the
overall glass thickness and
edge seal width is different from
conventional glass systems.
10.12.5.2.3 Installation of setting blocks
With certain SiIGUs, space
must be provided in the rebate
for cable bushings or systemspecific components.
Nevertheless, functional and
compliant installation of setting
blocks in the glass element
must be assured.
10.12.5.3 Storage, transport, installation, inspection
10.12.5.3.1 Functional test
Storage, transport and manipulation (vertical and horizontal)
are system-specific and must
be performed according to the
manufacturer’s specifications.
Insulating glass units with
SiIGUs are generally for vertical
and flush installation. After
installation into wing or fixed
glazing, a system-related functional test must be performed
after adjustment and alignment
of the insulating glass unit.
Damage and modifications to
the cables, cable junctions and
cable connections or other sys-
tem components on or outside
the insulating glass unit are not
permitted.
These units must be properly
protected during storage,
transport and installation.
Each SiIGU must be tested for
functionality during construction, multiple times if necessary. Aside from verifying the
elements themselves, this also
involves the manufacturer-specific functional test of the
SiIGU.
10.12.5.3.2 Commissioning
Inspection and commissioning
of moving SiIGU must be performed under the general conditions of normal use.
(See BF Guide 005)
System-specific notes for the
user must be submitted to the
end customer.
10.12.5.4 Cable connection
10.12.5.4.1 Cable laying
All drilled holes, cut-outs,
edges, corners etc. through or
over which cables will be laid
must be deburred to rule out
damage to the cabling. Suitable
cable bushings must be used.
Care must be taken not to
introduce tensile stresses into
the cables.
10
328 |
| 329
10.12.5.4.2 Accessories
Only electronic and accessory
components approved by the
system manufacturer are
permitted.
10.12.5.5 Window contacts and transitions
10.12.5.5.1 Contact
Window contacts and transitions, e.g. for casement or tilt
and turn elements, must be
arranged preferably on the
band side and above waterbearing level.
Supplementary advice
Setting blocks must be
installed in the unit so as to produce an absolutely vertical
upright edge.
Some systems have a higher
edge seal and therefore require
a greater rebate depth. It is recommended to enquire about
this with the manufacturer
before planning and execution.
10.12.6 Guideline to assess the visible quality of thermally
toughened glass
Introduction
This guideline applies to thermally toughened, flat, singlepane safety glass (SSG), heat-
soaked SSG, SSG-H and heatstrengthened glass for application in building.
10.12.6.1 Scope
This guideline applies to assess
the visible quality of thermally
toughened glass made of float
glass and ornamental glass,
both clear and body-tinted, in
building.
The assessment is carried out
according to the subsequentlydescribed inspection principles
by means of the following
tables
and
information.
Assessment will be for the
remaining clear surface in
installed condition.
10.12.6.2 Inspection
In general, the view through the
pane is what is decisive for the
inspection, not the visible properties of the surface. The deviations perceived during the
inspection are checked for permissibility according to the
tables.
n
Defects of white and bodytinted float glass which are
≤ 0.5 mm are not taken into
account.
n
Defects of white and bodytinted ornamental glass
which are ≤ 1.0 mm are not
taken into account.
n
Damage which cannot be
excluded during the production of float glass, such as
field defects in the form of
inclusions, must not exceed
3 mm including their ‘corona’.
During the inspection:
n
the inspector is at a distance
of 1 m for clear and bodytinted float glass,
n
and at a distance of 1.5 m at
the height of the pane’s centre for clear and body-tinted
ornamental glass. The view
through the pane should be
assessed from an angle that
represents the normal use of
the room. A perpendicular
viewing angle is generally
assumed. The inspection is
carried out with a light intensity that corresponds to diffused daylight.
10
330 |
| 331
10.12.6.3 Permitted discrepancies
The possible deviations and
their respective permissibility
are listed in the table below.
Applicable to: clear and bodytinted float glass only.
n
n
n
Hairline scratch
Surface damage which cannot be perceived with a fingernail
n
Crystalline inclusions (unmelted blend particles)
n
External flat defect at the
marginal zone with arrised
edge
Closed bubble
n
Slight conchoidal defect with
arrised edge, which does not
affect the strength of the
glass
Tab. 1: Permitted per unit – clear and body-tinted float glass
Zone
Hairline scratches
Imperceptible
Bubble
Closed
Inclusions
Crystalline
Flat defects in
the marginal zone
Arrised edge*
Slight conchoidal
defect
Arrised edge*
R
E
permitted
permitted,
but not accumulated
permitted
permitted size
≤ 0.5 mm permitted
corona
≤ 3 mm
not permitted
permitted
permitted size
≤ 0.5 mm
permitted
not permitted
permitted
not permitted
M
permitted,
but not accumulated, up to
total overall length of 150 mm
A chemical and mechanical modification of the surface quality, such as formation of spots and roll marks, is unavoidable in the respective type of glass due
to the thermal toughening process.
not permitted
Fig. 1: Zones of a glass pane
Explanations:
Pane width
Clear width dimension b
Main zone H
E
Pane height
Main zone H
M
assessment of zones H and R
applies.
E = Edge zone, area of 5 % of the
respective clear width and height
dimensions
M = Main zone
Table 2 below lists the possible
defects and their respective
allowances.
n
Closed linear air inclusion
n
Crystalline inclusions (unmelted blend particles)
Range of applicability: only
unworked plate glass and
ornamental glass (clear and
body-tinted)
n
External flat defect at the
marginal area with arrised
edge
n
Slight conchoidal defect with
arrised edge, which does not
affect the strength of the
glass
n
Closed spherical air inclusion
E
E
Clear height dimension h
E
E
R = Rebate zone, penetration area in
the case of frame constructions.
Rebate zone only applies to glazing
with circumferential frame construction. For constructions and door systems with exposed edges, only the
R
R
R
* = not deeper than 15 % of the pane thickness
R
R
n
Hairline scratch
Surface damage which cannot be perceived with a fingernail
10
332 |
| 333
n
Tab. 2: Permitted per unit – rough cast glass and ornamental
glass (clear and body-tinted)
Unit
[m2]
Hairline
scratches
Imperceptible
Linear air
inclusion
Closed
Spherical air
inclusion
Closed
Inclusions
Crystalline
Arrised edge*
Flat defects in the
marginal zone
Arrised edge*
Slight conchoidal
defect
Per m2
glass
surface
permitted on the
entire surface
L ≤ 20 mm
B ≤ 1 mm
permitted
1 defect/m2
L ≤ 10 mm
B ≤ 1 mm
3 mm to 5 mm
1 defect/m2
≤ 3 mm to 5 mm
permitted *
permitted *
≤ 3 mm
permitted on the
entire surface, but
not accumulated
permitted on the
entire surface, but
not accumulated
permitted on the
entire surface,
but not
accumulated
Since ornamental glass is subject to an individual manufacturing process,
spherical or linear inclusions and formation of bubbles are part of the characteristic quality. Deviations of the structure due to change of the roller and
10.12.6.4 Labelling
Thermally toughened glass
must be labelled permanently
and indelibly. The labelling must
include the following information: manufacturer’s name, reference to standard EN 12150
for SSG, EN 14179 for heatsoaked SSG, SSG-H accord-
displacement of the pattern cannot be excluded and are therefore not grounds
for complaint.
* = not deeper than 15 % of the pane thickness for SSG
10.12.6.9 Screen printing and enamelling
ing to BRL A (German Building
Regulations List A ) part 1
annex 11.11, as well as certification authority for SSG-H and
EN 1863 for heat-strengthened
glass or the manufacturer’s
general technical approval.
Additionally valid:
EN 12150 for single-pane safety glass.
EN 1863 for heat-strengthened
glass.
EN 14179-1/-2 for heatsoaked single-pane safety
glass.
Example for application
10.12.6.5 Processing
The following generally applies:
All processing must be carried
out prior to the thermal tough-
ening process. Subsequent
processing of thermally-toughened glass is not allowed.
10.12.6.7 SSG-H
SSG-H must be made of thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass (SSG) according to German Building
Regulations List A, No. 11.12
which in turn is made of float
glass according to German
Building Regulations List A, No.
11.10. Enamelled glass can
also be used. Every pane must
undergo heat soaking according to section 2.1 of BRL. (BRL
2008-1)
Additionally valid:
EN 14179; DIN 18516-4.
10.12.6.8 Heat-strengthened glass
Heat-strengthened glass complies with the requirements of the
manufacturer’s approval by a
construction supervising body.
334 |
Additionally valid:
DIN N 1863-1/-2
10
| 335
10.12.7 Guideline to assess the visible quality of enamelled
and screen-printed glass
10.12.7.1 Scope
This guideline applies for the
assessment of the visible quality
of fully- or partially-enamelled
and screen-printed glass which
is produced through the application and baking of inorganic
colours as single-pane safety
glass or heat-strengthened
glass.
In order to have products that
are suitable for assessment, the
manufacturer must be informed
of the definitive area of application upon placement of the
order. This applies especially to
the following information:
n
Use for look-through purposes. (View from both
sides, e.g. partition walls,
curtain walls etc.)
n
Use with direct background
illumination
n
Edge quality and possibly
exposed visible edges (for
exposed edges, the edges
must either be ground or
polished)
n
n
n
Indoor use
n
Requirements
for
HST
according to Technical rules
for glazing systems with linear support 6/2003 and
German Building Regulations
List A for printed or enamelled SSG
In order to achieve the best
possible solution for applications with view of both sides,
different production methods
are available which are
described in detail in the following:
n
Processing of single panes
to insulating glass or laminated glass (only for approved
colours)
Reference point for screenprinted glass, we recommend provision of samples
If enamelled and/or screenprinted glass panes are laminated and/or processed to
insulating glass, every pane is
assessed individually (like a single pane).
n
n
lowest layer thicknesses
n
highest light transmittance
(depending on the colour)
n
best homogeneity of
colour – however pinholes,
nuanced shadows and
squeegee rubbers cannot
be ruled out
Rolling
n
medium layer thickness
n
low light transmittance
(depending on the colour)
10.12.7.2.1 Enamelled glass and/or screen-printed glass
The enamelled side is normally
installed on the side which is
not exposed to weathering.
Other applications have to be
agreed. Depending on produc-
336 |
tion procedures and colour,
enamelled glass features a
more or less high residual light
transmittance and is therefore
not opaque. Light colours
always have a higher transmittance than dark colours. In the
case of great differences of the
light-emitting diodes or of high
light
intensity
(daylight)
between the normal viewing
side and the rear side, there are
light/dark shadows visible within one pane if observed from
the rear side.
n
good homogeneity of
colour from outside, but
due to the micro-toothing
in the roller there is a surface structure which is oriented in the pulling direction and which can be
noticed on the rear side –
if viewed with backlight,
visible as fine streaks
Casting
n
highest layer thickness
n
lowest light transmittance
(depending on colour),
n
good homogeneity of
colour from outside, but
due to high tolerances of
the coating thickness,
there is shadowing that
can be viewed with backlight
Screen printing
10.12.7.2 Explanations/information/terms
The glass surface is fully enamelled by means of different
types of application. The colour
is always observed through the
non-enamelled glass pane so
that the colour of the glass
affects the colouring. If the
glass is to be observed from
both sides, we recommend
provision of 1:1 samples.
n
Due to the tolerances of the
layer thicknesses, this cannot
be avoided in production, but it
may be disturbing if it is possible or planned that the glass is
observed from both sides.
Applications for see-through
purposes (view from both
sides) require previous agreement with the manufacturer as
enamelled glass is generally not
suitable for backlit applications.
Depending on the manufacturing process, some differences
and special features arise,
which are described below.
10.12.7.2.1.1 Rolling process
The flat glass pane is passed
below a fluted rubber roll which
transfers the enamel paint to
the glass surface without
adding any solvents and therefore in an environmentally
friendly way. However, so a
homogenous colour distribution is ensured (condition:
absolutely flat glass surface, i.e.
ornamental glass can normally
not be rolled), the paint application (thickness of the paint,
opacity) can only be adjusted
to a limited extent. A typical
characteristic is that the roller
structure is visible (painted
side). From the front side
(viewed through the glass viewing angle see 10.6.2.3),
this structure is not visible
under normal conditions.
10
| 337
It must be considered that with
bright colours, a medium (such
as sealant, panel adhesive,
insulation, etc.) that is directly
applied to the rear side (painted
side) may shine through.
Rolled enamel glass is generally not suitable for look-through
purposes; the intended applications must be previously
agreed with the manufacturer
(starry sky). In this type of
process, a slight ‘paint overhang’ may occur at the edges
which might be a bit wavy
especially on the longitudinal
edges (in the rolling direction of
the roll). However, the edge
surfaces will generally be kept
neat.
10.12.7.2.1.2 Casting
The glass pane is passed horizontally through a so-called
‘casting curtain’ (colour mixed
with solvents) and the surface
is covered with paint. By
adjusting the thickness of the
casting curtain and the
throughput speed, the thickness of the applied paint layer
can be controlled in a relatively
large area. However, due to
slight bumps in the spout lip,
there is a risk that streaks of different thickness are caused in
the longitudinal direction (casting direction). The ‘paint overhang’ is considerably higher
than with the rolling process.
10.12.7.2.2 Quality of the edges
If a paint overhang on the edge
and chamfer is not desired, the
customer shall specify this in
the order and this is only possible with a polished edge.
10.12.7.3 Inspection
The visible quality of enamelled
and screen-printed glass is
assessed from a distance of at
least 3 m and at a viewing
angle of 90° to the surface
under normal daylight, without
direct sunlight or backlight and
without artificial lighting. The
glass is always observed from
the side which is not enamelled
or screen-printed, and from
both sides in the case of glass
panes ordered for see-through
purposes.
Behind the test pane, there is a
dull grey, opaque background
10.12.7.2.1.3 Screen printing
On a horizontal screen printing
table, the paint is applied to the
glass surface through a narrowmesh screen using a
squeegee; in this process the
thickness of the applied paint
can only be influenced slightly
by the mesh width of the
screen. Therefore, the applied
paint layer generally is thinner
than with rolling and casting
and depending on the selected
colour it will be more or less
translucent. Any media that are
directly applied to the rear side
(painted side) (i.e. sealant,
panel adhesive, insulation, etc.)
will shine through. Typical phenomena in this production
process are the formation of
slight streaks (depending on
at a distance of 50 cm. Defects
must not be marked.
Defects that cannot be recognised from this distance are not
assessed.
With regard to SSG-specific
defects, the visible guideline for
single-pane
safety
glass
applies.
When assessing the defects,
the pane is divided into rebate
zone and main zone according
to the drawing above.
Fig. 1: Zones of the glass pane relevant for assessment
the colour and application) both
in printing direction and transverse to printing direction or
occasionally occurring ‘slight
blurs’ through punctual cleaning of the screen during production, more or less visible.
The position of the printing pattern has to be agreed for the
dimensions of the pane (O
point and free margin). Due to
tolerances in the glass and the
screen, unprinted margins of
up to 3 mm are possible. A
paint overhang on the glass
edge is due to the production
process. Printing of glasses
with a slight texture is possible;
however, this must be reconciled with the manufacturer.
Main zone*
* If a visible edge is ordered, there
is no edge zone and the main zone
extends to the edge of the pane.
The requirements of visible quality
are listed in Tables 1 and 2 below.
Edge zone 15 mm all round
10.12.7.4 Special Information
Metallic paints, acid-etched
colours, anti-slip coatings or
multi-colour printing can be
realised. The respective special
properties or the appearance of
the product must be agreed
upon with the manufacturer.
The following tolerances are
not valid for these specific
applications. A provision of
samples is recommended.
10
338 |
| 339
n
Tab. 1: Types of defects/tolerances for fully or partly
enamelled glass
Type of defect
Main zone
Surface defects in the
enamel, point-form*
and/or linear
Area:
max. 25 mm2 Width: max. 3 mm,
Quantity: max. 3 defects,
isolated 5 mm
none of which Length: no restriction
≥ 25 mm2
Not permitted
Permitted
No restriction
Not permitted
Permitted
No restriction
Not applicable
Permitted
Clouds / haze /
shadow
Water spotting
Paint overhang on
edges
Tolerance of dimensions
with the margin enamelling
and partial enamelling**
(see Fig. 2)
Height of enamelling:
≤ 100 mm
≤ 500 mm
≤ 1000 mm
≤ 2000 mm
≤ 3000 mm
≤ 4000 mm
Position tolerances for
the enamel**
(for partial enamelling only)
Colour deviations
n
Rebate zone
Tolerance of
dimensions with
partial enamelling (Print size)
Position tolerance with regard
to the reference
edge
Rebate zone
Surface errors in
Area:
max. 25 mm
screen print point-form* Quantity: max. 3 errors,
and/or linear
none of which
≥ 25 mm2
Clouds / haze /
Permitted Permitted
shadow
Water spotting
Impermissible
Paint overhang on
edges
Design tolerance (b)
(See Fig. 3)
Print area:
≤ 100 mm
≤ 500 mm
≤ 1000 mm
≤ 2000 mm
≤ 3000 mm
≤ 4000 mm
± 1.5 mm
± 2.0 mm
± 2.5 mm
± 3.0 mm
± 4.0 mm
± 5.0 mm
Print size ≤ 200 cm:
± 2 mm
Print size > 200 cm:
± 4 mm
See point 10.2.7.1.5
* Defects ≤ 0.5 mm
(‘starry sky’ or ’pinholes’ = extremely small surface defects in the enamel) are permissible and are generally not taken into account. The
correction of surface defects with
enamel paint prior to the toughening process or with organic paint
after the toughening process is permissible; however organic paint
must not be used if the glass is processed to insulated glass and if the
surface defect is situated in the area
of the edge seal. The corrected surface defects must not be visible
from a distance of 3 m.
Main zone
2
Depending on the width
of enamelling:
Fig. 2: Types of defects/tolerances
for fully or partly enamelled glass
(tab. 1)
Tab. 2: Error types/tolerances for screen-printed glass
Error type
Not applicable
Width: max. 3 mm,
isolated 5 mm
Length: no restriction
No restriction
Permitted
No restriction
Permitted
No restriction
Depending on the size of
the print area:
± 1.0 mm
± 1.5 mm
± 2.0 mm
± 2.5 mm
± 4.0 mm
± 5.0 mm
See Fig. 3 und 4
Errors per figure***
Screen printing position Print size ≤ 200 cm:
tolerance (a)**
± 2 mm
(See Fig. 3)
Print size > 200 cm:
± 4 mm
Precision of resolution
(c and d)****
Depending on the size
(See Fig. 3 and 4)
of the print area:
≤ 30 mm
± 0.8 mm
≤ 100 mm
± 1.2 mm
> 100 mm
± 2.0 mm
Colour deviations
See Point 10.2.7.1.5
*
Errors ≤ 0.5 mm (‘starry sky’ or
‘pinholes’ = extremely small surface errors in the screen print) are
permitted and are generally not
taken into account.
*** Errors must not be closer than
250 mm to one another.
Widespread failure is not permitted (repetition at the same position on every pane).
**
The design tolerance is measured
from the reference point.
**** The tolerance d can be cumulative.
** The tolerance of the enamelling is
measured from the reference point.
10
340 |
| 341
Production error
(position of the same pane dimensions and print)
With regard to geometric figures and/or so-called shadow
masks less than 3 mm or progressions from 0 % to 100 %
and so-called film piles, the tolerances mentioned above may
be perceived as irritating. A
provision of 1:1 samples is recommended:
n
n
Tolerances of geometry or of
the distance about a tenth of
a millimetre are noticed as a
gross deviation.
In any case, these applications have to be checked
with
the
manufacturer
regarding feasibility.
Fig. 3: Types of errors/tolerances for screen-printed glass (Tab. 2)
a
Design tolerance – print area (b)
Screen print position tolerance (a)
errors’.
Fig. 4: Geometry of the figure (precision of resolution)
Assessment: Errors per figure (Tab. 2)
Print area (b)
e.g. Þ ≤ 30 mm = Size of error
Þ ± 1.0 mm
Print area (b)
e.g. Þ ≤ 30 mm =
Height of error
± 1.0 mm
Print area (b)
e.g. Þ ≤ 2000 mm = Width of error ± 2.5 mm
c
Applies correspondingly to
ovals and other geometries.
(Assessment = Width x Height)
10.12.7.5 Assessing the colour impression
Colour deviations can generally
not be excluded as they can be
caused by several influences
that cannot be avoided. Due to
the influences named below,
there might be a recognisable
colour difference between two
The basic glass generally used
is float glass, i.e. the surface is
flat and there is a high light
reflection. Additionally, different
coatings can be added to this
glass, such as solar protection
layers (increase of the surface’s
light reflection), reflectionreducing coatings, or the glass
can be slightly embossed, e.g.
structured glass.
Additionally, there is the intrinsic colour of the glass which
depends essentially on the
thickness and type of the glass
(e.g. solid coloured glass, discoloured glass, etc.).
Subsequent deliveries Information
The enamel paint consists of
inorganic materials which are
responsible for the colour and
which are subject to minor fluctuations.
342 |
c
enamelled glass panes with
specific light and viewing conditions which the viewer might
assess as being ‘disturbing’ or
‘not disturbing’ on a very subjective basis.
10.12.7.5.1 Type of the basic glass and influence of the
colour
cd
dc
b
Precision of resolution (c)
In general, table 2 can also be
used for assessing ‘printing
Fig. 5: Geometries
c
Anything up to three panes per
item is not assessed as a production error. If more than 3
panes per item have the same
error at the same position, then
this is assessed as a production error.
These materials are mixed with
‘glass drip’ so that the colour
mingles with the glass surface
during the toughening process
and the colour becomes an
inseparable part of the glass.
The final colour can only be
seen after this ‘burning
process’. The colours are
‘adjusted’ in such a way that
they ‘melt’ into the surface
within 2 to 4 minutes with a
temperature of approx. 600620 °C. This ‘temperature window’ is very small and especially with panes of different sizes,
the temperature cannot be
reproduced
every
time.
Furthermore, the type of application is also decisive for the
colour impression. Due to the
thinly applied paint layer, screen
printing has a lower covering
capacity than a product manufactured in a rolling process
with a more thickly applied
paint layer.
| 343
10
10.12.7.5.2 Type of light in which the object is viewed
10.12.7.6 Instructions for use
The light conditions change
continuously depending on the
time of year, the time of day
and the current weather. This
means that the spectral colours
of the light which reach the
colour through the different
media (air, 1st surface, glass
body) are of different intensities
in the area of the visible spectrum (400 - 700 nm).
n
The first surface already reflects
a part of the impinging light,
depending on the angle of incidence. The ‘spectral colours’
impinging on the colour are
partially reflected or absorbed
respectively by the colour (pigments). This is why the colour
seems different depending on
the source of light.
10.12.7.5.3 Viewer and method of viewing
The human eye responds very
differently to different colours.
While a very minor colour difference in shades of blue is
strongly perceived, colour differences in shades of green are
perceived less.
Other influencing factors are
the viewing angle, the size of
the object and above all the
distance at which two objects
to be compared are placed
with regard to each other.
An objective visual evaluation
and assessment of colour differences is not possible for the
abovementioned reasons. The
introduction of an objective
evaluation standard therefore
requires a measurement of the
colour difference under precisely-defined conditions (type
of glass, colour, type of light).
If the customer requires an
objective evaluation standard
for the chromaticity coordinates, the procedure has to be
agreed upon with the manufacturer in advance. The general
344 |
course of action is described
below:
n
Sampling
colours
one
or
more
n
Selecting
colours
one
or
more
n
Determination of tolerances per colour by the
customer, e. g. permitted
deviation
of
colour:
ΔL* <= ... ΔC* <= ... ΔH* <=
... in the CIELAB colour system, measured with type of
light D 65 (daylight) with d/8°
spherical shape, 10° standard observer, brilliance
included
n
Feasibility check by the supplier with regard to compliance with the specified tolerance (size of order, availability of raw materials etc.)
n
Production of a 1:1 sample
and approval by the customer
n
Production of the order within the specified tolerances. If
no special evaluation standard is agreed, ΔE* <= 2,90
applies, measured according
to the abovementioned
measuring method.
Applications with enamel or
partial enamelling respectively and screen printing or partial screen printing for interlay
with laminated safety glass
have to be checked for feasibility by the manufacturer.
This applies particularly if
etching shade is used with
interlay, as the optical density of the etching shade might
be strongly reduced and the
effect of the etching shade
only remains if used on level
1 or 4.
n
Enamelled and screen-printed glass with inorganic
colours can only be produced as single- pane safety
glass (SSG) or heatstrengthened glass.
n
Subsequent processing of
the glass, regardless of type,
will essentially influence the
characteristics of the product and is not permitted.
n
Enamelled glass can be
used as monolithic panes or
for laminated safety glass or
in insulated glass. In this
case, the respective provisions, standards and directives have to be respected
by the user.
n
A heat-soak test can be carried out with enamelled glass
that is executed as singlepane safety glass HST. The
respective requirement for an
SSG heat-soak test has to
be checked by the user and
communicated to the manufacturer.
n
The static values of enamelled glass cannot be equated with non-printed or nonenamelled glass.
10.12.7.7 Metallic paints
Due to the manufacturing
process and the pigmentation
of metallic paints, there can be
notable differences in the
colour impression which make
a
uniform,
homogenous
appearance of glass panes
impossible if these are installed
next to or above each other.
This is a product- specific characteristic of metallic paints and
it leads to a lively appearance
of the facade, even from different viewing angles.
10
| 345
10.12.8 Guideline to assess the visible quality of laminated
glass and laminated safety glass
10.12.8.3.4 Non-transparent
stains
10.12.8.3.7 Scratches or
grinding marks
DIN ISO 12543-6:1998
Visible defects in the composite
glass (e.g. tin stains, inclusions
in the glass or in the intermediate layer).
Linear damage on the outer
surface of the composite glass.
10.12.8.1 Scope
This standard specifies defects
in the glass pane and in the
intermediate layer and also test
procedures with regard to the
appearance. The acceptance
criteria in the visible area are
particularly observed. These
criteria are applied to products
upon delivery.
10.12.8.3.5 Bubbles
Normally air bubbles that may
be present in the glass or in the
intermediate layer.
10.12.8.2 Normative references
This
European
standard
includes specifications of other
publications by means of dated
or undated references. These
normative references are quoted in the respective passages
in the text and the publications
are listed subsequently. In the
case of fixed (dated) refer-
ences, the publication in its
dated form is part of the standard; subsequent amendments
of the publication have to be
explicitly included in this standard. In the case of undated references, the respectively latest
version of the referenced publication applies.
Glass in building - Laminated glass and laminated safety glass - part 1: Definition and description of component parts
EN ISO 12543-5
Glass in building - Laminated glass and laminated safety glass - part 5: Dimensions and edge finishing
EN ISO 14449
Evaluation of conformity
For special constructions, the respective basic standards of the used glass
apply, e.g. EN 1096-1 for coated glass
10.12.8.3.6 Foreign bodies
Any undesired objects that
enter the composite glass
during production.
10.12.8.3.8 Notches
Sharply pointed fissures or
cracks that run from an edge
into the glass.
10.12.8.3.9 Folds
Impairments that are formed
through folds in the intermediate layer and are visible after
production.
10.12.8.3.10 Streaks caused through non-homogeneity in
the intermediate layer
Optical distortions in the intermediate layer caused by production defects in the interme-
diate layer and visible after production.
EN ISO 12543-1
10.12.8.3 Definition
For the application of this standard, the definitions of EN ISO
12543-1 and the following definitions apply:
10.12.8.3.1 Punctual defects
This type of defect includes
non-transparent stains, bub-
bles and foreign bodies.
10.12.8.3.2 Linear defects
This type of defects includes
foreign bodies and scratches or
10.12.8.4 Defects in the surface
10.12.8.4.1 Spot defects in the visible surface
When inspecting the glass
according to the inspection
process as stated in 10.6.2.3,
the permissibility of spot
defects depends on the following aspects:
n
Size of the defect
n
Frequency of the defect
n
Size of the pane
n
Number of panes as components of the composite glass
This is illustrated in Table 42.
Defects that are smaller than
0.5 mm are not considered.
Defects that are larger than 3
mm are not permitted.
COMMENT: The permitted discrepancy of spot defects in
composite glass does not
depend on the thickness of the
individual glass panes.
COMMENT: When four or more
defects occur in a distance
from each other of < 200 mm,
grinding marks.
10.12.8.3.3 Other defects
Glass defects, such as notches, and defect of the intermedi-
ate layer, such as folds, shrinking and streaks.
10
346 |
| 347
this is referred to as accumulation. With three-pane composite glass, this distance is
decreased to 180 mm, with
four-pane composite glass to
150 mm and with composite
n
glass with five or more panes to
100 mm. The number of permissible defects in Table 42
must be increased by 1 if individual intermediate layers are
thicker than 2 mm.
Tab. 1: Permitted discrepancies with spot defects in the
visible surface
Defect size
0.5 < d ≤ 1.0
d [mm]
Pane size A
For all sizes
A≤1
No restriction,
but no
accumulation of
defects
1
2
3
4
A in m2
Number of
permissible
defects
2
3
4
5
panes
panes
panes
panes
1.0 < d ≤ 3.0
1<A≤2 2<A≤8
A>8
1/m2 1.2/m2
1.5/m2 1.8/m2
2/m2 2.4/m2
2.5/m2 3/m2
2
3
4
5
10.12.8.8 Defects in edges that are not framed
Composite glass is normally
installed in frames. If in exceptional cases the glass is not
framed, then only the following
edge-finishing options are permitted:
n
Ground edge
n
Polished edge
n
Mitred edges
Linear defect of less than 30
mm in length are permitted.
n
Tab. 2: Permitted discrepancies with linear defects
in the visible surface
Pane size
Number of
permitted defects
of 30 m length
≤5m
5 to 8 m2
≤ 8 m2
2
Not permitted
1
2
10.12.8.5 Defects in the marginal surface of panes with
framed edges
defects with a diameter of 5 mm
and less are permitted in the
marginal area. With pane sizes
≤ 5 m2, the width of the marginal area is 15 mm. The width of
the marginal area is increased by
20 mm for pane sizes > 5 m2. In
case that bubbles are present,
the area containing bubbles
10.12.8.6 Notches
Notches are not permitted.
10.12.8.7 Folds and streaks
Folds and streaks are not permitted in the visible area of the pane.
348 |
must not exceed 5% of the marginal area.
Fig. 1:
Marginal zone
Visible area
Tab. 3: According to
ISO 12543-5
Element thickness Deviation
≤ 26 mm
> 26 ≤ 40 mm
> 40 mm
± 1 mm
± 2 mm
± 3 mm
10.12.8.9 Thickness tolerances
n
Tab. 4: Thickness tolerances
Dimension
Dimensions in width or height
Element thickness
up to 26
up to 40
10.12.8.4.2 Linear defects in the visible surface
linear defects are permitted as
stated in Table 41.
n
up to 100 cm
up to 200 cm
more than 200 cm
10.12.8.10
± 2.0 mm
± 3.0 mm
± 4.0 mm
± 3.0 mm
± 4.0 mm
± 5.0 mm
more than 40
± 4.0 mm
± 5.0 mm
± 6.0 mm
Size tolerances
Visible edges must be indicated upon order in order to
achieve best possible edge
quality. However, productionrelated storage edges and
interlay residues in the fringe
area will remain visible. If no visible edge is specified, then
interlay residues at the edge are
permitted.
For external glazing with the
glass edges readily exposed to
weather conditions, changes in
the colour impression may
occur in specific products
along the margin of 15 mm due
to the hygroscopic property of
the PVB interlay and in dependence of the respective ambient
conditions. These changes are
permitted. In fixed-dimension
laminated safety glass products interlay overhang may be
present, particularly at the supporting edge.
10.12.8.11 Inspection methods
The composite glass to be
inspected is arranged vertically,
in parallel to and in front of a
matt grey background and
exposed to diffused daylight or
equal light conditions. The testing person stands in front of the
pane at a distance of 2 m and
looks at it at an angle of 90°
(with the background positioned at the other side of the
glass pane). Defects that
appear disturbing in this test
situation need to be marked.
Assessment is then carried out
according to specification. For
external glazing with the glass
edges readily exposed to
weather conditions, changes in
the colour impression may
occur in specific products
along the margin of 15 mm due
| 349
10
to the hygroscopic property of
the PVB interlay and in dependence of the respective ambient
conditions. These changes are
permitted.
10.12.8.12 Coloured interlays
After time, coloured and matt
interlays will undergo a loss of
colour intensity, caused by
weather influences (e.g. effect
of UV radiation). That means
that the colours of retrofitted
glass panes may differ more or
less from those of the previously installed glass of the same
type. This is not grounds for
complaint. Colour differences
may occur for retrofitted glass.
10.12.8.13 Laminated safety glass with stepped edges
steps – this is not grounds for
complaint. A counter piece that
is inserted into the laminated
safety glass element should be
indicated by the customer
(width, depth, ...). Due to production processes, interlay
residues are present at the
glass edges; these may be
deformed at the storage edge
due to points of contact and
are not grounds for complaint.
Fig. 2:
10
The technical data/values
specified refer to average values from numerous basic glass
manufacturers, or were determined according to prevailing
standards in tests by an independent testing institute. The
functional values refer to test
pieces of the dimensions
intended for testing. An extended warranty for technical values
is not granted, especially if
tests were performed in different installation situations or if
new measurements are made
on-site.
10
As a supercooled liquid, glass
is one of the brittle bodies that
permit no appreciable elastic
deformation (as does steel, for
example) and will break immediately when the limit of elasticity is reached. Since internal
stresses leading to sponta-
The causes of surface damage
are wide ranging. Suitable protective measures must be
arranged from the outset. We
draw attention particularly to:
8
[mm]
Welding/grinding work
Welding and grinding work near
windows requires effective protection of the glass surface
against welding beads, flying
sparks etc., otherwise the insulated glass units could suffer
irreparable damage.
n
Etching
Etching of the glass pane surface can occur due to chemicals contained in building
350 |
Internal sash bars within the
pane cavity change the heat
transfer coefficient as well as
the degree of sound attenuation.
All specified values are standard nominal values and are
subject to the corresponding
product tolerances according
to EN standard, German
Building Regulations (BRL) and
the basic glasses used.
10.12.10 Glass breakage
n
8
Photometric and solar parameters are determined and calculated according to the applicable standards.
neous glass breakage no
longer occur with the glass
quality manufactured today,
glass breakage only occurs
due to outside influence and is
therefore definitely not grounds
for complaint.
10.12.11 Surface damage
10
For any laminated safety glass
with stepped edges, interlay
residues are generally removed
in the area of the step. For double laminated safety glass elements, this is generally possible
and must be agreed. For laminated safety glass that consists
of more than two panes with
the middle pane(s) being set
back in relation to the outer
panes, the interlay is cut off,
provided that the step width is
equal to the glass thickness of
the middle pane(s) or the step
depth is equal to the glass
thickness of the middle pane(s).
For all other step sizes cutting
of the interlay must be agreed.
If removal of the foil can be carried out as described before,
residues cannot be fully prevented due to production
methods and are not grounds
for complaint. For all step layouts that do not comply with
the above-said interlay residues
cannot be removed from the
10.12.9 Guaranteed characteristics
materials and cleaning agents.
Upon long-term action in particular, such chemicals lead to
permanent etching.
n Water damage
The long-term action of water
can also lead to surface damage, especially if heavy pollution has acted over a prolonged
period before building cleaning.
(Mortar, plaster etc.)
n Protective measures
Effective protection against
etching and water damage can
be added in the form of the
protective interlay UNIGLAS® |
PROTEC.
| 351
10
10.12.12 Special glass combinations
n Sound reduction glass
The full effectiveness of sound
reduction glass can only be
achieved with optimum frame
construction. Sound reduction
glass generally has a high surface weight. Special care must
therefore be taken with the stability of the frame and fittings.
The structure of UNIGLAS®
sound reduction glass is in
most cases asymmetrical.
Normally, it makes no difference to the sound reduction
function which way the thicker
pane faces when installed. Only
if there is the possibility of grazing incidence of sound (e.g. on
the top storeys of a building) is
it necessary to place the thinner
pane specifically on the outside.
In such applications, however,
it must be ensured that the thin
pane is still thick enough to
withstand the incident wind
loads. In other cases, the thicker pane should be placed on
the outside for structural and
optical reasons.
The good sound insulation of
UNIGLAS® sound reduction
glass can only be fully appreciated if the entire window element has a high degree of
tightness and the closure elements are designed to be
sound-reducing.
n Solar Control Glass
In order to obtain an optically
perfect appearance, the counterpane should be thinner than
the solar protection pane.
Wired, ornamental, and polished wired glass must not be
used as the inner pane behind
solar protection panes.
n Safety glass
Safety glass has a special glass
structure combined with a high
surface weight. With such glazing, it is therefore necessary to
observe the following:
n
Use of certified block settings of Shore-A hardness
from 60° to 80°, where
compatibility with the interlay composite must be
ensured.
n Sealant-free rebate bottom.
n The glazing beads must
be installed on the room
side.
n With wooden windows
and safety glass according to any standard, the
glazing beads must be
bolted on.
With increasing glass thickness, the natural colour (green
tinge) of the individual panes
becomes more noticeable. This
effect can be reduced by using
special glass that has less of a
tint.
Alarm glass (SSG, laminated
safety glass): When ordering
alarm glass, the position of the
connection and the viewing
side must be specified. The
manufacturer’s handling and
installation regulations must be
observed.
n
Insulating glass with sash
bars
Sash bar systems are available
in different colours, widths and
designs for many requirements.
They can lead to clapping noises upon movements of the
casement.
Visible sash bars
With visible, built-in sash bars,
slight unevenness can occur at
the points where they cross as
a result of the craftsmanship.
Hidden sash bars
All hidden sash bar systems are
built with universal sash bars
(Georgian bars). Any sash bar
spacing and any sash bar width
from 15 mm is possible. Sash
bars made of wood, aluminium
or plastic by the window fitter
are fastened pointwise on the
insulating glass unit (mirror
adhesive tape) and sealed on
both sides.
n
Lead and brass glazing
In order to protect valuable,
handcrafted
lead
glazing
against weathering while simultaneously increasing heat insulation, lead glazing can be built
into the cavity of insulating
glass at the request of the customer.
For lead glazing with blown
glass, it is possible for minor
colour deviations, hairlines,
open bubbles etc. to occur.
This is due to the nature of production and signs of ‘genuine
handcraft’. All sash bars and
lead and brass glazing can produce clapping sounds or make
contact inside the cavity as the
casement is moved. This cannot be technically prevented.
n
Convex insulating glass/
large bulls-eye panes
For production reasons, minor
deviations in the curvature and
small mineral melt-points can
occur on the surface of the
pane. These production-related
features are a sign of ‘genuine
handcraft’ and are not grounds
for complaint.
n
heavily patterned glass
If the structure is built into the
cavity, then there is a risk of
leaks. This accordingly voids all
warranty.
n
‘Altdeutsch K’
Sometimes known as glacier or
winterlake glass, this machineproduced cast glass has deliberate open bubbles, heavily
irregular patterns and varying
glass thicknesses. For these
reasons, there is a greater risk
of breakage, especially for
small-format panes. We therefore recommend ordering these
only for decoration.
n
wired glass or steel wire
laminated glass
Vertical installation of insulating
glass units in conjunction with
wired glass or ornamental
wired glass and insulating glass
units of two wired glass panes
increases the risk of breakage.
Glass breakage is not grounds
for complaint.
In wired glass, ornamental
wired glass or steel wire laminated glass, it is technically
impossible to produce even or
congruent wire paths.
10
352 |
| 353
10.12.13 Maintenance | Pane Cleaning
10.12.13.1 Maintenance
Frames, fittings, paint coatings,
sealants or sealing strips all
undergo natural aging. In order
to maintain the warranty, it is
therefore in the owner’s
responsibility to make sure the
necessary functional condition
of the materials and components is upheld by continual
maintenance.
10.12.13.2 Pane cleaning
Pane cleaning and possibly the
removal of existing labels must
be done by the client or owner
using mild cleaning agents. We
recommend clear water with
the addition of denatured alcohol.
Grout wash and other alkaline
building material deposits must
be removed immediately since
they could otherwise lead to
chemical etching of the glass
surface, which can fog the
glass.
Pane pollution that cannot be
removed by the conventional
method of plenty of water,
sponge, squeegee, chamois or
conventional spray cleaners
and cloth can be eliminated
using fine industrial steel wool
type 00 or 000. Scratching
tools, razor blades, scrapers
and abrasive agents must be
avoided.
Excess smoothing agents arising during sealing must be
removed immediately. For
metal oxide-coated glasses
(e.g. Antelio or Stopsol), the
manufacturers’ special cleaning
regulations apply.
10
354 |
| 355
Appendix
Appendix
Subject Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Photo Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Insulating Glass - Product summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
356 |
| 357
Subject Index
A
Absorption of radiant energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Absorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 98, 106, 138, 257
Accessible (treat-on) glazing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 156, 201
Accessible (walk-on) glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 67, 156
Acid resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Acoustic interlayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Active safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Adhesion behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Alarm glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 201, 275, 353
Alkali resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
All-glass railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 188
Altitudes, effect on insulating glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Angle of inclination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 141, 289
Anisotropies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Annual primary energy demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 211
Anti-reflective glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Artistic glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Atmospheric pressure fluctuations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 281
Attached facade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Austrian standards (ÖNormen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 303
B
Back-fill cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90
Backfilling materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 286
Balustrades . . . . . . 34, 38, 65, 76, 124, 125, 150, 184, 290
Bank glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Bases of design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 81, 82
Basic glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 45, 236, 343
Bending radii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 49, 53, 62
Bending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 203, 287, 321
Bird protection glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Blind edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Block fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Block setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 258, 259, 307, 314, 329
Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Bonding of insulating glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 264
Bubbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329, 299, 303, 324, 346, 353
Building inspection authorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Building rules list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 351
Bullet resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 154, 158, 159, 313
Butt joint sealing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Butt joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 87, 88, 90, 91, 277
C
Case-by-case approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Cast glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Cast resin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 260, 304
Casting methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337, 338
Cavity width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
CE mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 318
Channel-shaped glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Circadian light transmittance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 120, 121
Classification of safety glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 154, 158
358 |
Subject Index
Cleaning of glass . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72, 74, 75, 292, 302, 354
Climatic conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Climatic stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Closing angle tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Coated glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 216, 253, 301, 313
Coating in fixed dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Code of practice for glued or bonded windows . . . . . . . 265
Coefficient of linear expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Coincidence frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 134
Cold effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 38
Cold facade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Colour neutrality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Colour Rendition Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Coloured interlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 115
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 85, 271, 278, 284
Compression strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104, 302, 307, 315
Conductor loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42
Conservatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 138, 145
Construction products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 205, 218
Contour accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 60
Convex glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Convex glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 353
Corner cut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 245
Covering of joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Curtain wall . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 83, 125, 210, 212, 213, 214
Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Curved glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 47, 49
Curved glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 47, 50
Cutback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Cut-out dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 245, 246
Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
D
Damage of external surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Decibels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 123, 128, 132, 133
Decorative glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 107, 108
Density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 27, 77
Design glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Deviation limit of glass thicknesses . . . . . . . . 237, 238, 255
Dew point temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Dew point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Diagonal break values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Digital glass printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
Dimension of glass thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Dimension tolerance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Dimension tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
DIN standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Direction of structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 239, 353
Displacement tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Distortions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 249
Double pane effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 302, 312, 315
| 359
Subject Index
Subject Index
Drilled holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174, 246, 247, 248, 249
Drilled sinkhole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Drive systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Dry glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Durability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
E
F
G
Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281, 306
Edge connection systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Edge connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 86, 251, 301, 316
Edge cut-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 157, 244, 245, 246
Edge finishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 235, 242, 244
Edge offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 56, 235, 255
Edge types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Electrochromic glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 292, 294
Electromagnetic damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Emissivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 96, 310
EN standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 236, 275, 328, 351
Enamel coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 336
Energy balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 200
Energy certification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Energy efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 50, 125
Energy gains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 114, 123, 138
Energy Saving Regulation (EnEV) . . . . . . . 50, 138, 209, 309
Energy-saving glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 9, 96, 120
Energy-saving regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 138, 209, 309
ESG alarm glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 201, 275, 353
Etching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Explosion resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
External monitoring/quality control . . . . . . 35, 120, 217, 218
Facades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 150, 162, 295
Fall-protection glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 204, 225, 313
Faults . . . . . . 285, 303, 324, 340, 342, 346, 347, 348, 349
Fire protection . . . . . . . . . 76, 142, 222, 276, 286, 297, 313
Firearms protection classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Float glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Folds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 324, 326, 346, 347, 348
Formation of deep shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 289
Fracture structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 49
Frame deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Frame dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Frame profil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 91, 92, 93, 183, 311
Frameless sliding systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 184, 185
Frosted glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fully glazed constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Furniture made of glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Garland effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281, 282
Gas filling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 84, 1114, 119, 218, 310
General approval by a building inspection authority . . . . 219
Georgian bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 353
Glare prevention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 317
360 |
Glass breakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Glass corners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 88
Glass doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Glass edges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 234
Glass floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Glass fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 108
Glass joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 88, 276
Glass printing, digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68
Glass rebate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 308, 329
Glass stairway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Glazing blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Glazing provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Glazing systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 264, 278, 328
Glazing, linear mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Global radiation distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 99, 148
Greenhouse effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 114
Ground edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 235, 349
Guideline for triple-pane thermal insulating glass . . . . . . 309
Guidelines . . . 194, 232, 297, 304, 308, 316, 331, 336, 346
H
Hard coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 150, 162
Hardness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Harmful interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 279, 280
Heat effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 38
Heat radiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Heat strengthering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 36, 37, 216, 331
Heat strengthened glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 49, 249, 334
Heat transmittance coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 81
Heat-soak single-pane safety glass . . . . . 34, 216, 249, 334
Heat-soak test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 345
Heat-soak-SSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 216, 249, 334
Horizontal glazing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
I
Impact resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 65
Inclined glass installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 288, 289
Installation of insulating glass units. . . . . 256, 304, 327, 354
Installing sash bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 82, 119
Insulating glass edge connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 301
Insulating glass effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 315
Insulating glass terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Insulating glass with sash bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 302
Insulating glass with stepped edge(s). . . . . . . . 94, 107, 289
Insulating glass . . . . 49, 216, 304, 316, 327, 328, 353, 354
Interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378, 279, 280
Interference phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 302
Interior shading systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Interlayer system in insulating glass . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 317
Internal quality control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 217
ISO standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Isotherm representation . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94
J
Joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 88, 280, 282
| 361
Subject Index
L
Laminated glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 66, 216, 354
Laminated safety glass . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 64, 216, 253, 350
Large-surface panes . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 138, 142, 257, 260
Laws and regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 200, 274, 308
Lead glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 108, 353
Lift glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Light direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 109, 140, 141
Light reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 100, 141, 343
Light scattering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Light transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321, 325
Light transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 100
Limit dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Linear mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 208
Load distribution . . . . . . . . . . 259, 268, 269, 271, 276, 282
Loads/Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 290, 291, 308, 312
Low altitudes, effect on insulating glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Low-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 96, 106, 162, 310
Lower break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
M
Magnetron method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 115
Manual for thermally curved glass in construction . . . . . . 43
Material compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 82, 118
Mechanical stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 308
Metallic colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 339, 345
Minimum glass thicknesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Model Building Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Modulus of elasticity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 33, 65
Multifunction glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
N
Natural colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 101, 301, 315, 336, 343
Nominal value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 82, 118, 351
Non-regulated building products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Non-ventilated facade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Notches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346, 347, 348
O
Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 254, 255, 320
OIB guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Opacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Ornamental glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 239
Outside condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Overhead glazing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 224, 288, 295, 313
P
Paint overhang. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 338
Partition walls of glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Passive safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Penetration area, increased . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311, 314
Penetration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 154, 158, 159, 313
Permissibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 318
Perpendicularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 320, 324
Personal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 202, 204
Physical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 65, 83, 89, 148, 302
Plane-parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 102
Plant growth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
362 |
Subject Index
Plasticiser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 280, 281
Pleated blind systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 324, 326
Point-fixed glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162, 290
Primary sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 271, 277
Privacy protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Processings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 244, 255, 334
Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 25
Projecting glass roof system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164, 165
Projecting roof systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164, 165
Protection against burglary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
PV glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
PVB interlayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 202, 216
Q
Quality mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Quality test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Quality . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 274, 297, 315, 316, 331, 336, 339
R
Radar reflection-damping glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Radiation reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Radiation spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Radiation transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Radiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Raw plate glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Rebate width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 258, 294
Removal of edge coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Requirements of building inspection authorities . . . . . . . . 84
Residential building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 210, 211
Resistance classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 158
Resistance to attack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 154, 297, 313
Resistance to changing temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 37
Resultant sound insulation factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Road traffic noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 133
Roller blind systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Rolling process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 337
Roof glazing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 91, 93, 281
Rosenheim Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
S
Safety and resistance to ball impact . 29, 34, 155, 228, 290
Safety glass. . . . . . . . . . 32, 34, 48, 64, 155, 158, 216, 352
Safety mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 154, 271
Sandblasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 108
Sash bar glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 302, 316, 353
SC (shading coefficient) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Scratch resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 75
Scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 303, 332, 347
Screen printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 335, 337, 338
Sealant groove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90, 91
Sealing profiles . . . . . . . . . 72, 91, 258, 262, 271, 290, 354
Seating furniture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Secondary sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 271, 277
Selectivity factor S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Self-cleaning glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
| 363
Subject Index
Self-cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 120
Shell supporting effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58
Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Shielding, electromagnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 47, 204
Showers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 38, 73
Single-pane glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 58, 150
Single-pane safety glass (SSG) . . . . . . . . . 32, 48, 216, 249
Skew blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Skid resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Slanted glazing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 201
Slat coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Slat systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317, 318, 322
Sliding door system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Sliding windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Smoke protection closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Snow load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Soft coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 150
Solar control glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 296, 352
Solar control systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Solar control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 138, 271, 313
Solar energy gains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Solar gains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Solar input factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 138
Solar transmittance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 99, 100
Sound control films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Sound insulation curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Sound insulation factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 129, 132, 133
Sound insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 106, 128, 271, 352
Sound level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 130, 132, 133
Sound protection walls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Sound reduction glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 134
Sound spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Spacer bar coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Spacer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 253, 267, 281
Spacers made of stainless steel . . . . 80, 88, 116, 162, 171,
Special deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 245, 246
Special glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Special safety glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Special shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 244, 245, 252, 255
Special tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 243
Spectrum adjustment value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Spy mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 85, 135, 157, 202
Stains . . . . . . . . . . 299, 303, 318, 324, 340, 341, 346, 347
Standard deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 244, 245, 246
Standard products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Standard tolerances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 242
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 196, 274, 308
Stiffening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 276
Storage . . . . . . . . 59, 71, 86, 208, 255, 304, 306, 323, 329
Stripes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 102, 337, 347, 348
364 |
Subject Index
Structure of insulating glass . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 89, 115, 266
Structure of laminated safety glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Structure of solar control glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 141
Structure of sound protection insulating glass . . . . 134, 352
Suitable glass products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 301
Sunblinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Surface damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332, 351
Surface defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324, 347
Surface temperature . . 35, 93, 94, 103, 104, 115, 276, 291
Surface texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 239, 333
Switchable insulating glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140, 292
T
Tangential transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 56
Technical regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 204, 209
Tempering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tensile bending strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 27, 32, 33, 37,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 58, 59, 202, 216
Thermal bridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 116
Thermal conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 116
Thermal insulation during summer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 215
Thermal insulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 76, 83, 101, 114,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 271, 296, 309, 310
Thermal requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Thermal stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 119, 291
Thermally curved glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 47
Thermoplastic systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Thickness tolerance. . . . . . . . . 54, 250, 251, 255, 262, 349
Thrown-object resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 154, 158, 313
Tinted glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 69, 108
Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 236, 340, 341
Total energy transmittance (g value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 311
Traffic safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 77
Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 255, 256, 257, 304, 306, 329
TRAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Triple-pane insulating glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 309
TRLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
TRPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Twist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
U
Ü-mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Upper break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Usability of glass products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47, 59, 265, 285
UV protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
U-values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 88, 310, 311
UV-radiation transmittance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
| 365
Subject Index
V
Vacuum insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Vapour pressure equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 270
Vertical facades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 93
Vertical glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 222
Visual assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 346
Visual quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 297, 316, 331, 336
Visual screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 40, 146
W
Warm edge connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Warping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Water resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Wave formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Weather sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 284
Weighted sound reduction index . . . . . . . 51, 129, 132, 133
Wellnessglass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Wet glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Wind load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 155, 203
Wire plate glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 241
Wired glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 296, 354
X-ray protection glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Photo Evidence
If not stated otherwise, all photos
and figures are taken from the
archives of:
366 |
UNIGLAS® and the UNIGLAS®
partner companies, Saint Gobain
Glass, BF, VFF and mkt.
Achieve more together – UNIGLAS®
Your UNIGLAS® advantages - overview:
n
Guarantee funds
n
Technical support
n
CE certification
n
Flexibility and independent
customer cooperation
n
Wide product range
n
Versatile competence
n
UNIGLAS® | SLT software
for independent project
design
n
Long-term market experience
In-house test lab
n
True added value through
active partnership
n
UNIGLAS GmbH & Co. KG Robert-Bosch-Straße 10 D-56410 Montabaur
Tel.: +49 (0) 26 02 / 9 49 29-0 Fax: +49 (0) 26 02 / 9 49 29-299
eMail: [email protected] www.uniglas.net
Energy Saving Glass
0.52
0.6
Solar 0.7
0.7
One 1.0
Premium 1.1
UNIGLAS® | VITAL Wellnessglass
UNIGLAS® | VITAL 0.7
4:
4:
4:
4:
4
4
- 18 - 14 - 14 - 12 - 16 - 16 -
4
4
4
4
:4
:4
-
18
14
14
12
-
[dB]
τV1 τCV(460)1 g1
ρV1
EN 410 EN 410 EN 410 EN 410
[%]
[%]
[%]
[%]
SC
Aspect ratio
Weight
Safety class
ShadingCoefficient
Reflectance of
light1 to the outside
Total solar energy
transmittance
Degree of light
transmittance
RW,P (C;Ctr)
Degree of light
transmittance
Degree of sound
insulation
Ug
[mm] [W/m K]
SHK
EN 356
SV
max.
2
[kg/m ]
:4
:4
:4
:4
48.0
40.0
40.0
36.0
24.0
24.0
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
1.0
1.1
32
32
32
32
32
32
(-1;-4)
(-1;-4)
(-1;-4)
(-1;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
70
70
73
70
71
80
67
67
72
68
67
77
50
50
61
50
50
63
15
15
19
15
22
13
0.63
0.63
0.76
0.63
0.63
0.79
-
30
30
30
30
20
20
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
4: - 14 - 4 - 14 - :4
40.0
0.7
32 (-1;-4)
81
79
70
13
0.87
-
30
1:6
26.0
28.0
30.0
34.0
32.0
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
36 (-2;-5)
37 (-2;-5)
38 (-3;-7)
39 (-3;-8)
40 (-1; -5)
80
79
79
79
78
-
62
61
59
59
59
12
12
11
11
11
0.78
0.76
0.74
0.74
0.74
-
25
30
35
35
40
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:10
29.0
31.0
33.0
1.1
1.1
1.1
38 (-1;-5)
41 (-3;-7)
42 (-2;-6)
79
79
78
-
59
58
58
12
12
12
0.74
0.73
0.73
-
33
38
43
1: 6
1:10
1:10
38.0
38.0
40.0
1.1
1.1
1.1
44 (-2;-7)
45 (-2;-8)
50 (-3;-8)
78
78
75
-
57
57
56
12
12
12
0.71
0.71
0.70
-
44
48
49
1:10
1:10
1:10
28.8
29.8
31.5
30.5
33.5
33.1
34.5
38.5
36.5
40.5
33.5
35.5
38.5
37.5
41.5
38.3
41.5
45.5
49.5
59.3
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.1
1.2
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
39
40
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
54
(-1;-5)
(-3;-7)
(-2;-7)
(-2;-6)
(-2;-6)
(-3;-7)
(-2;-7)
(-2;-8)
(-3;-7)
(-2;-7)
(-2;-6)
(-3;-7)
(-2;-6)
(-3;-8)
(-2;-8)
(-3;-8)
(-3;-8)
(-1;-5)
(-2;-6)
(-2;-6)
78
78
78
78
78
77
78
78
77
77
77
77
77
76
76
76
76
74
71
69
-
56
56
55
56
54
55
56
56
56
56
57
54
56
55
55
55
55
51
50
47
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
11
12
12
11
11
11
12
11
10
10
0.70
0.70
0.69
0.70
0.68
0.69
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.68
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.69
0.69
0.64
0.64
0.60
P1A
P1A
P2A
P1A
P2A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P2A
P1A
P2A
P2A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P2A
P2A
31
34
37
36
37
41
36
36
41
41
46
47
46
52
52
51
51
71
62
77
1:6
1:8
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
38.0
40.0
42.0
44.0
51.0
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.6
36
37
39
41
41
(-2;-6)
(-1;-6)
(-2;-5)
(-1;-5)
(-2;-5)
70
69
69
69
69
-
48
48
48
47
47
15
15
15
15
15
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.59
0.59
-
35
40
45
50
48
1:6
1:8
1:10
1:10
1:10
42.5
44.8
45.8
46.5
46.5
44.5
44.5
48.8
45.0
51.0
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.7
0.7
0.7
42
42
43
43
44
45
45
46
47
50
(-1;-5)
(-2;-6)
(-3;-7)
(-1;-7)
(-2;-7)
(-2;-6)
(-2;-6)
(-2;-7)
(-2;-6)
(-2;-6)
69
69
68
69
68
68
68
68
68
67
-
48
46
46
46
46
48
46
45
46
44
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
14
0.60
0.58
0.58
0.58
0.58
0.60
0.58
0.56
0.58
0.55
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
45
51
53
46
56
50
61
61
50
65
1:8
1:10
1:10
1:8
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
1:10
27.5
1.1
37 (-2;-6)
79
-
58
12
0.73
P4A
26
1:6
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.1
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
62
60
30
25
70
70
68
69
59
53
50
-
29
32
17
15
37
41
41
37
47
27
27
10
15
18
28
14
10
10
12
19
17
18
0.36
0.40
0.21
0.19
0.46
0.51
0.51
0.46
0.59
0.34
0.34
-
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
UNIGLAS® | PHON Sound Reduction Glass
Double noise protection glass made of float glass
UNIGLAS® | PHON 26/36 1.1
6 - 16 - :4
8 - 16 - :4
10 - 16 - :4
10 - 20 - :4
10 - 16 - :6
Double noise protection glass made of casting resin combinations
®
UNIGLAS | PHON 29/38 1.1 GH
GH 9 - 16 - :4
UNIGLAS® | PHON 31/41 1.1 GH
GH 9 - 16 - :6
GH 9 - 16 - :8
GH 10 - 20 - :8
GH 10 - 18 -:10
GH 11 - 20 - :9
Double noise protection glass in combination with noise control foil (NC)
UNIGLAS® | PHON 29/39 1.1 NC
NC 9 - 16 - :4
NC 9 - 16 - :5
NC 10 - 16 - :6
NC 8 - 16 - :6
NC 10 - 18 - :6
NC 9 - 16 - :8
®
UNIGLAS | PHON 34/43 1.1 NC
NC 8 - 20 - :6
NC 8 - 24 - :6
NC 8 - 20 - :8
NC 8 - 24 - :8
NC 8 - 16 - :10
NC 10 - 16 - :10
®
NC 8 - 20 - :10
®
NC 12 - 16 - :8 NC
NC 12 - 20 - :8 NC
NC 9 - 16 - :13 NC
NC 9 - 20 - :13 NC
NC 17 - 16 - :13 NC
NC 15 - 24 - :11 NC
®
NC 19 - 28 - :12 NC
Triple noise protection glass made of float glass
6: - 12 - 4 - 12 - :4
8: - 12 - 4 - 12 - :4
8: - 12 - 4 - 12 - :6
10: - 12 - 4 - 12 - :6
®
8: - 16 - 5 - 16 - :6
UNIGLAS | PHON 51/41 0.6
Triple noise protection glass in combination with noise control foil (NC)
6: - 12 - 4 - 12 - :8 NC
NC 8: - 12 - 4 - 12 - :8
NC 8: - 12 - 5 - 12 - :8
NC 9: - 14 - 4 - 14 - :6
®
NC 9: - 12 - 6 - 12 - :8
8: - 12 - 4 - 12 - :8 NC
NC 8: - 10 - 6 - 10 - :10
NC 9: - 12 - 6 - 12 - :10
NC 8: - 12 - 4 - 12 - :8 NC
NC 12: - 12 - 6 - 12 - :8 NC
Noise protection glass with resistance against thrown objects P4A (A3)
®
UNIGLAS | PHON 28/37 1.1 A3
A3 / 33.4 - 16 - :4
UNIGLAS® | SUN Solar Control Glass
UNIGLAS® | SUN 62/29
UNIGLAS® | SUN Neutral 60/32
UNIGLAS® | SUN Sky 30/17
UNIGLAS® | SUN Platin 25/15
UNIGLAS® | SUN Nordic 70/37
UNIGLAS® | SUN Neutral S 70/41
UNIGLAS® | SUN Scandic 53/27
Thickness
2
[mm]
UNIGLAS® | TOP
UNIGLAS® | TOP
UNIGLAS® | TOP
UNIGLAS® | TOP
UNIGLAS® | TOP
UNIGLAS® | TOP
UNIGLAS® | TOP
U-value
EN 673 - 15 K
Structure
Element
thickness
Type
6:
6:
6:
6:
6:
6:
6:
6:
6:
6:
6:
-
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
-
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
:4
4
4
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
www.uniglas.net
Technical Information:
1
The technical data stated above are mean values of the various basic products. For updated technical data please contact your supplier.
2
Due to the insulated glass effect SSG and/or an increased edge contact area
may be required for various dimensions.
3
Noise insulation values have been determined in company-own tests.
4
The stated data represent the heat transmittance coefficient Up as measured
value of the ift / Up according to abZ that includes the safety additions.
The thicknesses and weights of the glasses resistant to impact from throwing of objects vary and according to test certificates and can only be stated
in detail by the supplier upon award of orders.
National additional values e.g. for the Ug value have not been considered.
Technical information must be confirmed.
UNIGLAS® is a registered trade mark.
Subject to printing errors an change.
[mm]
[mm] [W/m2K]
6:
6:
:6
6:
6:
6:
6:
6:
6:
6
6:
6:
6
6:
6:
6
6:
:6
6:
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.2
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Venetian Blind System
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Jalousie-System
6 - 32 - :6
6 - 27 - :6
6: - 12 - 6 - 27 - :6
44
39
57
1.2
1.2
0.7
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Foil System
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Folien-System OD1.1
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Folien-System OD2
UNIGLAS® | SHADE Folien-System OD1.1
4
4
4
4:
4:
4:
28
28
28
44
44
44
1.1/0.9
1.1/0.9
1.1/0.9
0.6/0.6
0.6/0.6
0.6/0.6
UNIGLAS® | SAFE
UNIGLAS® | SAFE
UNIGLAS® | SAFE
UNIGLAS® | SAFE
UNIGLAS® | SAFE
UNIGLAS® | SAFE
UNIGLAS® | SAFE
A1/ 9 - 16 - :4
A2/10 - 16 - :4
A3/10 - 16 - :4
B1/185 - 10 - :6
B2/245 - 10 - :6
B3/315 - 10 - :6
29.0
30.0
30.0
34.05
40.05
47.05
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
UNIGLAS® | SOLAR Photovoltaik Glass
UNIGLAS® | SOLAR P4A (A3)
A3 Solar -16 - :4 ESG
26.0
1.4
UNIGLAS® | PANEL Vacuum Insulation
UNIGLAS® | PANEL
UNIGLAS® | PANEL
ESG-H 6 - 18 - 6 ESG
ESG-H 6 - 22 - 6 ESG
30.0
34.0
UNIGLAS | SUN Solar Control Glass
UNIGLAS® | SUN Neutral S 40/24
UNIGLAS® | SUN Office 40/22
UNIGLAS® | SUN HC Silber 56/46
UNIGLAS® | SUN Silber 50/32
UNIGLAS® | SUN Blau 46/36
UNIGLAS® | SUN HC Blau 36/26
UNIGLAS® | SUN Blau 19/18
UNIGLAS® | SUN Grün 64/38
UNIGLAS® | SUN Grün 47/29
UNIGLAS® | SUN HC Grün 45/29
UNIGLAS® | SUN Grau 38/35
UNIGLAS® | SUN Silber Grau 28/24
UNIGLAS® | SUN HC Grau 26/26
UNIGLAS® | SUN Bronce 43/37
UNIGLAS® | SUN HC Bronce 19/22
UNIGLAS® | SUN HC Sahara 33/31
UNIGLAS® | SUN Gold 29/28
[dB]
τV1 τCV(460)1 g1
ρV1
EN 410 EN 410 EN 410 EN 410
[%]
[%]
[%]
[%]
b
SHK
EN 356
Aspect ratio
Weight
Safety class
ShadingCoefficient
RW,P (C;Ctr)
Reflectance of
light1 to the outside
Ug
Total solar energy
transmittance
Degree of sound
insulation
Thickness
Degree of light
transmittance
U-value
EN 673 - 15 K
As of: November 2011
Element
thickness
The technical data/values stated in this document are based on the values
stated by the basic glass manufacturers or have been determined within the
framework of a test carried out by an independent test institute on the basis of
the relevant standards. The functional values refer to the test pieces in the
dimensions as provided for the test for vertical installation situations (i.e. 90° off
the horizontal axis).
Structure
UNIGLAS will not accept an extended guarantee for the technical values, particularly if tests are carried out with other installation situations or additional
measurements are carried out during and after construction.
For installation and assembly the UNIGLAS® guidelines for glazing must mandatorily be considered in their currently applicable version. All information is
provided according the latest state at printing and may be changed without
prior notification.
The maximum dimensions of the individual products depend on the static
requirements of the constructions. More combinations of insulatied glass are
possible, please state your requirements.
Type
For reduction of condensation formation at the edge of the glass UNIGLAS
recommends using the thermally improved edge compound system
UNIGLAS® | TS Thermo Spacer respectively UNIGLAS® | STARTPS.
Degree of light
transmittance
5
For calculations of U values the applicable values according to EN 673 (column
4) shall be used. Type designations are industry-specific and do not document
any physical values.
SV
max.
[kg/m2]
®
Safetyglass
P2A (A1)
P3A (A2)
P4A (A3)
P6B (B1)
P7B (B2)
P8B (B3)
- 16 - 4
- 16 - 4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - 4
- 16 - 4
- 16 - 4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - :4
- 16 - 4
- 20 - :4
- 20 - :4
- 20 - :4
- 20 - 4 - 12 - :4
- 20 - 4 - 12 - :4
- 20 - 4 - 12 - :4
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
(-2;-5)
40
40
56
50
43
39
46
36
19
64
47
46
38
28
26
43
19
33
29
-
24
22
45
31
31
27
36
26
18
38
29
29
35
24
26
37
22
31
28
16
16
37
39
31
43
14
18
18
9
17
26
6
22
12
6
12
35
36
0.30
0.28
0.56
0.39
0.39
0.34
0.45
0.33
0.23
0.48
0.36
0.36
0.44
0.30
0.33
0.46
0.28
0.39
0.35
-
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
30 (-1;-4)
30 (-1;-4)
32 (-1;-5)
80/3
80/3
69
-
63 / 12
63 / 12
48
13
13
15
0.79/0.15
0.79/0.15
0.60
-
30
30
45
1:6
1:6
1:6
30
30
30
32
32
32
80/6
80/1
80/0
70/6
70/1
70/0
-
63 /
63 /
63 /
50 /
50 /
50 /
13
13
13
15
15
15
0.79/0.13
0.79/0.09
0.79/0.04
0.63/0.13
0.63/0.09
0.63/0.04
-
20
20
20
30
30
30
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
37 (-2;-6)
37 (-2;-6)
38 (-2;-6)
393
403
413
78
78
78
74
71
69
-
56
56
55
48
45
42
12
12
12
11
10
10
0.70
0.70
0.69
0.60
0.56
0.53
P2A
P3A
P4A
P6B
P7B
P8B
31
31
31
545
695
825
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
1:6
36 (-2;-5)
-
-
-
-
P4A
27
1:10
0.3/0.54 36 (-1;-2)
0.2/0.44 38 (-1;-3)
-
-
-
-
-
31
31
1:10
1:10
(-1;-4)
(-1;-4)
(-1;-4)
(-1;-5)
(-1;-5)
(-1;-5)
10
7
3
10
7
3
-
www.uniglas.net

www.uniglas.net

Transcription

Similar documents

DocuCentre SC2020 - Quick Reference Guide

Glass instructions

campbell hall expansion

THE BEAUTY OF FLEXIBILITY

Classroom “Chihuly” - Dick Blick Art Materials

PDF - 2.1 MB - Glasbau Hahn

Summer 2016 Exhibitions and programme activities throughout the

“Eugenio Cerioli l`Arte nel Vetro” glassworks was established in

The Dish that does it all